Caltech Spec

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences Issued for Construction California Institute of Technology, Pasadena CA September 29, 2000

SMP/SHG - PCF&P Table of Contents 27720.00 00010-1

DOCUMENT 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Project Directory 00010Table of Contents 00111Bid Information 00300Information Available to General Contractor 00500Agreement Form (AIA A111) 00600Performance Bond and Payment Bond (AIA A312) 00700General Conditions SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01110 Summary of Work 01230Alternates 01250Modification Procedure 01295Measurement and Payment 01312Project Meetings 01315Project Coordination 01325Schedules and Reports 01330 Submittal Procedure 01410Regulatory Requirements 01420References 01450Quality Control 01451Facade Mock-up Testing 01455Mock-ups 01500Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01600 Basic Product Requirements 01720Field Engineering 01730Cutting and Patching 01745Project Cleaning 01770Closeout Procedures 01772Record Documents 01773Operating and Maintenance Data 01774Warranties and Bonds DIVISION 2SITE WORK 02220Demolition 02235Clearing and Grubbing 02300Earthwork 02312Earthwork for Grading and Paving DIVISION 2SITE WORK (continued)



02313Earthwork for Utilities 02500Standard for Exterior Utilities 02510Water Distribution 02530Sanitary Sewers 02620Subdrain Systems 02630Storm Drainage 02711Granular Base 02741Paving and Surfacing 02745Asphaltic Concrete Paving 02754Concrete Paving 02755Site Concrete Work 02765Pavement Marking 02782Stone Masonry Pavers 02810Irrigation 02815Fountain Pool 02820Fences and Gates 02846Parking Bumpers 02870Site Furnishings 02900Planting DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100Concrete Formwork 03200Reinforcing Steel 03300Cast-in-Place Concrete 03450Architectural Precast Concrete 03551Cementitious Floor Underlayment DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04415Slate 04450Stone Veneer 04451Stone Lettering 04465Granite DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120Structural Steel 05300Metal Decking 05400Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05410Exterior Enclosures Stud Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications 05510Metal Stairs 05700Ornamental Metal 05800Seismic Joint Assemblies DIVISION 6WOOD AND PLASTIC



06100Rough Carpentry 06200Finish Carpentry 06410Custom Casework 06550Solid Polymer Fabrications 06610Resin Fabrications DIVISION 7THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07135Exterior Wall Waterproofing 07140Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 07165Crystalline Waterproofing 07180Traffic Coatings 07210Building Insulation 07260Vapor Retarders 07265Vapor Control Membrane 07411Metal Roofing 07412Sheet Metal Roofing 07416Stainless Steel Panels 07460Aluminum Siding 07550Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07600Flashing and Sheet Metal 07840Firestopping 07920 Joint Sealants 07930Facade Sealants DIVISION 8DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08310Access Doors and Panels 08331Overhead Coiling Doors 08385Sound Control Doors and Frames 08451All-Glass Door 08589Double-Glazed Acoustical Windows 08630Metal-Framed Skylights 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Exterior Glass and Glazing 08810 Interior Glass and Glazing 08900Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall DIVISION 9FINISHES 09110Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing System 09120Ceiling Suspension System 09200Lath and Plaster 09250 Gypsum Board 09300Tile 09400Terrazzo 09510Acoustical Ceilings DIVISION 9FINISHES (Continued) 09545Specialty Ceilings



09635Stone Flooring 09640Wood Flooring 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680Carpet 09720Epoxy Flooring and Wall Covering Systems 09725Fabric Wall and Ceiling Covering 09750Stone Facing 09776Reinforced Gypsum Units 09820Acoustical Insulation and Sealants 09900 Painting DIVISION 10SPECIALTIES 10100Visual Display Boards 10160Metal Toilet Compartments 10200Louvers and Vents 10250Fiberglass Grating 10265Wall Surface Protection System 10270Access Flooring 10400Identifying Devices 10508Locker Systems 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10810 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11EQUIPMENT 11000Owner-Furnished Contractor-Installed Equipment 11132Projection Screens 11138Projector Lifts 11205Animal Watering System 11400Food Service 11406Constant Temperature Rooms 11452Residential Appliances 11602Laboratory Casework 11610Laboratory Fume Hoods 11620Laboratory Equipment 11625Miscellaneous Laboratory Specialties DIVISION 12FURNISHINGS 12310Manufactured Metal Casework 12491Blinds 12493Shades 12520Seating 12600Multiple Seating DIVISION 13SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13096Radio Frequency and Magnetic Shield Ebclosure DIVISION 14CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14210Electric Traction Elevators



14240Hydraulic Elevators DIVISION 15MECHANICAL 15010Basic Mechanical Requirements 15052Welding Pressure Piping 15121Piping Expansion Compensation 15140Supports and Anchors 15170Motors and Drives 15171Variable Frequency Drives 15190Mechanical Identification 15242Mechanical Sound, Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control 15260Piping Insulation 15280Equipment Insulation 15290Ductwork Insulation 15300Fire Suppression System 15410Plumbing Piping 15411Disinfection of Potable Water Systems 15430Plumbing Specialties 15440Plumbing Fixtures 15450Plumbing Equipment 15480Special Systems 15510Hydronic Piping and Valves 15515Hydronic Specialties 15517Instrumentation 15520Steam and Steam Condensate Piping and Valves 15525Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties 15540Centrifugal Pumps 15541Condensate Return Pumps 15545Chemical Water Treatment 15755Heat Exchanges and Unfired Steam Generators 15785Computer Room Air Conditioning Units 15790Reheat Coils 15812Steam Humidifiers 15850Air Handling Units 15855Fan Coil Units 15860General Exhaust Fans 15865Fume Hood Exhaust Fans 15870Air Filters 15880Ductwork 15885Ductwork Accessories 15887Sound Attenuators 15888Air Terminal Devices 15910Basic Control Requirements 15920Hydronic Control Valves and Actuators DIVISION 15MECHANICAL (Continued) 15930Laboratory Pressurization Controls 15940Pneumatic Control Systems



15950Energy Management System (EMS) 15960Sequence of Operation and Points List 15990Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing DIVISION 16ELECTRICAL 16050Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16110Conduits and Raceways 16112Surface Metal Raceways (Plugmold) 16113Cable Trays 16121Conductors 16122Medium Voltage Cables 16130Outlet and Junction Boxes 16131Interior Pullboxes 16132Exterior Pullboxes and Manholes 16133Cabinets 16140Wiring Devices 16141Nameplates and Warning Signs 16170Switches, Disconnect and Safety 16180Overcurrent Protection 16190Vibration Isolation 16191Restraining Devices 16310Unit Substations 16312Primary Substations 16425Distribution Switchboards 600 Volts and Below 16450Grounding System 16460Transformers 16470Panelboards 16480Motor Controls 16510Lighting 16610Automatic Transfer and Bypass/Isolation Switches 16620Emergency Electric Generator Set 16720Fire Alarm System 16750Telephone and Data Cabling 16751CATV Cabling System 16930Lighting Control System END OF DOCUMENT


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Bid Information 27720.00 00111-1

DOCUMENT 00111 BID INFORMATION 1.01THE PROJECT IS Broad Center for the Biological Sciences California Institute of Technology, Pasadena CA 1.02THE OWNER IS California Institute of Technology (Caltech) Pasadena CA 91125 1.03THE ARCHITECTS ARE Executive Architect: SmithGroup Incorporated 1919 Santa Monica Boulevard Santa Monica, CA 90404-1950 Tel: (310) 586-5400 Fax: (310) 586-1091 Design Architect: Pei Cobb Freed & Partners 600 Madison Avenue New York, NY 10022 Tel: (212) 751-3122 Fax: (212) 872-5443 1.04CONTRACTORS A.The Owner has selected the following General Contractor: 1.Rudolph & Sletten 20 Executive Park, Suite 155 Irvine, CA 92614-6736 1.05DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT A.The Work covers construction of the Broad Center for the Biological Sciences at

California Institute of Technology, Pasadena CA. B.The proposed Work includes construction of an approximately 120,000 gross square

foot building, 3-story with 2 basement stories, laboratory/classroom building containing MRI facility, electron diffraction facility, X-ray diffraction facility, vivarium facility and related labs, classrooms, faculty offices, shipping and



receiving area, Cafe, utility tunnel, and electrical substation. C.The Work includes Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection,

Electrical, Site Landscape, and Civil work including grading, utilities and paving. Also included is radio frequency shielding, two electric traction and one hydraulic elevator.

1.06DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.Drawings and Project Manuals will be furnished to the General Contractor electronically. 1.07PROJECT FUNDING A.The Owner plans to finance this project with private funds. 1.08TIME FOR COMPLETION A.The Contract Time, allotted for completion of the construction work, is 660 calendar days

from the Notice to Proceed. 1.09GUARANTY BONDS A.Performance Bond and Payment Bond is required and bidders attention is directed to

Document 00600. 1.10CONSULTANTS ON PROJECT A.Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Consultants: Ove Arup & Partners 2440 S. Sepulveda Blvd. Suite 180 Los Angeles, CA 90064 B.Civil: KPFF Consulting Engineers 2401 Colorado Avenue, Suite 315 Santa Monica, CA 90404-3500 C.Landscape: Thomas A. Lockett, FASLA Campus Planning & Design 14025 Panay Way Marina Del Rey, CA 90292-6167 D.Laboratory Planner: Kornberg Associates Architect 687 Bay Road



Menlo Park, CA 94025 END OF DOCUMENT


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Information Available to General Contractor 27720.00 00300-1

DOCUMENT 00300 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO GENERAL CONTRACTOR 1.Geotechnical Investigations by: a.Results of a general historical investigation of the area are contained in a report by

Converse Consultants entitled "Geological Investigation Report for Proposed Caltech Broad Center" dated September 24, 1999 prepared for California Institute of Technology. The report is not part of the Contract Documents and is made available to the Contractor for his information only. The Owner assumes no responsibility whatsoever in respect to the sufficiency or the accuracy of the investigations made, the records thereof or the interpretations set forth therein. Such investigations have been made for the purposes of study and design and there is no representation, either express or implied, that the conditions indicated in the investigation reports or records are representative of those existing throughout the site or any part thereof, or that unlooked for develop-ments may not occur or that materials other than or in proportions different from those indicated may not be encountered.

b.During construction, if the Contractor encounters soil or subsurface conditions which

differ materially from those shown in the Drawings or in the investigation records referred to above, the Contractor shall promptly, and before such condition is disturbed, notify the Owner's Representative in writing of such conditions. Any claims of the Contractor shall not be allowed unless he has given the required written notice. The Owner's Representative will investigate the conditions. If he finds the conditions materially different from those which reasonably should have been anticipated on the basis of a careful consideration of said records of investigations, logs of borings, and examination of the site, and finds that said conditions will cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, and/or the time required for performance of the Contract, the Owner will modify the Contract terms in writing to provide for an adjustment as permitted in the General Condition in cost and/or time of performance. In rendering his decision, the Owner's Representative will use the boring results and other studies of the site, and such technical assistance therewith from the Soils Engineer as may be required, but nothing in such use shall serve to imply that the status of the boring results and other studies has changed. They are not part of the Contract Documents.

c.The Geotechnical Investigation is available for viewing at Caltech. The geotechnical

Investigation report can be purchased from Converse Consultants; telephone (626) 930-1233.

END OF DOCUMENT


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Agreement Form 27720.00 00500-1

DOCUMENT 00500 AGREEMENT FORM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01AGREEMENT FORM A.The AGREEMENT FORM is the American Institute of Architects' AIA Document A111,

"Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Cost of Work Plus a Fee" 1997 Edition which is made part of the Project Manual with the same force and effect as though set forth in full.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DOCUMENT


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Performance Bond and Payment Bond 27720.00 00600-1

DOCUMENT 00600 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND PART 1 GENERAL 1.01PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND A.Performance Bond and Payment Bond is the American Institute of Architects" AIA

Document A312, "Performance Bond and Payment Bond," December 1984 Edition, 6 pages, which is made part of the Project Manual with the same force and effect as though set forth in full.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DOCUMENT


SMP/SHG - PCF&P General Conditions 27720.00 00700-1

DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01GENERAL CONDITIONS A.The GENERAL CONDITIONS is the American Institute of Architects' AIA Document

A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," 1997 Edition, which is made part of the Project Manual with the same force and effect as though set forth in full.

B.General Conditions by the Owner dated May 2, 2000. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DOCUMENT


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Summary of Work 27720.00 01110-1

SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, General

Requirements, apply to the Work of all Sections. B.The Contractor is hereby specifically directed to notify and apprise all subcontractors and

other parties engaged in the Work as to the Contents of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements.

1.02WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.The Work covers construction of the Broad Center for the Biological Sciences at

California Institute of Technology, Pasadena CA. B.The proposed Work includes construction of an approximately 118,000 gross square

foot building, 3-story with 2 basement stories, laboratory/classroom building containing MRI facility, electron diffraction facility, X-ray diffraction facility, vivarium facility and related labs, classrooms, faculty offices, shipping and receiving area, Cafe, utility tunnel, and electrical substation.

C.The Work includes Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection,

Electrical, Site Landscape, and Civil work including grading, utilities and paving. Also included is radio frequency shielding, two electric traction and one hydraulic elevator.

D.Additional requirements of all parties to the Contract are included in the Contract

Forms and Conditions of the Contract part of the Project Manual. 1.03CONTRACTS A.Construct the Work under a single fixed-price Contract incorporating segregated

prices for various portions of the Work. B.Where the term "Contractor" is used in the Specification, the General Contractor is

referred to. C.Where the terms "Plumbing Contractor," "Electrical Contractor,' etc., are used, it

has been for convenience only and in no way affects the overall responsibility of the General Contractor.



1.04WORK BY OTHERS A.See items identified NIC. B.Refer to Section 11000 for information on Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed

equipment. C.Refer to Section 11000 for relocation of existing x-ray equipment. 1.05CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A.Contractor's use of premises for Work and storage is limited to the area designated

on the Drawings. 1.Staging area shall be as shown on Drawings. B.Parking: On-site parking shall be as designated on Drawings. Parking will be

discussed at the Preconstruction meeting. No parking shall be allowed on adjacent streets.

1.06INSPECTION A.Persons performing Work shall examine surfaces to receive their Work and shall

report in writing the Contractor, with a copy to Architect, conditions detrimental to Work.

1.Failure to examine and report makes the person responsible, at no increase in Contract Sum, for corrections Architect may require.

2.Commencement of Work constitutes acceptance of surface. 1.07SURROUNDING SITE CONDITION SURVEY A.Prior to commencement of excavation, Contractor, Owner, and Architect shall jointly

survey the existing buildings, paving, existing trees indicated to remain, and adjacent structures making permanent note and record of such existing damage as cracks, sags, loose blocks or bricks or other similar damage.

B.This record shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage to these

structures due to settlement, movement, or damage due to the Contractor's operations.

C.If possible, damage as noted shall be marked on the structure. D.All parties making the survey shall sign the official record of existing damage. E.Cracks, sags or damage of any nature to the adjacent buildings, paving, tress, etc.,

not noted in the original survey but subsequently noted, shall be reported immediately to the Architect.



1.08PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A.The Drawings indicate existing above and below grade structure, drainage lines,

storm drains, sewers, water, gas, electrical, hot water and other similar items and utilities which are known to Owner.

B.Contractor shall locate these known existing installations before proceeding with

trenching, or other operations which may cause damage; shall maintain them in service where appropriate, and shall repair any damage to them caused by the Work, at no increase in Contract Sum.

C.Additional utilities whose locations are unknown to Owner are suspected to exist.

Contractor shall be alert to their existence. If they are encountered, immediately report to Architect for disposition of same.

D.In addition to reporting, if a utility is damaged, Contractor shall take appropriate

action as provided in the General Conditions. E.Additional compensation or extension of time on account of utilities not shown or

otherwise brought to the Contractor's attention including reasonable action taken to protect or repair damage shall be determined as provided in the General Conditions.

1.09INTERRUPTION OF BUILDING SERVICES A.Obtain approval from the Owner at least 7 calendar days prior to service shutdown

or cutovers. 1.Interruptions are to be based upon Work during normal working hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Alternates 27720.00 01230-1

SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section identifies each Alternate by number, and describes basic changes to be

incorporated into the Work, only when that Alternate is made a part of the Work by specific provisions in the Construction Contract.

B.Base Bid and Alternates shall include cost of supporting elements required, so that

no matter what combination of Base Bid and Alternates are accepted, that portion shall be a complete entity in itself.

C.This Section includes the nontechnical descriptions of Alternates. 1.Refer the specific Sections of the Specifications for technical description of

Alternates. D.Coordinate pertinent related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to

properly integrate the Work under each Alternate, and to provide the complete construction required by Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01ALTERNATE NO. 1 A.Change all countertops and splashes from epoxy resin as specified in Section

06610 to solid polymer as specified in Section 06650. See Drawing sheet K-707 for details affected by this change. Sheet K-707 is not intended to be a comprehensive list of all elements affected by the change from epoxy resin to solid polymer, the intent of Alternate No. 1 is that all instances where epoxy resin is indicated in the documents, except for epoxy resin sinks, be changed to indicate solid polymer. Note that some items (drying racks, break room and meeting room and kitchen counters) are indicated as solid polymer in the base bid documents, and are intended to be solid polymer under either the base bid or Alternate No. 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Alternates 27720.00 01230-2

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Modification Procedure 27720.00 01250-1

SECTION 01250 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and

processing Contract modifications. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01330 - Submittal Procedure: schedules. 1.02 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A.The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the

Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract sum or Contract Time, on AIA Form G710.

1.03CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A.Proposal Requests may be issued as supplements due to changes requested in the

project by the Owner, the Architect or the Contractor. 1.Supplements are not Change Orders; some Supplements may become Change Orders. B.Owner-Initiated Proposals Requests: When construction changes are proposed they

will be originated with a Supplement issued by the Architect to the Contractor. 1.The Contractor shall prepare acceptable response to Supplements so as to cause no

delay in the Work. 2.The Supplements will be numerically sequential and will cover a single proposed

change. C.Cost Proposal: Within 20 days of receipt of a Supplement, the Contractor shall prepare

a proposal of cost and time for execution of the proposed change which, if accepted, will become a Change Order.

1.The proposal shall identify each item of work affected by the proposed change, each item of cost and justification of time extensions required.

2.Indicate a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substan-tiate quantities.

3.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discount.

4.Cost proposals shall be itemized, for General Contractors, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors work.

5.Cost Proposals shall be based on estimated (or actual when authorized) costs for



performance of the work. a.Materials and Equipment: The contractor shall provide factual data such as price lists

and/or invoices when requested to do so. b.Labor Rates shall be actual costs, including benefits, insurance and taxes. Rates shall

not include either home office or job overhead. For work performed in a shop, established labor rates that include shop overhead will be accepted.

c.Overhead and Profit. (1)No additional job overhead (General Conditions) will be allowed unless it is established

that there has been a delay in completion that is the responsibility of the Owner. If a time extension for "unusually severe weather" is granted, the Owner is not responsible for any added costs that the Contractor may suffer.

(2)Allowance for home office overhead (G&A) shall be as follows: (a)General Contractor for work by its own forces: 15% (b)General Contractor for work by subcontractors: 10% (c)Subcontractors (one tier only): 20% d.Certain of the technical sections include provisions for the pricing of changes. The

above provisions shall superseded any others where there is a conflict.

D.Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When a latent or unforseen conditions require

modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect and Owner's Representative.

1.Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

2.Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substan-tiate quantities.

3.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discount.

E.Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal

Requests. 1.04CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A.Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the

terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714, The Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1.A Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change in the Work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.



B.Documentation: Maintain detailed record on a time and material basis of work required

by the Construction Change Directive. 1.After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 1.05CHANGE ORDERS A.Following receipt and acceptance of Change Order Request, the Owner will issue a

Change Order for signatures of the Architect and the Contractor on AIA Form G701.

B.Change Orders will be numerically sequential and may include several Supplements. C.Change Orders will include Supplement numbers and titles. D.Upon execution, the Change Order will become part of the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Measurement and Payment 27720.00 01295-1

SECTION 01295 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes measurement and payment provisions for, but not limited to, the

following: 1.Schedule of Values. 2.Applications for Payment. 1.02SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Type schedule on AIA Document G703. Owner's Standard Invoice/Schedule of Values

or Contractor's standard forms and automated printout equivalent to the AIA Document will be considered for approval by Owner upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with:

1.Title of Project, project number, and location. 2.Architect and Project number. 3.Name and Address of Contractor. 4.Contract designation. 5.Date of submission. B.Schedule shall list the installed dollar value of the component parts of the Work in

sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.

C.List each subcontract first using the Table of Contents of the Project Manual as the

format. 1.Next list any allowances included in the contract amount. 2.List each major section or portion of work to be performed by the Contractor. 3.List Contractor's fee separately. 4.List any contingencies. 5.Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section

of the specifications. 6.Subdivide items to correspond with cost correlation requirements for

construction progress schedule. D.For each major line item list sub-values of major products by building area or floor

level or other operations under the item. E.For the various portions of the Work: 1.Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's



overhead and profit. 2.For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored

materials, break down the value into: a.The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b.The total installed value. F.The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. 1.03APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.Format and Data Required: 1.Submit applications typed on AIA Document G702/703, Application for

Payment. Contractor's standard forms and automated print-out equivalent to the AIA Document will be considered for approval by Architect upon request by the Contractor.

2.Submit 2 copies with "wet" signatures. 3.Add provision for Inspector of Record's signature. B.Provide itemized data on continuation sheet: 1.Format, schedules, line items and values: Those of the Schedule of Values

accepted by Architect. 2.Include Payment Application number. C.Preparation of Application for Each Progress Payment: 1.Monthly update of CPM schedule shall be submitted with each progress payment

application. 2. Application Form: a.Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed

prior to date of submittal of application along with the number assigned to each Change Order.

b.Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets.

c.Certification that the Project Record Documents are current with the progress status of the Project.

d.Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of Contract firm.

3.Continuation Sheets: a.Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of Work, with item

number and scheduled dollar value for each item. b.Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when

work has been performed or products stored. (1)Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values, and percent

of item completion. c.List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the end

of the continuation sheets. (1)List by Change Order number, and description, as for an original



component item of work. D.Substantiating Data for Progress Payments: 1.When Owner or Architect requires substantiating data, submit information, with a

cover letter identifying: a.Project. b.Application number and date. c.Detailed list of enclosures. d.For stored products. (1)Item number and identification as shown on application. (2)Description of specific Material. 2.Submit 1 copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 3.Revised updated CPM schedule. 4.Current period's General Contractor Conditional Waiver and the prior period's

Unconditional Waiver. 5.Waivers from Subcontractors. 6.Corrections and updates to Record (as-built) documents. E.Preparation of Application for Final Payment: 1.Fill in application form as specified for progress payments. 2.Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting. F.Submittal Procedure: 1.Submit Applications for Payment to Owner at the times stipulated in the

Agreement. 2.Number: 3 copies of each Application. 3.When Owner, Inspector of Record, and Contractor agree on percentages to be

requested, and when agreed and signed by them and Architect, Architect will transmit the Certificate for Payment to Owner.

4.Approval and signing of the Application for Payment by Owner and Architect is contingent upon approval of the current status of the As-Built Drawings/Record Documents and submittal of updated CPM schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Project Meetings 27720.00 01312-1

SECTION 01312 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A.Prior to commencement of Work, a preconstruction conference will be held to

discuss procedures to be followed. B.Location: A site as convenient as possible for all parties, designated by the

Architect and/or Owner. C.Attending shall be the following: 1.Owner's Representative. 2.Architect. 3.Architect's professional consultants. 4.Contractor. 5.Contractor's Superintendent. 6.Major subcontractors. 7.Others as appropriate. 1.02PROGRESS MEETING A.Contractor shall prepare agenda and schedule and hold meetings as required by the

progress of the Work. Progress meetings shall be as often as weekly or more frequently as required by the progress of the work.

1.Contractor shall record notes of meeting. 2.Contractor shall prepare pending issue report which shall include RFI Log, Submittal

Log, and Schedule and Change Order and Field Order Log. 3.Contractor shall distribute minutes of meeting within 3 days. B.Location: Physical Plant Conference Room at Cal Tech and/or Cal Tech field

office. C.Attending shall be the following: 1.Owner's Representative. 2.Architect. 3.Contractor. 4.Contractor's Superintendent. 5.Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 6.Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 7.Others as appropriate to the agenda. 1.03WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Project Meetings 27720.00 01312-2

REVIEW MEETING A.Eleven months following date of Substantial Completion, hold a meeting for the

purpose of review of warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts for materials and equipment. Take action as appropriate to implement, repair, or replace defective items and to extend service and maintenance contracts.

B.Attending shall be: 1.Owner's Representative. 2.Architect. 3.Architect's Professional Consultants, as appropriate. 4.Contractor. 5.Subcontractor, as appropriate to the Agenda. 6.Suppliers, as appropriate to the Agenda. 7.Others, as appropriate to the Agenda. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Project Coordination 27720.00 01315-1

SECTION 01315 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT COORDINATION A.General: 1.Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to

assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.

2.Anticipate interrelationship of all subcontractors and their relationship with the total work. 3.Resolve differences or disputes between subcontractors and material suppliers

concerning coordination, interference, or extent of work between Sections. Contractor's decisions, if consistent with Contract Document requirements, shall be final.

4.Supervise and coordinate the work of subcontractors and materials suppliers so that their work is performed in a manner to minimize interference with and to facilitate progress of the Work.

5.Be responsible for seeing that anchorage, blocking, joining and other detailing are provided as required.

6.Do not obstruct spaces required by Code in front of electrical equipment, access doors, etc.

7.Do not cover any piping, wiring, ducts, etc., until properly inspected and approved and until proper certificates have been issued.

8.Remove and replace any and all work under any Section which is not in accordance with Contract Documents. Repair or replace work damaged by these operations at no increase in cost to Owner.

9.Work requiring special coordination is specified in the individual Sections. B.Coordination Drawings of Ceiling Systems: Submit ceiling coordination drawings and

related mechanical, plumbing and electrical work and any structural penetrations. Any conflict which occurs with these trades shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to issuance of the Drawings.

1.Drawings shall be minimum 1/4" = 1'-0". 2.Submit within 45 days of Notice to Proceed. 3.Submit coordination drawings before any ceiling work is done or payment requests by

Contractor will be withheld by the Owner. C.Mechanical and Electrical Work: 1.Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which

are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Project Coordination 27720.00 01315-2

2.In finish areas, conceal pipes and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

3.Work out conditions involving Work of various Sections in advance of installation. Prepare supplementary Drawings for review showing all equipment, piping, ducts, electrical work, dampers etc.

4.Provide coordinated drawings for access doors specified in Section 08310 and as required by mechanical, plumbing and electrical work specified in Divisions 15 and 16.

5.Furnish commissioning of the mechanical system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Comply with Specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Schedules and Reports 27720.00 01325-1

SECTION 01325 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A.Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive Schedule of basic operations of the entire

Project in the form of a Critical Path (CPM) network. 1.Indicate critical dates when submission of shop drawings, product data,

samples, and certificates, required by the Specifications, will be made; allow ample time for review by the Architect.

2.Include all specialties and Owner-furnished (NIC) materials and equipment. 3.Include cost breakdown into Progress Schedule. 4.If Progress Schedule is larger than one sheet, a summary sheet is required. B.The Schedule shall be the basis for establishing starting and completing dates of

work for the Project. C.Conform to accepted Schedule and arrange work in such a manner that it will be

installed in accordance with the Schedule. D.Establish a program to reevaluate and update the Schedule monthly in accordance

with requirements of the Project. E.Coordinate letting of subcontracts, material purchases, delivery of materials,

sequence of operations, etc., to conform to accepted Schedule and furnish proof of conformance as may be required by the Owner.

F.Accelerated Work if Required to Meet Schedule: If the Contractor's performance falls

behind schedule, the Contractor shall accelerate the Work as required to get back on schedule at no additional cost to the Owner. Accelerated work shall include air or express delivery of materials and equipment, increasing the number of workers, working overtime, working Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, and working additional shifts.

G.In case the Owner shall determine, after consultation with the Architect, that the

Contractor fails or refuses to take such measures as may be appropriate and necessary, in the opinion of the Owner, to complete the Work in accordance with the accepted Schedule or within time to which such completion may be extended, the Contract, or any part thereof, may be terminated under the provisions of Document 00700 "General Conditions."

H.In addition to requirements as established in Document 00700 "General Conditions," the

Contractor shall, within 45 calendar days after date of the Contract or as allowed


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Schedules and Reports 27720.00 01325-2

by the Schedule, submit to the Architect for review all submittals for equipment, fabrications, and specialty items as listed in each Section of the Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Submittal Procedure 27720.00 01330-1

SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SHOP DRAWINGS A.Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall be completely dimensioned, giving the

plan together with such sections as are necessary to clearly show construction detail and methods.

1.Shop drawings shall be submitted in addition to the list of materials required by Section 01772.

B.Shop drawings and supporting data, shall be prepared by Contractor or his

suppliers, but shall be submitted as the instruments of the Contractor. 1.Contractor shall check the drawings of suppliers as well as his own drawings

before submitting them to the Architect. 2.Contractor shall stamp and ascertain that shop drawings meet requirements of

the Contract Documents and also conform to the structural and space conditions.

a.If shop drawings show variations from Contract Documents, whether because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor must make special mention thereof in his letter of transmittal.

3.Contractor shall be fully responsible for observing the need for and making any changes in arrangement of piping, connections, wiring, manner of installa-tion, etc., which may be required by equipment he proposes to supply, both as pertains to his own work and work affected under other parts, headings, or divisions of the Contract Documents.

1.02 PRODUCT DATA A.Preparation: 1.Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. 2.Show performance characteristics, capacities, dimensions, and required

clearances, wiring or piping diagrams, and controls. B.Modify manufacturer's standard drawings and diagrams to delete information which

is not applicable to the Work. 1.Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable

to the Work. 1.03SAMPLES



A.Office Samples: 1.Of sufficient size and quality to clearly illustrate: a.Functional characteristics of product, with integrally related parts and

attachment devices. b.Full range of color, texture, and pattern. 2.Submit and resubmit until accepted by the Architect. 3.No review of a sample shall be taken in itself to change or modify the Contract

requirement. 4.Finishes, materials, and workmanship in the completed building shall match

accepted samples. 5.Samples of value will be returned to Contractor, when requested in writing at

time of submittal, for his use in the Project after review, analysis, com-parison, or testing as may be required by the Architect.

B.Field samples and Mockups: 1.Erect at Project site at location as directed by Architect. 2.Provide field sample or mockup as required in individual Sections. 3.Size of Area: As specified in Individual Section. 4.Fabricate each sample and mockup complete and finished. a.Affected finish work shall not be started until Architect has accepted field

samples or mockup. b.Construct or prepare as many additional samples as may be required,

as directed by the Architect, until desired textures, finishes, and/or colors are obtained.

c.Accepted samples and mockup shall serve as the standard of quality for the various units of work.

d.Finished work shall match the accepted field samples and mockups. 5.Remove field samples and mockups at conclusion of the Work. 1.04SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND

SAMPLES A.Shop drawings, technical literature, mill reports, certificates, material lists, and

samples shall be submitted as specified in the Specification Sections. B.Schedule: Contractor shall prepare a Submittal Schedule which shall be updated

weekly. C.Procedure: 1.Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples to Architect. 2.Subcontractors shall make submittals to Contractor. 3.No extension of time will be granted because of failure to make submittals in

ample time to allow for processing. D.Identification: 1.Properly identify each submittal with name of Project, Contractor,

subcontractor, date, and submittal number.



2.Accompany each submittal by an acceptable transmittal form referring to Project name, submittal number, Specification Section number, and paragraph number, when applicable, for identification of each item.

3.Consecutively number shop drawings for each Section of work; retain numbering system throughout all revisions.

4.Allow clear space on each drawing, product datum, and sample for stamp of Contractor and Architect.

5.Where clear space is not available on samples, submit with tags or stickers attached.

E.Stamp shop drawings, product data, and samples certifying that it has been coordinated

and checked for completeness and compliance with requirements of work, Project, and Contract Documents.

F.Architect's Review: 1.General: a.Except for finish, color, and other aesthetic matters left to Architect's

decision by Contract Documents, Architect's review of shop drawings, product data, and samples is only for Owner's convenience in following work and does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for deviations from requirements of Contract Documents.

b.Do not construe Architect's review as a complete check nor relief from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules or from necessity of furnishing work required by Contract Documents which may not have been shown on shop drawings.

c.Architect's review of a separate item does not indicate review of complete assembly in which it functions.

2.Submittals not stamped by Contractor and submittals which, in Architect's opinion, are incomplete, contain numerous errors, or have not been checked or have only been checked superficially will be returned to Contractor for resubmittal.

3.Processing: a.Architect will review shop drawings, product data, and samples with 21

calendar days and will return them to Contractor with Architect's stamp applied thereto.

b.Notations by Architect which increase Contract cost or time of completion shall be brought to Architect's and Owner's attention before proceeding with work.

c.Each submittal will be stamped indicating appropriate action as specified below.

4.Resubmittals: If Contractor submits more than 1 resubmittal, Contractor shall reimburse

the Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants for the cost of review. G.Copies required in each submittal shall be as follows: 1.Shop Drawings: One reproducible transparency and 4 prints.



2.Product Data: 5 copies. 3.Samples: 5 each, unless otherwise specified under applicable Specification

Sections or requested. H.Action and Distribution: 1.Submittals of shop drawings, product data, and samples shall be made directly

to Architect. 2.Architect will stamp submittals "No Exceptions Taken," "Note Markings,"

"Submit Specified Item," "Revise and Resubmit," or "Rejected." a.When stamped "No Exception Taken," Contractor is advised that

fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, providing it complies with Contract Documents.

b.When stamped "Note Markings," Contractor is advised that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, providing it complies with Architect's notations and Contract Documents.

c.When stamped "Submit Specified Item," Contractor is advised that no work shall be fabricated, manufactured, or constructed. Contractor shall make a new submission for specified item as indicated on Contract Documents.

d.When stamped "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected," Contractor is advised that no work shall be fabricated, manufactured, or constructed. Contractor shall make a new submittal.

3.Architect's reviewed submittal will be returned to Contractor for distribution. a.Returned items will consist of one sepia of shop drawings, copies of

product data, and two samples. I.Use of Submittals: 1.Work shall be fabricated, manufactured, or constructed only from submissions

stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Note Markings." 2.If for any reason Contractor cannot comply with the notations, Contractor shall

resubmit submittal. 1.06FINAL ON-SITE REVIEW OF MATERIALS, COLORS, AND TEXTURES A.Materials, colors, and textures shall be installed and applied to certain on-site trial

areas. B.Contractor shall adjust materials, colors, and textures in these trial areas until

acceptable to Architect and approved for final finish. C.When these representative areas are finished as directed, final review by the

Architect will be given. D.After review, these sample areas shall serve as a standard for similar work

throughout the Project. 1.06 PRODUCTS LIST



A.Within 45 calendar days after execution of Contract, submit complete list of major

products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.

B.Tabulate list by each Specification Section. C.For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name,

model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.07COMPOSITE DRAWINGS A.Prepare composite drawings and installation layouts, when required, to solve field

conditions. See also requirements in Section 01315 for ceiling coordination drawings.

B.Drawings shall consist of dimensioned plans and elevations and shall give complete

information, particularly as to size and location of sleeves, inserts, attachments, openings, conduit, ducts, boxes, and structural interferences.

C.Composite shop drawings and field installation layouts shall be coordinated in field

by Contractor and his subcontractors for proper relationship to work of applicable trades based on field conditions and shall be checked and approved by them for submission to Architect for final acceptance.

1.Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for coordinating and checking as well as for supervision of field installation layouts.



SMP/SHG - PCF&P Regulatory Requirements 27720.00 01410-1

SECTION 01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Specific reference in the Specifications to codes and regulations or requirements of

regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each adopted by the regulatory agency at the date of submission of bids unless the document is shown dated.

1.02REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Perform the Work in conformance with the applicable requirements of regulatory

agencies including, but not limited to, the following codes: 1.The 1997 Uniform Building Code (UBC) with 1998 California Building Standards Code

(CBSC), Part 2, of Title 24, Amendments. 2.The 1997 Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) with 1998 California Mechanical Code

(CMC), Part 4, of Title 24 Amendments. 3.The 1997 Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with 1998 California Plumbing Code (CPC),

Part 5, of Title 24, Amendments. 4.The 1996 National Electrical Code (NEC) with 1998 California Electrical Code (CEC),

Part 3, of Title 24 Amendments. 5.1998 California Energy Code (CEC) also known as Part 6 of Title 24. 6.The State Elevator Safety Regulations (SESR) 1998 California Building Standards Code

(CBSC), Part 12, of Title 24. 7.1998 Uniform Fire Code. 8.1999 Local amendments by the City of Pasadena. 9.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards adopted by the 1997 Uniform

Building Code: a.NFPA 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers, 1994 b.NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 1996 Edition. c.NFPA 45, Standards on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals, 1996 Edition. d.NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, 1993 Edition. e.NFPA 72, Installation, Maintenance and Use of Protective Signaling Systems, 1996

Edition. f.NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows, 1995 Edition. g.NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning Ventilating Systems, 1996 Edition. h.NFPA 96A, Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden

Vapor from Commercial Cooling Equipment, 1997 Edition. i.NFPA 110, Energy and Standby Power Systems, 1996 Edition.


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Regulatory Requirements 27720.00 01410-2

j.NFPA 200, Types of Building Construction, 1995 Edition. 10.California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal OSHA). 11.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): Hazard Commu-

nications Standard. 12.The American with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the American with Disabilities Act

Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) issued on July 26, 1991. 13.The American with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and

facilities; State and Local Government Facilities; Interim Final Rules, June 20, 1994.

14.Council of American Building Officials (CABO)/American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1-1992.

1.03CONFLICTS A.Between Referenced Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the one establishing

the more stringent requirement. B.Between Referenced Regulatory Requirement and Contract Documents: Comply

with the one establishing the more stringent requirement. 1.04SPECIAL SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A.General: 1.Work having special seismic requirements is specified in the individual

Sections. 2.Anchor, support, and brace equipment and systems to resist seismic forces as

specified. 3.Anchorage, support, and bracing for various manufactured and fabricated

items and systems are detailed and scheduled on the Drawings. Provide as shown.



SMP/SHG - PCF&P References 27720.00 01420-1

SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.Material specified by reference to number, symbol, or title of a specific standard

such as a state standard, Commercial Standard (CS), Federal Specifications (FS), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), or trade-association standard, or other similar standard shall comply with requirements in the revision thereof and any amendments or supplement thereto in effect on date of submission of Bids.

B.Standards referred to, except as modified herein, shall have full force and effect as

though printed in these Specifications. 1.These standards are not furnished to the Contractor, since manufacturers and

trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements. 2.The Architect will furnish, upon request, information as to how copies of

standards referred to may be obtained. 1.02ABBREVIATIONS A.In addition to abbreviation as indicated on the Drawings, references in the Contract

Documents to trade associations, technical societies, recognized authorities, and other institutions may include the following organizations, which are sometimes referred to by only the corresponding abbreviations:

1.American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). 2.American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO). 3.American Concrete Institute (ACI). 4.American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC). 5.American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6.American Plywood Association [Engineered Wood Association](APA). 7.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers,

Inc. (ASHRAE). 8.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 9.American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). 10.American Welding Society (AWS). 11.Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA). 12.California Code of Regulations (CCR). 13.California Redwood Association (CRA). 14.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI). 15.Commercial Standard of National Bureau of Standards, US Department of



Commerce (CS). 16.Sate of California, Department of Transportation, Division of Highways' "Standard

Specification" (CSS). 17.Division of State Architect (DSA). 18.Factory Mutual (FM). 19.Federal Specifications (FS). 20.Glass Association of North Americ [formerly Flat Glass Marketing Association] (GANA). 21.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 22.International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO); Evaluation Reports. 23.Military Specification of US Department of Defense (MIL). 24.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 25.National Electric Code (NEC). 26.National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 27.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 28.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 29.Portland Cement Association (PCA). 30.United States Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS). 31.Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 32.Steel Door Institute (SDI). 33.State of California, Office of State Fire Marshal (SFM). 34.Sheet metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.

(SMACNA). 35.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). 36.Tile Council of America (TCA). 37.Uniform Building Code (UBC). 38.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 39.Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC). 40.Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). 41.West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau [Grading Rules] (WCLIB). 42.Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (WCRSI). 43.Woodwork Institute of California (WIC). 44.Western Wood Products Association [Grading Rules] (WWPA). B.Additional abbreviations, used only on the Drawings, are listed thereon. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.Terms used on the Drawings or in the Specifications in addition to those shown in

General Conditions shall have the following meanings: TERM MEANING As directed-"As interpreted by the Architect under General Conditions Article



4." As required-"By Code; by good building practice; by the Condition prevailing; by Contract

Documents; by Owner, or by Architect." As selected-"By Architect." By others-Work on this Project that is outside the scope of Work to be

performed by Contractor under this Contract, but that will be performed by Owner, other contractors, or other means.

By Owner-Work on this Project that will be performed by Owner, or his agents, at his cost. Equal-In the opinion of the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is the

responsibility of the Contractor. (E)-Existing. (N)-New. Furnish-"Supply only, do not install." Install-"Install or apply only, do not furnish." NIC-Not in Contract; Work on this Project that is outside the scope of Work to

be performed by the Contractor under this Contract.

Offsite-Outside contract limit line. Owner-furnished, - "Owner will furnish at his cost and

Contractor-installed Contractor will install under his Contract for this Work." Refer to Section 11000.

Project-Total construction of which Work performed under the Contract Documents may be

the whole or a part. Project Manual-Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Contract Conditions,

and Specifications. Provide-"Furnish and install." Satisfactory-To the satisfaction of the Architect, subject to the Architect's acceptance. Shown-"As indicated on the Drawings."



Site-Geographical location of the Project. Specified-"As written in Project Manual." PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Quality Control 27720.00 01450-1

SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER A.Owner will retain and pay expenses of a Geotechnical Engineer for performing certain

inspection, testing and observation functions described in the Specifications. Geotechnical Engineer will communicate only with Owner who will, in turn, relay any appropriate instructions to Contractor, with copy to Architect, within the provisions of the Contract Documents.

1.02TESTING AGENCY A.The Contractor shall retain and pay the expense of a Testing Agency acceptable to the

Architect and Owner, to perform and report on Work specified in the Contract Documents. The Testing Agency, with prior acceptance of the Architect, may be a commercial testing organization, the testing laboratory of a trade association, the certified laboratory of a supplier, the Contractor's own forces, or other organization. Testing Agency shall have been in business for 5 years.

B.Owner will retain and pay the expense of a Testing Agency for the following Special

Inspection as required by UBC Section 108; and as specified in Sections 02300, 03300, 03340, 04450, 05065, 05100, 05300, 05500, and 05510.

1.The Special Inspector shall be a registered Deputy Building Inspector approved by the Architect and the Owner. Special inspections will not be required when the work is done on the premises of a fabricator approved by the regulatory agency. Contractor shall reimburse shop inspection cost to the Owner when the work is done in a shop not approved by the regulatory agency.

1.03QUALIFICATION OF TESTING AGENCY A.Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification,"

published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B.Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for

Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construc-tion."

C.Authorized to operate in the State of California. 1.04TEST REPORTS


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Quality Control 27720.00 01450-2

A.Testing Agency shall distribute copies of all reports as follows: 1.Architect: One copy. 2.Structural Engineer: One copy. 3.Owner: One copy. 4.City of Pasadena: One copy. 5.Number of copies for Contractor and supplier being tested will be determined upon

commencement of Contract. 1.05MULTIPLE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A.Certain portions of the Work will be tested or inspected at various stages, sometimes off

Site, between their inception and final positioning in the completed Work. Nothing in any prior acceptance or satisfactory test result shall govern if at any subsequent time the Work, or portion thereof, is found not to conform to Contract Documents.

1.06ADDITIONAL TESTING AND INSPECTION A.If initial tests or inspections made by the Testing Agency reveal that materials do not

comply with Contract Documents, or if Architect has reasonable doubt that materials comply with Contract Documents, additional tests and inspections shall be made as directed.

1.If additional tests and inspections establish that materials comply with Contract Documents, all costs for such tests and inspections shall be paid by Owner.

2.If additional tests and inspections establish that materials do not comply with Contract Documents, all costs of such tests and inspections shall be deducted from Contract Sum.



SMP/SHG - PCF&P Mock-ups 27720.00 01455-1

SECTION 01455 MOCK-UPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.General mock-up requirements: 1.Intent of mock-up is to ascertain elements designed to fit into space provided and

provide Contractor with opportunity to coordinate subcontractor work, and to show finish and workmanship expected for finished work.

2.Approved work can be included as part of final construction. 3.Extent of mock-ups is indicated on the Drawings. 4.Mock-ups include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: a.Major handrail: Refer to Section 05700. b.Firestopping. Refer to Section 07840. c.Out-of sequence laboratory area. Refer to Sections 11602, 15010, and as specified

below. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01451 - Facade Mock-up Testing. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Individual Specifications Sections: Specific mock-ups as required. 1.03WORKMANSHIP A.Maintain quality control over work of various sections of specification, manufacturers,

products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce mock-ups in accordance with Contract Documents.

B.Comply with standards specified. C.Provide qualified personnel to produce mock-up of specified quality. D.Secure mock-ups in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. E.Provide finish to match approved samples. 1.04MOCK-UPS, GENERAL



A.When required in individual Specifications section, install full-scale mock-up of assembly at Project site at location acceptable to Owner.

B.Assemble and erect complete, with specified attachment and anchorage devices,

flashings, seals and finishes. C.Remove unacceptable mock-ups. D.Mock-ups will be approved by Architect in writing, prior to commencement of the work. 1.05LABORATORY MOCK-UP A.General: This article describes the requirements for the construction of a Mock-Up

of typical laboratory spaces for a two stage (rough-in and complete) Owner review. Location of Mock-Up room will be indicated by Architect.

1.Construct Mock-up Laboratory "out of sequence" before beginning the remaining rough-ins (rough-in stage) and finishes (complete stage).

2.Order the materials and equipment for the Mock-Up room immediately after Notice to Proceed.

3.Construct rough-in stage of the Mock-Up laboratory "out of sequence" and obtain approval of Owner before beginning remaining rough-ins in other laboratory spaces.

4.Construct the "complete stage" of the Mock-Up laboratory space "out of sequence" and obtain approval of Owner before beginning the finishes (complete stage) in other laboratory rooms.

5.Approval will not be given for any parts of the mock-up until all the work of the entire stage (rough-in or complete) of the mock-up is in place.

6.In the event that problems with coordination of work of different trades becomes apparent during the construction and review of the mock-up and results in design changes, the Owner shall be responsible only for replacement of work in the actual mock-up construction that satisfies the original design and quality requirements as indicated in the Contract Document. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing, without alteration of the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, any such work outside the extent of the mock-up that is provided before approval of the mock-up construction, and which must be replaced due to design changes resulting from the mock-up review.

B.Rough-in stage of laboratory spaces shall be complete with metal stud walls and the

following: 1.Plumbing rough-in. 2.Electrical conduit. 3.Sprinkler piping installed with head locations indicated. 4.Mechanical supply and exhaust. C.The complete stage Mock-Up shall include all painting, and installation of the

following items:



1.Sheet vinyl flooring and base. 2.Finish ceiling. 3.Doors and hardware. 4.Laboratory casework, countertops, sinks with faucets, lab gas outlets, and

markerboard. 5.Window covering. 6.Light switches, electrical outlets, thermostat thermometer. 7.Partition closure and window on exterior wall. 8.Ceiling light fixtures and under-cabinet light fixtures. Light fixtures shall light

up. 9.Sprinkler heads, fire alarm horn/strobe, and smoke detector. 10.Ceiling air diffuser. 11.Equipment; except Owner furnished equipment. 1.06ANIMAL HOLDING ROOM MOCK-UP A.General: This Article describes the requirements for the construction of a Mock-Up of

typical animal holding room and procedure room for a 2-stage (rough-in and complete) Owner review. Location of the Mock-up rooms will be indicated by the Architect.

1.Construct Mock-up Holding Room "out of sequence" before beginning the remaining rough-ins (rough-in stage) and finishes (complete stage).

2.Order the materials and equipment for the Mock-Up room immediately after Notice to Proceed.

3.Construct rough-in stage of the Mock-Up Holding Room "out of sequence" and obtain approval of Owner before beginning remaining rough-ins in other holding room spaces.

4.Construct the "complete stage" of the Mock-Up Holding Room space "out of sequence" and obtain approval of Owner before beginning the finishes (complete stage) in other holding rooms.

B.Rough-in stage of holding room spaces shall be complete with metal stud walls and

the following: 1.Plumbing rough-in. 2.Electrical conduit. 3.Sprinkler piping installed with head locations indicated. 4.Mechanical supply and exhaust. C.The complete stage mock-up shall include all painting and installation of the following

items: 1.Acoustic insulation. 2.Epoxy flooring, wall coating and ceiling coating, as specified. 3.Doors and hardware, including view windows and covers. 4.Stainless steel countertops, sinks with faucets, gas outlets. 5.Light switches, electrical outlets, temperature and humidity sensors and controls,

telephone and data outlets, intercom speakers and all weather-resistant covers.



6.Light fixtures, with lamps and power for operation. 7.Sprinkler heads and all fire or smoke detection or alarm devices. 8.All access panels, diffusers, and grilles. 9.Equipment, except Owner-furnished equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 27720.00 01500-1

SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes providing the following as indicated on the Drawings and as specified: 1.Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water,

and sanitary facilities. 2.Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work,

protection of existing trees, and water control. 3.Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage,

and temporary buildings. B.Related Section: 1.Section 01110 - Summary of Work: parking restrictions. 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Requirements of Public Utilities: 1.Contractor shall take suitable steps to ensure that public utilities encountered in

connection with the Work will not be damaged. 2.Send notices, make necessary arrangements and provide services required for the

care of gas mains, water pipes, sewer pipes, telephone and telegraph conduits, cables, and other equipment or property.

3.Arrange with utility companies for fees required to move or remove their meters, poles, cables, guy wires, or equipment in or set under the property which will interfere with the construction work or which will not be required in the new construction.

1.03TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A.Provide and pay for power service required from Utility source. B.Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution

boxes located at each floor. 1.Provide flexible power cords as required. C.Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase

branch circuits for power and lighting. 1.04TEMPORARY LIGHTING



A.Provide adequate artificial lighting for work areas when natural light is not adequate. B.Provide and maintain lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for

security purposes. C.Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,

pigtails, and lamps as required. 1.05TEMPORARY HEAT A.Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions

for construction operations. B.The permanent heating system may be used as a source of temporary heat after

system has been placed in operation and thoroughly tested, providing Owner has specifically approved, in writing, use of permanent system for temporary heat.

1.Contractor shall make arrangements for service, provide fuel and operators as required, pay costs in connection therewith, and maintain system until acceptance of the Project.

1.06TEMPORARY VENTILATION A.Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to

prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B.Building supply fans shall not be used unless the Owner approves and filters, as

specified are in place. 1.Clean or replace filters prior to acceptance by Owner. 1.07TELEPHONE SERVICE A.Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project

mobilization. 1.08TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A.Connect to existing water source for construction operations. B.Maintain suitable quality water service required for construction operations. C.Provide metering and pay for cost of water used. D.Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded

connections. 1.09 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES



A.Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities shall not be

used. 1.10TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A.Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire hoses and other equipment as necessary for

proper fire protection during the work of this Contract. B.Generally, use fire protection equipment for fire protection only. C.Provide and maintain portable fire extinguishers in field offices, storage sheds, tool

houses and other temporary buildings, and throughout the area of Work. D.Appoint qualified person with authority to maintain fire protection equipment, institute fire

prevention measures, and direct the prompt removal of unnecessary combustible materials and waste. Such person shall be responsible for correct and safe use of soldering coppers, extension lights, flammable liquids, welding and metal cutting apparatus, wax pots, and other flame tools.

E.Take special precautions to minimize fire hazards when it becomes necessary to use

stoves, tar pots or other temporary heating devices. Such devices shall conform to the requirements of the National Fire Code of the National Fire Protection Association and shall be used only under proper supervision. Locate such devices so that there is a minimum clearance of 6 feet above or 2'-6" on all sides between devices and unprotected combustible materials. Do not place within 10 feet of tarpaulins or canvas covers. Properly insulate legs of temporary heating devices when it is necessary to place such equipment on combustible platforms. Do not use heaters burning LP gas.

F.Use special precautions to reduce fire hazard where electric or gas welding or cutting

Work is done. Provide and maintain suitable fire extinguishing equipment neat such operations. Store paints, varnishes, volatile oils, and similar combustible materials in a room having good ventilation and containing no other material, or in metal lockers or metal boxes with self-closing covers. Store gasoline and other volatile flammable liquids in metal barrels well away from structure or other combustible materials.

1.11BARRIERS A.Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow Owner's

use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.



B.Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.12 FENCING A.Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence with green fabric. B.Provide 6-foot high fence around construction site. Equip with vehicular and pedestrian

gates with locks. 1.13 WATER CONTROL A.Grade site to drain. Maintain excavation free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain

pumping equipment. B.Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to

protect site from soil erosion. 1.14PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES A.Exercise extreme care to preserve and protect all existing trees from damage of any

kind. B.Protect tree roots from damage as directed. 1.Do not place materials, debris, earth, vehicles of temporary structures under spread of

trees. 2.Do not dump excess concrete, chemicals or other liquid wastes within 10 feet of drip line

of trees. 3.Do not operate vehicles or equipment within the spread of any trees. C.Notify the Architect in advance of any condition which required vehicles or equipment to

operate within the spread of trees. 1.The Architect will advise the Contractor of protective measures such as planking, which

must be followed to avoid damage to root, trunk and branch structures where Contract work must be performed in the vicinity of trees. Necessary protective measures may include some or all of the following:

a.The Contractor may build fences around the trees to be protected. These fences should be built at the drip line, or as close to the drip

line as the construction activity will allow, and should remain in place throughout construction.

b.Any required branch or root pruning should be performed under the direction of the Architect or the Institute's Representative.

c.When trenching occurs around trees to remain, the roots should be carefully exposed by hand digging to reveal the nature of branching and then either tunneled under or carefully and precisely cut under the direction of the Architect.

d.When excavating, digging, or setting pilings within a tree drip line, the Contractor shall



carefully dig pilot holes a minimum of 3' deep prior to driving the piles.

e.Trees marked for preservation that are located more than 6" above proposed grades should stand on broad rounded mounds and be graded smoothly into the lower level. Exposed or broken roots should be cut cleanly and covered with topsoil.

f.Existing trees in areas where the new finished grade is to be lowered, should have regrading work done by hand to the elevation as indicated. Roots shall be cleanly cut as required 3 inches below finish grade and covered with topsoil.

g.The Contractor shall take care when working around the head of a tree. If any pruning is necessary, that pruning procedure must be supervised by the Architect.

D.The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any existing trees which are damaged

as a result of work under the Contract. E.In the case that is is deemed by the Architect that irreparable damage is done to any tree

or trees, their value shall be determined in accordance with the International Society of Arboriculture "Guide for Plant Appraisal", current edition 1992.

1.15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A.Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual

specification Sections. B.Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in

immediate work area to minimize damage. C.Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D.Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or

movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E.Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is

necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

F.Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.16 SECURITY A.Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities, and Owner's

operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B.Coordinate with Owner's security program.



1.17 PROGRESS CLEANING A.Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean

and orderly condition. B.Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other

closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C.Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue

cleaning to eliminate dust. D.Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site. 1.18PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A.Provide 5-foot wide x 3-foot high project sign of 3/4-inch exterior grade A-C plywood

and wood frame construction, painted, with die cut vinyl, self-adhesive letters to Architect's design and colors. Graphic image will be furnished by Architect.

B.List title of Project, names of Owner, Architects, Mechanical Consultant, Plumbing

Consultant, Electrical Consultant, Structural Consultant, Laboratory Consultant, Civil Consultant, Landscape Consultant, and Contractor.

C.Erect on site at location to be determined by the Owner. D.No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. 1.19 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A.Contractor's Field Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling

and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table.

B.Provide space for project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 8 persons. C.Provide two desks, chairs, and file cabinets and wall hung drawing table for use by the

Owner's Representative. 1.20 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A.Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior

to Substantial Completion. B.Clean or repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.



C.Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore

permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1.21HEALTH AND SAFETY A.The Contractor shall be solely and fully responsible for compliance with regulatory

requirements applicable to the health and safety of persons during the performance of the Work, and shall fully assume the defense of, indemnify and hold harmless those entities and persons stipulated in the General Conditions.

B.Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining Cal-OSHA approved Safety Program,

including Fire Prevention Plan and MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) Program.

1.Contractor shall maintain a list of hazardous materials to be used by the Contractor or Subcontractors on the Project and MSDS documents for each hazardous material.



SMP/SHG - PCF&P Basic Product Requirements 27720.00 01600-1

SECTION 01600 BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following as shown and as specified. 1. Products. 2.Transportation and handling. 3.Storage and protection. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01330 - Submittal Procedure. 2.Section 01450 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 1.02PRODUCTS A.Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and

systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

B.Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as

specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C.Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar

components. D.Products shall be new and suitable for service conditions. E.Equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered

to, unless deviations are specifically accepted in writing. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A.Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.When Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with

manufacturer's printed instructions, Contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.

1.Maintain one set of complete instructions at the jobsite during installation and until completion.

C.Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with the Construction Progress



Schedule; coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1.Deliver materials normally packaged in the factory in original unopened

containers bearing manufacturer's name, registered brand and trade mark, or other designation (such as Federal Specification to which material complies, grade, etc.) specified under various Sections of the Specification.

2.Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

D.Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage. 1.04STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with

seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosure.

B.For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. C.Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or

protection. D.Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide

ventilation to avoid condensation. E.Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent

mixing with foreign matter. F.Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage. G.Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to

assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. H.Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from

damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. 1.05FIRE RESISTANCE LABELS A.Materials and equipment, for which fire resistance standards have been established and

labeling service is available, shall bear the appropriate fire resistance labels. 1.06MANUFACTURERS' TRADE MARKS AND NAMES A.The Architect reserves the right to review and request removal, or redesign, of

manufacturers' trade marks and names on items of materials and equipment



which will be exposed to view in the completed Work. Such removal or redesign shall be at no increase in Contract Sum. A decision on the necessity to remove or redesign may be obtained from the Architect in writing prior to bidding. Failure to obtain such decision shall constitute agreement to comply with this Paragraph.



SMP/SHG - PCF&P Field Engineering 27720.00 01720-1

SECTION 01720 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes laying out and installing Work to lines and grades as shown on the

Drawings and as specified. 1.See requirements specified on Civil Drawings. B.Retain and pay expenses of a civil engineer or land surveyor to establish building

lines, elevations, check structural framework for plumbness and establish on structural frame the required basic grid lines from which other Sections shall lay out their Work.

C.Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor shall establish lines, grades and elevations of all

drainage structures, rough grades, finished surfaces and curbs. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Submit name and address of engineer or surveyor. C.Upon request, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering Work. D.Submit certificate signed by the engineer or surveyor, certifying that elevations and

locations of improvements are in substantial conformance with Contract Docu-ments.

E.Records: 1.Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey Work as it progresses. 2.Upon completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a

certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction.

F.Provide required grading and construction certifications of the City of Pasadena. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications: Civil engineer or land surveyor shall be licensed in the State of


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Field Engineering 27720.00 01720-2

California and shall be acceptable to the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A.Verify figures shown on the Drawings and on surveys furnished by Owner before

starting work. 1.Report errors and inaccuracies, in writing, to the Architect for clarification. 2.All offsets will be as agreed upon, in writing, by the Contractor and the

Architect. B.Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve permanent

reference points during construction. 1.Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Architect. 2.Report to Architect when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires

relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3.Require engineer or surveyor to replace control points which may be lost or

destroyed; base replacements on original survey control. 3.02PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A.Establish, locate, and lay out lines and levels by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means. B.Verify layouts as Work proceeds to assure compliance with required lines, levels,

and tolerances. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Cutting and Patching 27720.00 01730-1

SECTION 01730 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, and patching required to complete

the Work and to: 1.Make its several parts fit together properly. 2.Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3.Remove and replace defective work. 4.Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract

Documents. 5.Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of

electrical conduit, plumbing, and ductwork. 6.Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Submit a written request to Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or

alteration which affects: 1.The work of the Owner or any separate contractor. 2.The structural value or integrity of any element of the existing building. 3.The integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant

elements or systems. 4.The efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 5.The visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. C.The request shall include: 1.Identification of the Project. 2.Description of the affected work. 3.The necessity for cutting or alteration. 4.The effect on the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor or on the

structural or weatherproof integrity of the existing building. 5.Description of Proposed Work: a.Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or execution. b.Trades who will execute work. c.Products proposed to be used. d.Extent of refinishing to be done. 6.Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7.Cost proposal, when applicable. 8.Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.



D.Patching shall achieve security and protection where exposed to weather, and preserve

continuity of existing fire ratings. E.Cutting and matching shall successfully duplicate undisturbed adjacent finishes, colors,

textures, and profiles. Where there is dispute whether duplicate is successful or has been achieved to reasonable degree, the Architect's judgement shall be final.

F.Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be uncovered. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to

movement during cutting and patching. B.After uncovering work, examine the conditions affecting the installation of products

or performance of the Work. C.Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect in writing; do not

proceed until Architect has provided further instructions. 3.02PREPARATION A.Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value or

integrity of the affected portion of the Work. B.Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C.Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be

exposed by cutting and patching work. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A.Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work

and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.



B.Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes.

C.Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide

completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. D.Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through

surfaces. E.Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent

finishes. 1.For continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection. 2.For an assembly refinish the entire unit. 3.Extent of Painting: a.Paint over complete surface plane unless otherwise noted. b.Over patched wall, soffit, or ceiling surfaces, paint to nearest cut-off line for entire surface

such as intersection with adjacent wall or ceiling, beam, pilasters, or to nearest opening frame where total cut-off does not occur within 10 feet of patch unless otherwise noted.

F.Perform cutting and patching with same installer or fabricator of this Contract for the

following: 1.Weather-exposed or moisture-resistance elements. 2.Fireproofing. 3.Finished surfaces exposed to view. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Project Cleaning 27720.00 01745-1

SECTION 01745 PROJECT CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Perform cleaning operations as required during construction to prevent

accumulations of dust, dirt, soil, and debris. B.Comply with regulatory requirements and anti-pollution ordinances during conduct of

cleaning and disposal operations. C.Cleaning for specific products or work is specified in the appropriate individual

specification Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01CLEANING MATERIALS A.Use cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which

will not damage surfaces,and are recommended by manufacturer of surfaces to be cleaned.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01DUST CONTROL A.Clean interior spaces prior to start of finish painting, and continue cleaning as required

until painting is completed. B.Schedule operations to prevent dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning

operations from adhering to wet or newly-coated surfaces. 3.02FINAL CLEANING A.Remove dust, dirt, grease, stains, fingerprints, labels, spilled, splattered and other

foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. B.Clean interior and exterior glass an surfaces exposed to view, remove temporary

labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Project Cleaning 27720.00 01745-2

C.Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D.Clean or replace if required filters of operating equipment. E.Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F.Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G.Restor all areas to original state. H.Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the

site. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Closeout Procedures 27720.00 01770-1

SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Provide the following: 1.Closeout procedures. 2.Adjusting. 3.Spare parts and maintenance materials. 4.Test reports. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01745 - Project Cleaning. 2.Section 01772 - Record Documents. 3.Section 01773 - Operating and Maintenance Data. 4. Section 01774 - Warranties and Bonds. 1.02SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A.Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1.Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work

has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.

2.In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

a.If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

3.Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 4.Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. 5.Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final

certifications and similar documents. 6.Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and

access to services and utilities; include (where required) occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.

7.Submit Record Drawings, final project photographs, damage or settlement survey,

property survey, and similar final record information. Refer to Section 01772.

8.Deliver operating and maintenance manuals, tools, spare parts, extra stock and similar



items. Refer to Section 01773. 9.Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise

the Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions. 10.Provide testing and recording operation of Mechanical equipment as required to

comply with Contract Documents and to meet Owner standards. 11.Complete instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. 12.Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with

construction tools, mock-ups, and similar items. 13.Execute final cleaning. B.Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either

proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1.The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed.

2.Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of "punch-list" for final acceptance.

1.03FINAL ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES A.Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final

acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1.Submit final Application for Payment per General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

2.Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

3.Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect.

4.Submit evidence of maintenance of temperature and humidity from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 15 requirements.

5.Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6.Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. B.Reinspection Procedure: Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that

the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.

1.Upon completion of reinspection, Architect will prepare a certificate of final



acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final accep-tance.

2.If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. 1.03ADJUSTING A.Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.04SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.Furnish products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified

in individual specification Sections. B.Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Architect; obtain receipt

prior to final payment. 1.05TEST REPORTS A.Furnish copies of all test reports. 1.06FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND OWNER OCCUPANCY A.When the work is completed, prepare a written notice to the Owner stating that the

Work has been inspected by the Contractor and that it has been constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.



SMP/SHG - PCF&P Record Documents 27720.00 01772-1

SECTION 01772 RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.During construction store Record Documents in Contractor's field office apart from

documents used for construction. B.Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. C.Do not use Record Documents for construction. 1.02PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.Maintain on site, one set of the following documents; record actual revisions to the

Work: 1.Contract Drawings. 2.Specifications. 3.Addenda. 4.Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5.Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B.Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C.Record the following information concurrent with construction progress. 1.Deviations from sizes, locations, and other features of installations shown in Contract

Documents. 2.Locations of Work buried under or outside the building such as plumbing and electrical

lines and conduits. 3.Establish locations of underground work, points of connection with existing utilities,

changes in direction, valves, manholes, catch basins, capped stubouts, invert elevations, and similar items.

4.Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 5.Give sufficient information to locate Work concealed in the building with reasonable ease

and accuracy. In some instances, this may be by dimension, in others, it may be in relation to the spaces in the building near which it was installed. Architect's decision in this matter will be final.

6.Provide actual numbering of each electrical circuit. 7.Location of all significant Work concealed inside the building whose general locations are

changed by the Contractor from those shown on the Contract Documents. 8.Locations of all items, not necessarily concealed,which the Contractor elects to vary, with


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Record Documents 27720.00 01772-2

the Architect's review and acceptance, from the Contract Documents. D.Record Documents shall be performed carefully and neatly in a form accepted in

advance by the Architect. E.Provide additional Drawings as necessary for clarification. F.Provide one reproducible set and two prints of Record Documents, made from drawings,

which have been updated to show actual conditions, for Work specified in the individual Sections.

G.Specification: Legibly mark and record in each Product section description of actual

Products installed, including the following: 1.Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2.Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3.Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. H.Large-Scale Layout Drawings: 1.Division 15 and 16 of the Specifications require the preparation of large-scale, detailed

Layout Drawings of the Work of those Divisions. These Layout Drawings are not shop drawings as defined by the General Conditions, but together with shop drawings or Layout Drawings of all other affected Sections are used to check, coordinate, and integrate the Work of the various Sections.

2.Include these Layout Drawings as part of the Record Documents. I.Delete Architect title block and seal from documents. J.Contractor shall include with the record documents, 2 complete sets of all submittals

(as-built drawings, product data and shop drawings) with final action by the Architect.

K.Record Documents are subject to review and acceptance by the Architect. L.Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Operating and Maintenance Data 27720.00 01773-1

SECTION 01773 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and

operation of products, equipment, and systems furnished under the Contract. B.Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified herein and as referenced in other

Sections. C.Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance and operation of equipment and

systems. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Prior to 50 percent progress payment and prior to preparation of data submit two copies

of preliminary draft of proposed formats for Operating and Maintenance Manuals and outlines of contents. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

B.Prior to Substantial Completion submit one copy of completed Operating and

Maintenance Manuals in final form for review. Copy will be returned with Architect's comments. No final inspection will be made until required Manuals have been submitted and accepted.

C.Submit 3 sets of Manuals in final accepted form prior to final acceptance of the Project

by the Owner. 1.03MANUAL FORMAT A.Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B.Binders: 1.Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2.When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings. a.Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List: 1)Title of Project. 2)Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C.Table of Contents: Include in each volume, neatly typewritten. 1.Identify Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and phone number.



2.List each product included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3.Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in the

Contract Documents. 4.List, with each product, the name, address, and telephone number of: a.Subcontractor or installer. b.Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c.Identify area of responsibility of each of the previously mentioned parties. d.Nearest source of supply for parts and replacement. D.Organization: 1.Size: 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. 2.Paper: 20-pound, minimum, white, for typed pages. 3.Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 4.Drawings: a.Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b.Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages. 5.Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. a.Provide typed description of product, and major components parts of equipment. b.Provide indexed tabs. 1.04CONTENT OF MANUAL A.Product Data: Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.

Annotate each sheet to: 1.Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 2.Clearly identify data applicable to installation. 3.Delete references to inapplicable information. B.Drawings: 1.Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a.Relations of components parts of equipment and systems. b.Control and flow diagrams. 2.Coordinate Drawings with information in Section 01772, to assure correct illustration of

completed installation. 3.Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance Drawings. C.Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1.Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2.Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. D.Copy of each Warranty, Bond, and Maintenance Contract issued: 1.Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: a.Proper procedures in the event of failure. b.Circumstances which might affect the validity of Warranties and Bonds. E.Manual for Equipment and Systems:



1.Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. 2.Content: For each unit of mechanical equipment and each mechanical system, as

appropriate: a.Description of unit, or system, and component parts: 1)Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2)Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3)Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b.Operating procedures: 1)Startup, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. 2)Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instruction. 3)Summer and winter operating instructions. 4)Special operating instruction. c.Maintenance procedures: 1)Routine operations. 2)Guide to "trouble-shooting." 3)Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 4)Alignment, adjusting and checking. d.Servicing and lubrication schedule, with list of lubricants required. e.Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f.Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g.Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, current prices, recommended quantities to

be maintained in storage, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.

1)Predicted life of parts subject to wear. 2)Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. h.As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i.Contractor's and subcontractors' coordination drawings. As installed color coded piping

diagrams. j.Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 3.Content, for each electrical and electronic system, as appropriate: a.Description of system and component parts. 1)Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2)Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. 3)Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b.Circuit directories of panelboards. 1)Electrical service. 2)Controls. 3)Communications. c.As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams. d.Operating procedures: 1)Routine and normal operating instructions. 2)Sequences required. 3)Special operating instructions. e.Maintenance procedures: 1)Routine operations. 2)Guide to "trouble-shooting."



3)Disassembly, repair and reassembly. f.Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. g.Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, current prices, recommended quantities to

be maintained in storage, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.

1)Predicted life of parts subject to wear. 2)Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. F.Instructions of Owner's Personnel: 1.Work requiring instruction of Owner's personnel is specified in the individual Sections. 2.Schedule instructional meeting or meetings within 2 weeks after Operating and

Maintenance Manuals have been accepted by the Architect. 3.Prior to final inspection, fully qualified manufacturers' representatives shall fully instruct

Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment and systems.

4.Basis of Instruction: Operating and Maintenance Manual. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Warranties and Bonds 27720.00 01774-1

SECTION 01774 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01GENERAL A.Submittals Required: Submit special warranties, bonds, service and maintenance

contracts specified in the individual Sections. B.Warranties between Contractor and manufacturers, and Contractor and suppliers,

shall not affect warranties between Contractor and Owner. C.Contractor shall not be held responsible for defects due to misuse, negligence, willful

damage, improper maintenance, or accident caused by Others, nor shall he be responsible for defective parts whose replacement is necessitated by failure of Owner's maintenance forces to properly clean and service them, provided Contractor has furnished complete operating and maintenance instructions to Owner.

1.02FORM OF SUBMITTALS A.Number of original signed copies required: Two each. B.Bind in commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11-inch three-ring binders with hardback,

cleanable, plastic covers. C.Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS,

with title of Project; name, address, and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible principal.

D.Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the

Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification Section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item.

E.Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of

Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

1.03PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS



A.Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined.

B.Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C.Co-execute submittals when required. D.Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1.04TIME OF SUBMITTALS A.For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction

with Owner's permission, submit documents within 30 days after acceptance. B.Make other submittals within 30 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to

final Application for Payment. C.For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within 30 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01FORM OF WARRANTY A.Submit the following written warranty, typed on the Contractor's letterhead for the

entire Work, or special warranties typed on subcontractor's letterhead when required by a Specification Section:

WRITTEN WARRANTY FOR ___________________________________ We hereby warrant that _________________________________ which we have provided in_______________________________ ____________________________________has been completed in accordance with Specification Section________________ and Contract Documents requirements. We agree to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any other adjacent Work

which may be displaced or damaged by so doing, which may prove to be either patently defective in its workmanship or materials within the period of time prescribed by law from date established in the Certificate of Substantial Completion of above named structure, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted.

We also agree to repair any and all damages resulting from such defects. In the event of our failure to comply with above-mentioned conditions within a reasonable

time, but in no case longer than 14 calendar days after being notified in writing by the Owner, we collectively and separately, do hereby authorize the Owner to have said defective Work and damages repaired or replaced and made good at our expense, and will honor and pay the costs and charges therefor upon demand.

Signed___________________________________________________ (Contractor's name, address, license number, and date of signing) or Signed___________________________________________________ (Subcontractor's name, address, license number, and date of signing) Countersigned____________________________________________ (Contractor's name, address, license number, and date of signing) END OF SECTION

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences Issued for Construction California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, CA September 29, 2000

SMP/SHG-PCF&P Fences and Gates 27720.00 02820-1

SECTION 02820 FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes providing steel fences and gates as shown on the Drawings and as

specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: for posts foundation. 2.Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal: galvanized steel fence and gate. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."02820.A"=Steel fence. 2."02820.B"=Not used. 3."02820.C"=Sliding gate. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Fence Height: 8 feet nominal. B.Line Post Spacing: At intervals not exceeding 10 feet. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's brochure with complete description of

products. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Include plans and elevation, and include details of sections and connections. Show

anchorages and accessory items. 2.Indicate welds, both shop and field, by AWS A2.4 symbols. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Criteria: Welding shall comply with the following American Welding Society (AWS)

referenced standards: 1.A2.4 - "Welding Symbols." 2.D1.1 - "Structural Welding Code." 3.D1.3 - "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Fences and Gates 27720.00 02820-2

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Steel Bars and Plates: ASTM B 36, sizes as shown on Drawings. B.Steel Plates to be Bent or Cold Formed: ASTM A 283, Grade C. C.Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B, 4-inch square posts, 1-1/2-inch square rails and

3/4-inch square pickets. 1.Steel shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, G90. D.Fasteners: Zinc-coated galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153. E.Anchor Bolts: Size as required. F.Gates: 1.Frames: 1.90-inch outside diameter steel tubes, hot-dipped galvanized. 2.Hardware: Of adequate size and strength to provide proper operation of

sliding gates. G.Concrete: Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi as specified in

Section 03300. 2.02 FABRICATION A.General: Fabricate swinging and sliding gate and fence to profiles as shown on the

Drawings. B.Finish: Provide manufacturer's rust inhibiting primer for field finish painting as specified

in Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A.Comply with accepted shop drawings. B.Set posts straight, plumb, and true to line. 1.Slope tops of concrete footings to provide drainage away from posts. C.Install post caps throughout to exclude moisture from interiors of posts. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Parking Bumpers 27720.00 02846-1

SECTION 02846 PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide precast parking bumpers as shown and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 02745 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."02846.A"=Parking bumpers. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Manufacturer's literature describing products. 1.03PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Precast concrete shall be handled, stored, and supported so as to cause no chipping or

cracking of units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Parking Bumpers: Precast reinforced concrete. 1.Minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days, white color. 2.Concrete Reinforcement: Minimum No. 3 bars. B.Fastening over Asphaltic Concrete: Steel pins and non-shrink grout as recommended

by approved bumper manufacturer. 1.Provide two pins per bumper unless otherwise noted. 2.02FABRICATION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Parking Bumpers 27720.00 02846-2

A.Parking bumpers shall be standard, prefabricated, reinforced precast product, 36 inches

long x 9 inches wide x 5-1/4 inches high, with 3-1/4-inch chamfer at top corners; Christy Concrete Products Model M20W6BB.

1.Each unit shall contain 2 reinforcing bars. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrate where units will be placed and verify that conditions are satisfactory

for placement. B.Proceed when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Clean concrete substrate on which units will be installed to be free of dirt, dust, grease,

oil, and other foreign material. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Install parking bumpers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using steel

pins and non-shrink grout. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Architectural Precast Concrete 27720.00 03450-1

SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes but is not limited to providing the following precast-concrete Work

as required. 1.Spandrel panels. 2.Spandrel panels with adhered stone veneer. 3.Parapet caps. 4.Concrete columns. 5.Interior panels. 6.Supports, anchors, and attachments. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.Section 04450 - Stone Veneer. 3.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: placement of anchors for welding to building

structural components. 4.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."03450.A"=Precast concrete panels, interior. 2."03450.B"=Precast concrete panels, exterior. 3."03450.C"=Supports, anchors, attachments. 4."03450.D"=Precast concrete column. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.General: The precast system shall include the precast units, their connections, any

additional connections, reinforcing, transportation, and erection procedures and shall be designed and provided by the Contractor.

B.Design Criteria: 1.The architectural precast concrete panels, stair, and columns and their attachment to

structure shall be designed, fabricated and erected under the direction of a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of California and retained by the subcontractor. Calculations, design drawings, and material specifications, as required, shall be signed by the subcontractor's Structural Engineer and shall demonstrate compliance with provisions of



CBSC Chapter 19 including wind loading, seismic forces and attachments to the structure. 2.Precast concrete manufacturer shall be responsible for submitting signed calculations,

design drawings, and material specifications to regulatory agency in order to obtain necessary approvals and permits.

3.Gravity Load: Elements shown, include weight of elements supported by panels. 4.Wind Load: Withstand wind load pressures of 70 mph with increases at boundary

conditions in accordance with CBSC. 5.Seismic: Withstand seismic load as specified under CBSC. 6.Thermal Movement: Provide for noiseless expansion and contraction of the

components and assemblies caused by an external temperature range of plus 20 degrees F to plus 180 degrees F.

7.Building Movement: a.General: In Addition to thermal movement, provide for the following. b.Load Deflection: L/360 live load, L/240 dead plus live load. c.Seismic Drift: 2 percent of story height. 8.Maximum Allowable Loads Imposed Upon Building Structure: a.Vertical Dead Load: See Structural details. b.Horizontal Load Due to Wind or Seismic: See Structural details. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: 1.Provide manufacturer's data for fabricated items to be incorporated in the work. 2.Product data on concrete protective treatment including manufacturer's installation

instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under supervision of a qualified professional engineer

showing complete information for fabrication and installation of precast concrete units.

1.Unit shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions including openings. Each unit shall be numbered for identification, and this number shall correspond to the numbers on the erections drawings.

2.Finishes. 3.Joining clearances and clearances between units. 4.Joint and connection details; full size. 5.Welding connections indicated by AWS standard symbols. 6.Lifting and erection inserts. 7.Location and details of hardware attached to structure. 8.Handling procedure. 9.Relationship to adjacent materials. C.Samples: Prior to commencement of manufacture, submit samples representative of

finished exposed face showing typical manufacturing range of color and texture. 1.Size: Approximately 12 inches by 12 inches and of appropriate thickness.



D.Mix Design: Submit mix designs prior to casting operations. E.Calculations: Submit design calculations prepared by a California registered Structural

Engineer. F.Documentation: 1.Submit documentation indicating compliance with requirements specified in Article 1.04

for installer, fabricator, and Structural Engineer. 2.Document indicating compliance with specified requirement of certification of welders. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications Engage an experienced installer who has completed

architectural precast concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.Fabricator shall be producer member of Precast Concrete Institute (PCI) or participate in

its Plant Certification Program and be designated a PCI Certified Plant for Group A1-Architectural Concrete.

C.Fabricating firm shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience in fabrication of

architectural precast units, similar to members required for this project, and have sufficient production capacity to produce, transport, and deliver required units without causing delay in the work.

D.Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional Structural Engineer who is legally

authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

1.Engineer services are defined as those performed for installation of precast concrete units that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

E.Codes and Standards: Comply with following codes, specifications, and standards

applicable to type of architectural precast concrete units indicated. 1.American Concrete Institute's "Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings" (ACI 301). 2.ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." 4.American Welding Society's "Structural Welding Code-Steel" AWS D1.1 and

"Structural Welding Code-Reinforced Steel" AWS D1.4. 5.Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and

Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." 6.Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook-Precast and

Prestressed Concrete". F.Fabrication and Erection Tolerances:



1.Tolerance of any dimension not specified below: the numerically greater of +/- 1/16 inch per ten feet or +/- 1/8-inch.

2.Thickness: +/- 1/8-inch. G.Installation Tolerances: Install concrete units without exceeding the following tolerance

limits. 1.Variations from Plumb: 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 1/2 inch in 40 feet or longer. 2.Variation from Level or Elevation: 1/2 inch in 40 feet, total =/- 1/2 inch at any location. 3.Offsets in Alignment of Adjacent Members at any Joint: 1/16 inch in any 10-foot run; 1/8

inch maximum. H.Source Quality Control: 1.As a minimum, all testing and inspection as per CBSC paragraph 108. 2.Testing of welding and placing of reinforcing steel as specified in Section 03320. 3.Concrete tests and inspections shall be as specified in Section 03310. 4.Testing and inspection of steel welding as specified in Section 05100. a.Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passes AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 5.Before leaving the casting yard all precast units shall be measured by the Contractor, to

verify that the dimensions of the units are within acceptable tolerances and can be erected in conformance with the specified erection tolerances.

1.05PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Delivery and Handling: 1.Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times to

assure continuity of installation. 2.Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to

avoid excessive stresses or damage. 3.Lift or support units only at the points shown on shop drawings. Use strong-backs or

other devices for hauling units as recommended by the manufacturer. 4.Block and laterally brace precast during transport and while stored on site; provide

lateral bracing sufficient to prevent bowing and warping. a.Blocking and bracing shall be clean, non-staining and shall not prevent

uniform curing of exposed surfaces. 5.Protect units from dirt and damage during handling and transport. B.Storage at Jobsite: 1.Store units to protect them from contact with soil, staining, and from physical damage. 2.Store units, unless otherwise specified, with non-staining, resilient supports located in

same positions as when transported. 3.Store units on firm, level, and smooth surface. 4.Place stored units so that identification marks are easily readable. 1.06 SCHEDULING A.Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without



delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

B.Schedule precasting to permit 30 days curing prior to installation. 1.07REJECTIONS A.Defective Work: 1.Concrete units which do not conform to the specified requriements including dimensional

tolerances, strength, and finishes, shall be replaced with concrete units that meet the requriements of this Sections. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from corrections to the concrete work.

2.Defective units and materials may be rejected at any time whether in place or not. Promptly remove and replace rejected concrete units and materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

B.Dimensional Tolerances: Units having any dimension smaller or greater than required,

and outside the specified tolerance limits, will be considered deficient and will be rejected if the appearance or function of the unit is adversely affected, or if the larger dimensions interfere with other construction. Repair, or remove and replace rejected units as required to meet the construction conditions.

C.Finishes: Architectural concrete units, whose finish has any of the following defects will

be rejected. Repair the following finish defects if permitted by the Architect, or remove and replace rejected units as required to meet the requirements of this Section.

1.Does not match previously approved samples as to uniformity of color or texture. 2.Has chipped, ragged, irregular or broken corners or edges. 3.Has damaged surfaces, notches or other surface defects. 4.Excessive air pits and voids evident on the exposed surfaces. 5.Foreign material embedded in the facing mix. 6.Cracks visible after wetting. 7.Visible repairs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Willis Construction Company (tel: 408-623-2585), Clark Pacific, or Coreslab

Structures. 2.02MATERIALS A.Formwork: Provide forms and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic,

wood, or other acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will



produce required finish surfaces. 1.Curved Forms: Fin Form plywood; curved to radius of column; core and face of white

birch; formwork shall provide a smooth, glossy finish, upon removal of the form.

B.Portland Cement: As specified in Section 03300 except White Portland cement. 1.For surfaces exposed to view in the finished structure use same brand, type, and source

of supply throughout the panel production. 2.Color: Additives as required to match lightest travertine specified in Section 04450;

cream color with no yellow, per Architect's sample. C.Aggregates: Coarse and fine aggregate of rounded sealed-surface expanded shale

meeting ASTM C33 and MNL-117 requirements. Grade aggregate uniformly from fine to coarse with maximum size no larger than 5/8 inch.

D.Water shall be clean and potable. E.Admixtures: 1.Air entrainment admixtures shall be per ASTM C260. 2.Admixtures containing Thiocyanates or more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not

permitted. F.Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60. Prestressed tendons shall

not be used. G.Welded-wire mesh shall conform to ASTM A185. H.Anchors, Dowels, and Ties: ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel of temper and

diameter required to support loads without exceeding allowable design stresses. I.Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: ASTM F593, alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and studs;

stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers. J.Inserts: Lifting inserts shall be as selected by the manufacturer. K.Cement Grout: Portland cement and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of

1.0 part cement to 2.5 to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

L.Stone Veneer: As specified in Section 04450. M.Epoxy: As recommended by precast manufacturer for adhesion of stone veneer. N.Nonmetallic Shrink-Resistant Grout: Non-metallic, premixed, shrinkage resistant,

non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents.



1.Master Builders "Master Flow 713", Sonnoborn Building Products "Sono Grout", or US Grout Corporation "Five Star Grout".

2.Color and Texture: To match precast finish. O.Cleaner and Texturing Acid: Prosoco, Inc. "Heavy Duty Concrete and Limestone

Cleaner" to provide sugar-cube texture. P.Paint: Rust-inhibitive type. Q.Bearing Pads: 1.Elastomeric Pads: Vulcanized, chloroprene elastomeric compound, molded to size or

cut from a molded sheet, 50-60 shore A durometer. 2.Laminated Fabric-Rubber Pads: Preformed, unused synthetic fibers and

new, unvulcanized rubber. Surface hardness of 70-80 shore A duro-meter.

3.Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (TFE), with glass fiber reinforcing bonded to mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.

4.Tempered Hardboard Pads: PS 58, smooth both sides. 5.Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, and other accessories required for

installation of project units and for support of subsequent construction or finishes.

2.03MIX A.Use same brand/source for cement, aggregate, and other mix components for the entire

Project. B.Mixes shall be controlled such that color shall be uniform within each panel and from

panel to panel throughout the entire Project. C.Mix Properties: 1.See Section 03300 for mix properties. 2.Normal weight aggregate, f'c=5000 psi as determined by tests of 6-inch x 12-inch

cylinders, 5/8-inch aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump, maximum water/cement ratio of 0.4, 4 percent air entrainment, drying shrinkage limit of 0.03 percent.

D.Face Finish Texture and Color: Acid etch or light sandblast face of concrete to provide

sugar cube texture. Color to match Architect's sample. E.Finish of Unexposed Surface: As cast. 2.04FABRICATION A.Preparation: 1.Obtain necessary information for coordination of inserts, anchors, mechanical,



and electrical work, etc., with precasting. 2.Coordinate with adjoining work for attachment of anchorages to insure proper

location and alignment, watertight installation, and neat finished appearance.

B.Molds: 1.All precast units shall be cast in molds of rigid construction, accurate in detail with

precise corners and arrises. 2.Molds shall be constructed of materials that will result in finished products conforming to

profiles, dimensions and tolerances indicated by Contract Documents and on the accepted shop drawings.

3.Prior to casting of precast units, molds shall have all surface joints, radii, corners, etc., filled, ground, filed, straightened or otherwise removed to provide a finished concrete surface that is smooth and dense, free of honeycombing, air pockets, offsets, sinkages, or other irregularities.

C.Plant Casting: 1.Mixing, conveying, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall conform to the

applicable requirements for concrete in Section 03300 and as modified herein.

2.Concrete for any one precast element shall be placed without any pour or construction joints.

3.Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with MNL-117.

4.Concrete placing, curing, and finishing operations shall be controlled to match texture, color, appearance, and finish of accepted mock-up units, and to assure that the texture, finish, color and appearance are uniform within each panel and from panel to panel.

D.Reinforcement: Comply with the recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of Standard

Practice" for fabricating, placing and supporting reinforcement. 1.Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during

concrete placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.

2.Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum cover after finishing. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete.

3.Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

4.Reinforce precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. E.Inserts and Embedments: 1.Properly embed inserts in precast panels. 2.Test inserts to establish test data for use in design. 3.Locate hoisting devices to permit removal after erection.



4.Prime paint except surfaces in direct contact with concrete or requiring field welding. a.Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to prime

painting. 5.Welding of inserts shall be per AWS D1.1 and D12.1. F.Adhere granite veneer on spandrel panels as indicated on Drawings. G.Patching: Minor patching in plant may be accepted providing structural adequacy

and appearance of finished units is not impaired. 1.Patches in exposed areas which are noticeable at a distance of 3 feet-0

inches or more shall be rejected. H.Cure units according to the requirements of MNL-117 to develop concrete quality, and to

minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.

1.Units shall be cured for a minimum of 30 days before delivery to Site. I.Markings: Markings shall not be visible after installation. 1.Mark each precast concrete unit to correspond with designation on shop drawings. 2.Identify pick-up points of precast concrete units and orientation in structure with

permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on shop drawings.

3.Imprint casting date on each precast concrete unit 2.05PLANT TESTING AND INSPECTION A.Test and inspect precast concrete according to MNL-117. B.Strengths of precast concrete units will be considered deficient when they fail to comply

with ACI 318 requirements. C.When there is evidence that the strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or

may not meet ACI 318 requirements, the City will employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C42.

D.Patching: Where core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units meet

requirements, solidly fill core holes with patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces.

E.Defective Work: Discard precast concrete units that do not conform to requirements,

including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and finishes. Replace with precast concrete units that meet requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01INSPECTION A.Prior to installation of units, erector shall check jobsite dimensions affecting the Work.

Any discrepancies between design dimensions and field dimensions which could adversely affect installation in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of Architect. If discrepancies do exist, installation shall not proceed until they have been corrected.

B.Do not install precast units until supporting concrete has attained minimum allowable

design compressive strength. C.Do not install precast units until metal deck and concrete fill have been placed. D.Do not permanently anchor units to the structure until all temporary shoring under beams

or other structural elements have been removed and until other precast units and other construction that will significantly impact deflection of supporting

structure. 3.02PREPARATION A.Deliver anchorage items which are to be embedded in other construction before

start of such work; provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions as required for installation.

3.03ERECTION A.Comply with Precast Concrete Institute (PCI) "Recommended Practice for Erection

of Precast Concrete" and as follows. B.Base lines and elevations shall be established prior to starting erection and shall be

continuously checked as required. C.Setting: 1.Lift with suitable lifting devices at points provided. 2.Set level, plumb, square, and true within allowable tolerances. D.Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and

alignment as units are being permanently connected. E.Anchoring: Anchor precast units in place by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise

indicated on shop drawings. 1.Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring

and grouting are completed. F.Welding: Welding per AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4 with certified welders.



1.Protect precast concrete units from damage by field welding or cutting operations and provide noncombustible shield as required.

G.Touch up field welds and scratched and damaged metal surfaces of connecting and

supporting devices that were shop painted. 3.04ERECTION A.Install precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the

recommended erection and location tolerances of MNL-117. 3.05PATCHING AND REPAIRS A.Mix and place patching mixture to match color and texture of surrounding concrete. B.Any repairs impacting strength of panels will be allowed only if the Engineer retained by

the Contractor ascertains that repaired panel is as strong as the undamaged panel.

C.Acceptance of any patches and/or repairs is contingent upon the final surface being in

conformance with the mock-up panel. In addition, there shall not be apparent line of demarcation between the original and repaired work.

D.No patching or repairs shall take place without the concurrence of the manufacturer, and

all work shall be performed in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

E.Acceptance of any repairs or patches shall be solely contingent upon the acceptance of

Architect. 3.06CLEANING A.Cleaning Methods: In accordance with fabricator's instructions. B.After Installation: Clean soiled surfaces with detergent and water, using fiber brush and

sponge, and rinse thoroughly with clean water. C.Use extreme care to prevent damage to surfaces and to adjacent materials. D.Thoroughly rinse with clean water immediately after using cleaner. E.Remove temporary pads, shims or other temporary hardware. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Cementitious Floor Underlayment 27720.00 03551-1

SECTION 03551 CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide cementitious concrete underlayment to level floors at wood flooring and

carpet finish flooring areas as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 09640 - Wood Flooring. 2.Section 09680 - Carpet. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."03551.A"=Cementitious underlayment. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 4,100 psi per ASTM C109. B.Allowable Tolerance: Depressions in normal slope shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's literature describing materials and specifications for

mixing, placing, curing, and protecting. C.Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification that applicator is trained by him. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator shall be approved by manufacturer. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Ensure storage facilities are weathertight and dry. B.Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use.



1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: Building shall be enclosed and maintained at a

temperature above 40 degrees F. before and during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Ardex Inc., Thoro Systems products, or Master Builders. 1.Ardex product numbers are specified as a standard of quality. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Concrete Underlayment: K-15. B.Fast-Setting Underlayment: K-55. C.Primer: P-51. D.Metal Lath: Expanded diamond type, 3.4 pounds per square yard, galvanized. E.Resilient Emulsion: E-25. F.Aggregate: Uniformly graded, clean sand free of impurities and excessive fines, organic

materials or other deleterious substances. G.Water: Clean and potable, free from impurities detrimental to underlayment. 2.03MIXES A.Mix concrete underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrate and verify that surfaces are free from debris and are reasonably

clean and dry and that conditions are otherwise suitable to receive underlayment.

3.02PREPARATION A.Fill all cracks and voids with a fast-setting underlayment.



B.Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.03PLACING A.Follow manufacturer's technical bulletin for application. B.Mix primer, and apply with rubber squeegee over entire surface of substrate. C.When primer is sufficiently dry, install metal lath. D.Pour or pump concrete compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E.Install to approximately 1-inch thick spreading and screeding to a smooth surface. F.Provide edge forms as required. G.Finish shall be as recommended by manufacturer for reception of specified finish

materials. 3.04CURING A.Allow underlayment to harden as recommended by manufacturer. B.Do not allow traffic on underlayment during hardening period; minimum 2 hours or

longer. 1.Do not load floors until reasonable strength has been achieved. 2.Any loading on topping shall be distributed and not concentrated. C.Maintain adequate ventilation and temperature above 50 degrees F. until underlayment

is dry. 3.05ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Underlayment damaged after installation as a result of other trades shall be repaired

prior to installation of scheduled floor finish at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Slate 27720.00 04415-1

SECTION 04415 SLATE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes furnishing slate for installation in casework specified in Section 06410

and shelving as specified in Seciton 06200 and as shown on the Drawings and as specified.

B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 2.Section 06410 - Custom Casework. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."04415.A"=Slate countertop. 2."04415.B"=Slate shelving. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit technical data for slate, accessory, joint compound, and other

manufactured products required. C.Shop Drawings: Show layout; indicate materials and details of installation; show joint

details and other details showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of, related work.

1.Submit shop drawings for the work of this Section with Section 06410 to permit simultaneous review.

D.Samples: Not less than 12 inches in length and where applicable, width. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Obtain color, grade, finish, type and variety of stone from a single source with resources

to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Handle and store in such a manner as to prevent breakage and chipping. B.Cover materials when necessary to protect from elements.



C.Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent their deterioration or damage

due to moisture changes, contaminants, corrosion, breakage, chipping, or other causes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Slate: Burlington Stone "Elterwater"; honed finish. B.Accessories: 1.Adhesive: As required for installation. 2.Stainless steel pins. 3.Impregnating Sealer: As recommended by stone manufacturer. 2.02FABRICATION A.Slate: Fabricate to profiles as shown on Drawings. Coordinate with adjacent stainless

steel shelf specified in Section 05700. B.Cutting: Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit, and finish stone work to shapes and dimensions

shown. Make exposed plane surfaces true to line. 1.Cut holes and sinkage in stones for anchors as required. C.Clean sawn backs of stones to remove rust stains and free iron particles. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify substrate is true, plumb, and level. B.Proceed when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to placement of

stonework. B.Clean stone prior to setting; remove soil, stains, and foreign materials that could impair

bedding or appearance; follow with a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasives.

3.03INSTALLATION



A.Set slate to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Shim and adjust to set

accurately in locations indicated. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged stonework. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Stone Lettering 27720.00 04451-1

SECTION 04451 STONE LETTERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following stone work as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 1.Hand carved letters in exterior stone veneer. 2.Sandblasted inscriptions on interior stone veneer. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04450 - Stone Veneer. 2.Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3.Section 09750 - Stone Facing. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."04451.A"=Carved letters. 2."04451.B"=Sandblasted inscriptions. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Layouts: 1.Carved letters: Provide 1:5 scale inscription layouts showing at least 2 recommend-

ations for letter style. Lettering shall be arranged to avoid vertical stone joints. After approval, provide hand drawn full size layout.

2.Sandblasted Inscriptions: Provide full-size CADD based digital layout for approval. After approval, cut rubber stencils with a flat bed plotter.

C.Samples: 1.Carved Letters: Travertine sample with minimum 2 full-sized carved stone letters with

finish sealer. 2.Sandblasted Inscriptions: Travertine sample with minimum 2 full-sized finished letters. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Approved Carver/Sandblaster: Nicholas Benson at John Benson Studio, 29 Thames

Street, Newport, RI 02840; 401-846-0566. B.Carver's Qualifications: Carver shall be a Specialist with at least 10 years experience in

sculpting hand carved letters in stone.



C.Sandblaster's Qualifications: Specialist experienced in sandblasting letters in travertine. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Travertine: As specified in Section 04450 except stone panels shall have extra

thickness to accommodate depth of V-cut letter. B.Grout: Epoxy grout as recommended by stone Specialist. C.Sealer: L.M. Scofield "Lithochrome"; transparent or colored Gray stain as selected by

Architect. D.Stencils: Anchor Continental #117. E.Sand: As recommended by Specialist for sandblasting inscriptions. F.Cleaner: Citrus-based as recommended by stone Specialist. 2.02FABRICATION A.Sandblasted Inscriptions: Cut rubber stencils with a flat bed plotter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LETTERING A.Carving: 1.Text and Letter Size: As shown on Drawings. 2.Lettering shall be hand carved to consistent 90 degree V-section with fine, hand-chiseled

finish. 3.Exposed natural holes in travertine shall be filled with epoxy grout. 4.Letters shall be given a single brush-painted application of transparent or colored stain

sealer. B.Sandblasted Inscriptions: 1.Text and Letter Size: As shown on Drawings; letter size approximately 2-1/4-inch or

larger. 2.Lettering shall be sandblasted to a depth equal to the mean stroke width. 3.Subsequent to sandblasting, letters shall be blown free of all sandblast dust and residue,

exposed natural holes in travertine filled with epoxy, and given a spray application of stained sealer.

4.After staining, remove stencils and clean stone free of all residue using cleaner followed



by water wash. 3.02ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged work not matching

approved samples. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Granite 27720.00 04465-1

SECTION 04465 GRANITE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes the following as shown on the Drawings and as specified: 1.Providing exterior granite base and interior bench. 2.Install granite on exterior stair landing on concrete substrate specified in Section 03300. 3.Granite sills at windows in travertine clad walls and granite projecting trim and cladding

below window sills. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 02782 - Stone Masonry Pavers: granite pavers. 2.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.Section 07140 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."04465.A"=Granite base. 2."04465.B"=Not used. 3."04465.C"=Granite sills. 4."04465.D"=Granite flooring. 5."04465.E"=Masonry mortar. 6."04465.F"=Granite bench. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit technical data for stone, accessory, joint compound, and other

manufactured products required. C.Shop Drawings: Show layout; indicate materials and details of installation; show joint

details and other details showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of, related work.

1.Submit shop drawings for the work of this Section with Section 03300 to permit simultaneous review.

D.Samples: Not less than 12 inches in length and where applicable, width. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE



A.Obtain color, grade, finish, type and variety of stone from a single source with resources

to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Handle and store in such a manner as to prevent breakage and chipping. B.Cover materials when necessary to protect from elements. C.Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent their deterioration or damage

due to moisture changes, contaminants, corrosion, breakage, chipping, or other causes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Granite: Sierra White; light sandblast finish except granite bench which is honed. B.Stainless Steel for all Metal in Contact with Stone and Concrete: 1.Sheet, Bar, Dowels, and Plate: AISI Type 302/304. 2.Fasteners, Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: AISI Type 302/304, non-magnetic, ASTM

F593, hex-head bolts, stainless steel nuts; and flat, stainless steel washers. Shot-in anchors are not permitted.

3.Shims: AISI Type 302/304. C.Cleaner: Commercial, neutral liquid type especially prepared for stone work, as

recommended by stone fabricator. D.Impregnating Sealer: As recommended by stone manufacturer. E.Masonry Mortar: Portland cement based setting mortar setting bed. F.Epoxy: Akemi "Akepox" epoxy-based stone adhesive. 2.02FABRICATION A.Granite: Fabricate to profiles as shown on Drawings. B.Cutting: Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit, and finish stone work to shapes and dimensions

shown. Make exposed plane surfaces true to line. 1.Cut holes and sinkage in stones for anchors indicated on the accepted shop drawings. 2.Exposed surfaces and edges of stone unit shall be free from cracks, broken corners,

chipped arrises, scratches or other defects affecting appearance. Patching or filling shall not be permitted.



3.Backs of stone units shall be sawn to true planes, parallel to face plane, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.

4.Cut stone units full and true on faces, reveal, beds, joint and top, to the full dimensions required. All edges shall be straight and true with sharp and true arrises. All stone shall fit together accurately.

5.Sawn surfaces and edges shall be cleaned of all rust stains and iron particles. C.Provide for visual safety stripes at landing and treads to comply with disabled

accessibility requirements of CBSC Title 24. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify substrate is true, plumb, and level. B.Proceed when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to placement of

stonework. B.Clean stone prior to setting; remove soil, stains, and foreign materials that could impair

bedding or appearance. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasives.

3.03INSTALLATION A.Set granite to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Shim and adjust to set

accurately in locations indicated. B.Install granite sill and copings in Portland cement based mortar and anchored as

required, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove stains as work progresses. B.As the work progresses, remove and replace the following which is to be considered

defective stonework: 1.Broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged work. 2.Defective joints. 3.Stone units which do not match adjoining stonework. 4.Stonework not matching approved samples or mock-up. 5.Stonework not complying with other requirements indicated.



C.Patching or hiding defects in stone will not be permitted. D.Clean Work and adjacent surfaces free from dirt, stains, other defacements, and foreign

materials and splatters as Work progresses and upon completion. 1.Use clean water and stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning

agents or other cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers. 3.05PROTECTION A.Protect stone work from other material that will cause stain. Stone subject to damage

after setting shall be properly covered or protected. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Cold-Formed Metal Framing 27720.00 05400-1

SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide load-bearing cold-formed punched channel studs as shown and as

specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05410 - Exterior Enclosures Stud Framing: framing for stone, panels, and

curtainwall. 2.Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster. 3.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: gypsum sheathing. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."05400.A"=Metal framing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.The exterior wall framing system shall be designed, fabricated and erected under the

direction of a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of California and retained by the Contractor. Calculations, design drawings and material specifications, as required, shall be signed by the Contractor's Structural Engineer and shall demonstrate compliance with provision of the UBC Chapter 16 including wind loading and seismic forces.

1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information and installation

instructions for each item of cold formed framing and accessories. C.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for items not shown and for special

components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1.Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gauge designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices, bridging, accessories, and details required for proper installation.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A.Light-gage metal framing construction shall be in accordance with AISI

"Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and Uniform Building Code (UBC) Chapter 16 including wind loading and seismic forces.

B.System components (studs, track, blocking, etc.) shall be by a single manufacturer. C.Stud properties shall be in accordance with Metal Stud Manufacturer's Association

(MSMA) Manual. D.Tolerance: Framing shall be plumb, even and flat to within 1/8-inch in 10 feet.

Tolerance shall be non-cumulative. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in

manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings.

1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Pre-Installation Conference: 1.Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at Project Site with installers

of other work including door and window frames and mechanical and elec-trical work.

2.Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Metal Studs: Western Metal Lath, Knorr Steel Framing Systems, or Cemco. 2.02 METAL FRAMING A.System Components: With metal framing required, provide manufacturer's

standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.

B.Galvanized Studs: Fabricate metal framing components of structural quality prime

steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A653; sizes and gage as shown on Structural



Drawings. C.Galvanized Track, End Closures, Zee Girts, Furring Channels, Bridging and

Accessories: Fabricate metal framing components of structural quality prime steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A653.

D.Finishes: 1.Provide prime coated finish with one coat of shop-applied red oxide or other similar

rust-inhibitive primer. 2.Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and

repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A780. E.Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with

corrosion-resistant plated finish. 1.Sheet Metal Screws: Number 12, minimum. 2.Expansion Bolts: Hilti "Kwik Bolt II" or Rawl "Rawl-Bolt". F.Electrodes for Welding: Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3 and as

recommended by stud manufacturer. 2.02 FABRICATION A.General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection.

Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion.

B.Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by

welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. 1.Wire tying of framing components will not be permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.Manufacturer's Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with

manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

B.Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks

accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or powder-driven fasteners, or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.

C.Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb

walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.



D.Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls,

anchor ends of lateral stiffeners to supporting structure. E.Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system

wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, servic-es, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported.

F.Installation of Wall Stud System: Secure studs to bottom runner tracks by either

welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. Secure studs to top runner tracks as shown to accommodate building movement.

G.Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet-0 inches square with double stud at each

jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated.

H.Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, with separate studs; do not bridge

the joint with components of stud system. I.Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than

5'-0" on center. Weld at each intersection. J.Field Painting: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during

handling and installation. Use compatible primer for prime coated surface; use galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces.

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Metal Fabrications 27720.00 05500-1

SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following items as shown and as specified. 1.Exterior steel railings and handrails not specified in Section 05700. 2.Exterior eye bolts for window washing. 3.Exterior steel gratings. 4.Nosings for exterior stairs. 5.Exterior ladders at roof. 6.Ship's ladder assembly. 7.Elevator pit ladder. 8.Elevator sill angles and hoisting beams. 9.Supports for miscellaneous items including stone countertops, overhead coiling doors,

projection screens, ceiling-hung projector lifts, and toilet partitions and miscellaneous exterior steel.

10.Framing to support large louvers. 11.Catwalk including catwalk framing, grating, stairs, steel angle guardrails, and all

attachments to structural steel framing. 12.Miscellaneous angles for anchorage. 13.Miscellaneous clips, angles, framing and supports, and other items as required to install

the work. 14.Expansion bolts and other fasteners. B. Related Sections: 1.Section 02755 - Site Concrete: exterior concrete stairs. 2.Section 04415 - Slate. 3.Section 04465 - Granite. 4.Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 5.Section 05510 - Metal Stairs. 6.Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal: custom handrails and guardrails. 7.Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors. 8.Section 09900 - Painting. 9.Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 10.Section 10200 - Louvers and Vents. 11.Section 11132 - Projection Screens. 12.Section 11138 - Projector Lifts. 13.Section 11602 - Laboratory Furnishings, Casework, Tops and Stainless Steel

Fabrications. 14.Section 14210 - Electric Traction Elevators. 15.Section 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are



defined as follows: 1."05500.A"=Exterior steel railings and handrails. 2."05500.B"=Exterior eye bolts. 3."05500.C"=Exterior steel gratings. 4."05500.D"=Exterior steel nosings. 5."05500.E"=Elevator pit ladder. 6."05500.F"=Elevator sill angels and hoist beams. 7."05500.G"=Miscellaneous supports. 8."05500.H"=Large louver framing. 9."05500.I"=Catwalk. 10."05500.J"=Miscellaneous angles for anchorage. 11."05500.K"=Miscellaneous clips, angles, framing for installation. 12."05500.L"=Expansion bolts and fasteners. 13."05500.M"=Ceiling hung toilet partition supports. 14."05500.N"=Roof ladder. 15."05500.O"=Ship's ladder. 16."05500.P"=Miscellaneous galvanized exterior steel. 1.02 REFERENCES A.American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1."Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel

Buildings," including "Commentary on the AISC Specification." 2."Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." B.American Welding Society (AWS): 1.D1.1: "Structural Welding Code." 2.D1.3: "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1.ASTM A6: "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled-Steel Plates,

Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 2.ASTM A123: "Standard Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products." D.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1."Pipe Rail Manual." 2."Metal Grating Manual" - MGB531. E.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) "Painting Manual": 1.SP 3: "Power Tool Cleaning." 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams,



anchor details, and installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of work, including paint and grout products.

C.Shop Drawings: Submit large-scale drawings for the fabrication and erection of

assemblies which are not completely shown by manufacturer's data sheets. 1.Show construction of various parts, methods of joining, thicknesses of metals, profiles of

surfaces, reinforcing anchorage, and structural supports. Include information regarding concealed and exposed joints, welds, and fastenings.

2.Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices.

3.Indicate shop and field welds by AWS "Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination," A2.4.

4.Interfaces: a.Where items must fit and coordinate with finished surfaces or construction spaces, take

measurements at project Site and not from Drawings. b.Where concrete or other materials must be set to exact locations to receive Work, furnish

assistance and direction necessary to permit other Section to properly locate their Work.

c.Where welded connectors or concrete inserts are required to receive Work, shop drawings shall show exact locations required. Furnish all such Drawings for the installation of connectors or inserts as part of the Work of other Sections.

5.Submit shop drawings for the work of this Section with related work specified in other Sections to permit simultaneous review.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Welding procedures, welders, welding operations, and tackers shall be qualified in

accordance with the AWS "Standard for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications," B2.1.

1.Comply with AWS publication "Welding Zinc Coated Steel" for galvanized products.

B.Allowable Tolerances: Comply with AISC Manual of Steel Construction. Deviation

from plumb, level and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500. C.Design Criteria: 1.Fabricate and erect structural items to support normally imposed loads and in

accordance with applicable requirements of AISC and CBSC Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 27.

2.Handrails: Comply with NAAMM Pipe Railing Manual and be designed to resist a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point to the rail and intermediate rails and their connections capable of withstanding a load of 25 pounds per square foot applied horizontally at right angles in accordance with UBC Table 16-B.

3.Balcony Railings and Guardrails: Comply with UBC Table 16-B; lateral load for other



than exit facilities shall be 20 pounds per square foot. a.Loads at roof rails shall conform to CalOSHA standards: 200 pounds within 2 inches of

top edge, outward or downward, with 3 inch maximum deflection, and 150 pounds outward or downward, on any intermediate member.

4.Comply with Regulations of California American Resources Board (CARB), South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113.

1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect steel members from corrosion. B.Store packaged materials in their original unbroken packages or containers. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop

drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary.

1.07SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.Inserts and Anchorages: 1.Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 2.See concrete Sections for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Bars, and Plates: ASTM A36. B.Steel Plates to be Bent or Cold Formed: ASTM A283, Grade C. C.Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40. 1.Pipe Fittings: Malleable iron ASTM A47, Grade 32510. D.Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500, Grade B; or hot rolled, ASTM A501. E.Hot-Rolled Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A575, grade as selected by fabricator. F.Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 aluminum alloy. G.Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either

malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153.



H.Expansion Bolts: Hilti Kwik-Bolt ICBO Report No. 4627, or equivalent by Rawl,

reverse cone, self-wedging, expansion type. I.Powder Actuated Devices (PAD): Tempered steel pins with special

corrosion-resistant finish. Hilti Fastening Systems or Rawl. J.Fasteners: 1.Provide zinc-coated fasteners with galvanizing complying with ASTM A153 for

exterior use or where built into exterior walls. 2.Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required for the installation of

metal-fabrication items. K.Nonshrink Grout: Sonneborn "Sonogrout," Upco "Upcon," or Master Builders

"Masterflow 713," nonmetallic, nonstaining, premixed grout having a compres-sive strength at 28 days of not less than 8,000 psi.

L.Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded. M.Primer: Verify compatibility of prime coat and finish coat as specified in Section 09900. N.Galvanizing-Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in

galvanized steel. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Use materials of size and thicknesses shown or required to produce adequate

strength and durability in the finished product for the intended use. B.Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings. 1.Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery. C.Use the type of materials shown or specified for the various items of work. D.Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and

straight, sharp edges. 1.Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain

separation or otherwise impairing work. E.Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with recommendations of

AWS. 1.Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining

surfaces. F.Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal

fabrications to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete



and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors as required.

G.Except as otherwise indicated, use Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts

for exposed fasteners. 1.Fabricated and space anchoring devices as shown and required to provide

adequate support for intended use of work. H.Galvanizing: 1.Provide a zinc coating for those items shown on the Drawings or specified to

be galvanized or used in an exterior location, using the hot-dip process. a.ASTM A153: Iron and steel hardware. b.ASTM A123: Unfabricated and fabricated products; rolled, pressed,

and forged steel shapes; plates, bars, and strip; and iron castings. 2.Repair zinc coating damaged after fabrication with specified repair paint in

accordance with American Hot Dip Galvanizing Association (AHDGA) publication "Recommended Practice for Touch-up of Damaged Galva-nized Coatings."

I.Shop Painting: Shop-prime work, except those members or portions of members to

be embedded in concrete; surfaces and edges to be field welded; and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

1.Minimum Cleaning Requirements: In accordance with Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC) SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning."

2.03PREFABRICATED ITEMS A.Abrasive Nosings: American Safety Tread Co. "Type 24", or Balco, Inc., for installation

in concrete. 1.Provide in contrasting colors; install at all treads and top landing in compliance with

CBSC Title 24 disabled accessibility requirements. B.Eye Bolts for Window Washing: Tieback anchors by Swingstage, (tel 818-937-6727) or

Pro-Bell. C.Ship's Ladder: Alaco, O'Keeffe, or Precision Stair. 1.Construction: High-strength 6061-T6 aircraft aluminum alloy; 3-inch flat steps with

non-slip ridges, special mounting brackets for top fastening and floor bracket.

2.04 METAL FABRICATION ITEMS A.Railings, Handrails, and Guardrails: Comply with requirements of NAAMM "Pipe

Railing Manual". 1.Fabricate from steel shapes as indicated, with continuously welded joints and

smooth, exposed edges.



2.Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

3.Weld shop joints; fit field joints with concealed pins and sleeves. 4.Flush fittings may be used for crosses and tees of pipe railings. 5.Handrail Brackets: Richard Wilcox's "Hold-Tite Handrail Bracket No. 466" or

Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., "Handrail Bracket No. 950". 6.Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings after fabrication and prime paint for field painting

with aliphatic urethane system. B.Gratings: 1.Electric Substation: Grating to be selected by Cal Tech and approved by local

agencies. 2.Areaway Grating: McNichols Co. bar grating, 1-1/2-inch high x 3/16-inch thick for

maximum load of 430 pounds; maximum span of 8'-0"; grating weight 17.4 lbs./sf. Finish: Galvanized steel.

3.Elsewhere: Welded galvanized steel grating with 1-3/16-inch bearing bars with cross bars 4-inch on center.

a.Manufacturer: IKG Bordon "Weldforged Steel Grating Type WB". C. Ladders: 1.3/8-inch-x-2-inch flat bar stringer. 2.Weld 3/4-inch-diameter rungs at 12-inch centers. 3.Anchor stringers top and bottom. 4.Finish: Hot dip galvanize after fabrication. D.Catwalk: McNichols "Plank Grating" or equal; 12 inches wide. E.Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1.Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports as required to complete the

Work. 2.Fabricated to sizes, shapes, and profiles shown on Drawings or required. a.Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes,

plates, and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates, and a minimum of joints for field connection.

b.Cut, drill, and tap units to receive items anchored to the Work. F.Finish Items as Scheduled: Unless otherwise scheduled, galvanize and prime

exterior work, prime paint interior work. 1.Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding;

shop prime in one coat. 2.Provide minimum G90 hot-dipped galvanized coating. 3.Clean, degrease, and prepare galvanized surfaces for prime paint in

accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and conditions under which metal fabrication items are to be installed. 1.Notify Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of

the Work. 2.Do not proceed with the Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in concrete construction. 1.Coordinate delivery of items to the Project site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments which are not

part of scheduled work. B.Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; plumb, level, true, and free

of rack; measured from established lines and levels. C.Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment. D.Replace item damaged in course of installation. E.Supply items requiring to be cast into or embedded in other materials to appropriate

trades. F.Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1.Grind joints smooth. 2.Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip

galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

3.Protect and clean areas surrounding welds. G.Touch-up Painting: 1.Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting.

2.Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry-film thickness of 2.0 mils. 3.Touch up galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Metal Stairs 27720.00 05510-1

SECTION 05510 METAL STAIRS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Providing metal stairs and landings complete as shown and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04465 - Granite. 2.Section 05100 - Structural Steel: testing. 3.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: standard railings and handrails. 4.Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal: custom railings and handrails. 5.Section 09635 - Stone Flooring. 6.Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring. 7.Section 09900 - Painting. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."05510.A"=Concrete-filled metal pan stairs. 2."05510.B"=Stainless steel checkered plate. 1.02REFERENCE STANDARDS A.American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1.Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B.American Welding Society (AWS) 1.D1.1; Structural Welding Code - Steel. C.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1.Metal Stairs Manual. D.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1.Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.03SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.General Classification: Per NAAMM. 1.Stair Type: Parallel and square. 2.Construction: Custom fabricated. 3.Class: Architectural. 4.Components: a.Treads:



(1)Stairs 1 and 2: Concrete-filled metal pan with resilient flooring finish as specified in Section 09650; similar to NAAMM Figure 7.

(2)Stairs 3: Interior: same as stair 1 and 2. Exterior: Stone tread with landing and bridge of stainless steel checkered plate; provide with ADA-compliant strips at landing.

(3)Stairs 4: Basement and 1st Floor: same as stair 1 and 2. 1st Floor to Intermediate Landing: Metal pan with stone tread; provide with ADA-compliant markings.

(4)Stair 5 and Stair 8: Metal stair with galvanized steel checkered plate; provide with ADA marking.

(5)Stairs 6: Below Grade: same as stair 1 and 2. 1st Floor and Up: exterior stair with traffic coating finish as specified in Section 07180.

b.Risers: Plate. Risers and stringers at Stair No. 3 to be painted to match color of rubber treads and landing.

c.Landings: Same design as stair tread except as noted above. d.Railings and Guardrails: 1.Standard: Steel pipe rails and guardrails as specified in Section 05500. 2.Custom: Glass guardrails with stainless steel tubular handrails as specified in Section

05700. B.Design Requirements: Stair design shall comply with requirements of 1998 CBSC with

Title 24, Part 2. 1.Vertical Loads: Design for live loads per CBSC Section 1604 and Table 16A. 2.Lateral Loads: Design per CBSC Section 1628, Zone 4, importance factor = 1.0. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Complete layouts, supports, fabrication, splices and attachments

for railings, and installation drawings. Include setting and template drawings for items built into structure. Shop drawings prepared and signed by a Structural Engineer registered in California.

D.Engineering Calculations for Stair Designs and Details: Calculations prepared and

signed by the same licensed structural engineer registered in California as prepared and signed the shop drawings.

1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Welders' Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by certified welders qualified in

accordance with procedures specified in American Welding Society (AWS) Standard in accordance with AWS D1.1 using procedures, materials, and equipment of the type required for the Work.



1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protection: Use all means necessary to protect stairs and paint before, during, and after

erection and to protect installed work and materials of other trades. In event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements as necessary, to acceptance of Architect and at no additional cost to Owner.

B.Storage: Store material in manner to preclude damage and to permit ready access for

inspection and identification of each shipment and piece. Material showing evidence of damage will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from Site. Store materials, either plain or fabricated, above ground and keep free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter and protect from corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Steel: 1.Structural Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36 unless otherwise noted. ASTM A588

Grade 50 or ASTM A572 Grade 50 where shown.. 2.Structural Tubing: ASTM A500 (cold formed), Grade B, (welded or) seamless. 3.Pipe Columns: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. 4.Sheet: ASTM A446, Grade B (Structural Quality) with 1.25 ounce per square foot

coating. 5.Steel to be Welded: Conform to chemical and metallurgical limitations specified in AWS

D1.1 and D1.3. 6.Raised Checkered Plate: Stainless steel, shot-peened to match embossed exterior wall

panels. B.Fasteners: 1.Machine Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307 Grade A. 2.Plain Washers: ASTM F844. 3.Beveled Washers: ANSI B.27.4, Type B. 4.Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. 5.Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts. 6.Expansion Bolts: As specified under Section 05500. 7.Threaded Rod: ASTM A36. 8.High Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1. 9.Direct Tension Indicators (Load Indicator Washers): ASTM F959, Type 325 Cooper +

Turner, Inc's Coronet Load Indicators or equal. C.Metal Primer: Tnemec's Series 18 Enviro-Prime, Ameron, or equal; containing not less

than 40 percent solids by volume, not more than 340 grams per liter of volatile organic compounds, nor any chlorinated solvents. Proposed substitutions considered only when specified product's performance criteria are met or exceeded.



D.Welding Electrodes: Per Reference Standards. E.Checkered Plate: Stainless steel and galvanized steel as manufactured by Ryerson or

O'Neal. 2.02FABRICATION A.General: Fabricate stairs per NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual; pre-assembled and

arranged as shown. Provide steel channel beams and stringers, intermediate platforms, cover plates, hanger rods, supports, suspension structure with seismic bracing, cross bracing of intermediate platforms where shown, stiffeners, anchors, clips, angles, and fastening devices. Shop assemble work in largest practicable sections to minimize field connections. Bolt with proper size bolts; draw nuts tight and upset threads. Use metal clean and free from mill scale, rust, and pitting. Do cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping for attachment of other work.

B.Workmanship: File or grind smooth parts exposed to finish view; remove weld marks

and leave free of noticeable fabrication marks. Miter corners and angles of members, unless otherwise shown, or where not required by standard practice. Fabricate members true to length so assembling may be done without fillers. Bends, twists, open joints in finished members, or projecting edges at corners of connections not permitted. Miter, cope, and block carefully to produce tight hairline joints.

C.Welding: Sequence weld to minimize distortion and heat stresses. Weld by shielded

electric arc process per AWS. Continuous weld along entire contact area, except where spot welding is permitted. Spot welding not permitted on surfaces exposed to view.

D.Shop Painting: 1.Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of loose mill scale, dirt, rust, and other foreign

matter by use of suitable tools per SSPC SP-2 for hand tool cleaning or SSPC SP-3 for power tool cleaning. Remove oil an grease with suitable volatile solvents per SSPC SP-1.

2.Environmental Conditions: Do not paint when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees

F. Paint in dry weather or under cover; paint over dry rust-free surfaces. 3.Application: Stir paint and keep at uniform consistency during application. Apply paint

by brush or spray per manufacturer's directions to a dry film thickness of not less than 2 mils dry firm thickness; do not thin paint in excess of manufacturer's recommendations. Allow paint to dry before handling or shipment.

4.Scope: Apply to exposed and concealed steel surfaces. Do not shop coat surfaces and edges requiring field welding; keep shop coat at least 2 inches away.



2.03FABRICATION INSPECTION A.Refer to Section 05100 for welding testing and inspection requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verification of Conditions: Prior to erection of metal stairs, examine Project site and

verify that work can be erected per Contract Documents. Give written notification of any discrepancies and deficiencies. Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory.

3.02PREPARATION A.Field Measurements: Secure as required for proper and adequate fabrication and

erection of work covered in this Section. Assume responsibility for exact measurements.

B.Templates: Furnish for exact locations of items to be embedded in concrete and any

setting instructions required for installation. 3.03ERECTION A.General: Erect metal stairs per Reference Standards, as shown, and as specified. B.Precautions: Take care to protect work already installed from damages resulting from

metal stair erection. C.Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary bracing adequate to protect

structure against damage due to construction, and other expected loads. D.Field Assembly: 1.General: Set members to lines and elevations shown. Align and adjust various

members forming part of complete system before permanently fastening to structure. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

2.Cleaning: Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact after assembly.

3.Splicing: Splice members only where shown or where accepted by Architect. 4.Unfair Holes: Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins.

Ream holes that require enlargement to admit bolts. Where hole is required to be enlarged by more than 3/32-inch, ream to and use next larger bolt size.

5.Gas Cutting Torches: Do not use field for correcting fabricating errors in framing unless accepted by Architect. Finish gas cut sections equal to sheared



appearance when permitted. 6.Field Welds or Bolting: Provide same quality as that provided in shop. 7.Erection Bolts for Welded Connections: Remove and fill holes. E.Setting Base Plates: 1.Concrete Bearing Surfaces: Clean and roughen to improve bond. Clean bottom

surface of base plates. 2.Grout: Install and cure per manufacturer's recommendations such that no voids remain.

Finish exposed surfaces neat. F.Expansion Bolts: Install per manufacturer's recommendations. Use washers on all

bolts. Use care to avoid cutting or damaging reinforcing bars. When exposed to view in final structure, use bolts of length that will extend entirely through but not more than 1/4-inch beyond nuts unless otherwise shown.

3.04FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Refer to Section 05100 for testing and inspection requirements for welding, bolting and

expansion anchors. 3.05FIELD TOUCH UP A.General: Clean surfaces and apply paint as specified for shop painting; use same paint

used for shop coat. Touch up marred and abraded surfaces; paint field connections and adjacent uncoated portions of steel members.

B.Touch up galvanized surfaces with repair paint in accordance with American Hot Dip

Galvanizing Association (AHDGA) publication "Recommended Practice for Touch-up of Damaged Galvanized Coatings" and in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Ornamental Metal 27720.00 05700-1

SECTION 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following ornamental metal work as shown on the Drawings and as

specified: 1.Stainless steel and glass handrails, brackets, glass rail shoe cladding and top rail tube. 2.Stainless steel exterior handrail as shown on Landscape Drawings. 3.Stainless steel interior panels. 4.Stainless steel awning panels. 5.Stainless steel cladding. 6.Galvanized steel sunscreen. 7.Galvanized steel swinging and rolling gates. 8.Interior steel gate. 9.Stainless steel light housing assembly. 10.Galvanized steel light housing assembly. 11.Fixed chair leg attachments. 12.Column at monumental stair bridge. 13.Light fixture support bracket. 14.Auditorium flush entrance threshold. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01455 - Mock-ups. 2.Section 02820 - Fences and Gates. 3.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4.Section 05100 - Structural Steel. 5.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: handrails, expansion bolts, miscellaneous

supports. 6.Section 05510 - Metal Stairs. 7.Section 07416 - Stainless Steel Panels. 8.Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 9.Section 08800 - Glazing. 10.Division 16 - Electrical. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."05700.A"=Painted galvanized steel gate. 2."05700.B"=Stainless steel and glass railing. 3."05700.C"=Stainless steel panels. 4."05700.D"=Stainless steel column. 5."05700.E"=Not used. 6."05700.F"=Not used



7."05700.G"=Stainless steel cladding. 8."05700.H"=Not used. 9."05700.I"=Stainless steel awning. 10."05700.J"=Galvanized steel sunscreen. 11."05700.K"=Stainless steel light housing assembly. 12."05700.L"=Int. aluminum panel. 13."05700.M"=Galvanized steel plate. 14."05700.N"=Galvanized steel light housing assembly. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Submit large-scale drawings for the fabrication and erection. 1.Include plans and elevations and include details of sections and connection;

show anchorage and accessory items. 2.Indicate locations of all field splice connections. 3.Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation

of anchorage devices. 4.Submit shop drawings for handrails specified in this Section with stair work specified in

Section 05510 to permit simultaneous review. C.Samples: Submit for finish of metal. 1.Submit samples of handrail, guardrail, and bracket. 2.Submit 12-inch long sample of sunscreen panel indicating finish and quality of welds. 3.Submit perforated stainless steel sample. 4.Submit samples of embossed and shot-peened stainless steel. 5.Submit sample of exterior gates indicating quality of welded connections. D.Engineering Data for Handrails: Calculations and drawings shall be sealed and signed

by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of California and shall indicate design and reactions to structure.

1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Design Requirements: 1.Handrails and Railings: Conform to the recommended practices of the National

Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) "Metal Stairs Manual".

a.Handrails: Comply with NAAMM Pipe Railing Manual and be designed to resist a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point to the rail and intermediate rails and their connections capable of withstanding a load of 25 pounds per

square foot applied horizontally at right angles in accordance with UBC Table 16-B. b.Balcony Railings and Guardrails: Comply with UBC Table 16-B; lateral load for other

than exit facilities shall be 20 pounds per square foot.



B.Welding: 1.Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) standard D9.1 as a minimum. 2.Welding shall be by certified welders qualified to weld stainless steel with TIG equipment. 1.04MOCK-UP A.Provide mock-up of handrail/guardrail to adequately display all types of components and

Welded connections and to indicate the quality of materials and finishes. 1.Mock-up section full height and 5 feet long indicating quality of connections and how

elements fit together. 1.05PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field

splicing and assembly of units at the Project site. B.Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. C.Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Verify at the site conditions affecting work under this Section, and obtain accurate

dimensions covering all parts thereof for incorporation in shop drawings submitted before fabrication of the Work.

B.Verify dimensions before fabricating materials to ensure proper coordination and fit. 1.07SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.Inserts and Anchorages: Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.08PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Verify at the site conditions affecting work under this Section, and obtain accurate

dimensions covering all parts thereof for incorporation in shop drawings submitted before fabrication of the Work.

B.Verify dimensions before fabricating materials to ensure proper coordination and fit. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 MATERIALS A.Stainless Steel: ASTM A554 tube, ASTM A312 pipe, ASTM A167 plate, and ASTM

A276 bar. 1.Finish: Embossed to match wall panels specified in Section 07416 or shot-peened to

match wall panels (for pipes, tubes, bars, plates, etc. which cannot be embossed).

B.Perforated Plate: Embossed stainless steel; perforations as shown on Drawings. C. Steel Shapes, Bars, and Plates: ASTM A36. D.Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as

recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying with applicable AWS specifications, and as required for strength and compatibility in the fabricated items.

E.Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise

indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with metals joined.

1.Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting sheet metal fabrications and attaching them to other construction, unless otherwise indicated.

F.Expansion Bolts: As specified in Section 05500. G.Miscellaneous Angles and Supports: As specified in Section 05500. H.Aluminum Shoe for Railing: 1.Exterior Bridge and Stair No. 6: Extruded aluminum ASTM B221 with Kynar Duracron

or Polycron III finish; color to match 3-coat PPG Duranar "Champagne Metallic UC70178XL.

2.2nd Floor Balcony and Landing outside Stair No. 1: Clad with embossed stainless steel. I.Glass: 1/2-inch clear tempered as specified in Section 08800. J.Nonshrink Grout: Sonneborn "Sonogrout," Upco "Upcon," or Master Builders

"Masterflow 713," nonmetallic, nonstaining, premixed grout having a compres-sive strength at 28 days of not less than 8,000 psi.

2.02FABRICATION A.Use materials of size and thicknesses shown or required to produce adequate

strength and durability in the finished product for the intended use. 1.Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery. B.Welds exposed to view or touch shall be ground and dressed smooth before

shot-peening.



C.Exterior Gates: Fabricate frame and supports of galvanized bar stock members of

sizes and shapes as indicated. Furnish rolling gate with steel wheels on V-track and locking hardware as specified in Section 08710. Furnish swinging gates with hinges and lock as specified in Section 08710.

D.Interior Gate: Fabricate of steel tubes to match stair railing. E.Handrails and Guardrails: 1.Railing shall be constructed of stainless steel members of sizes and shapes indicated. 2.Railings shall run continuously to each landing post. 3.Top railings shall be smooth with welded connections ground smooth with no visible

grind marking. 4.Provide stainless steel rail brackets. 5.Wall railing shall be secured to walls with brackets and backing as required. 6.Finish: 2D mill finish shot-peened to match embossed stainless steel wall panel texture. F.Fabricate panels to sizes as shown free of warping and oil-canning. 1.Increase metal thickness or reinforce metal with concealed stiffeners, backing materials,

or both as required to produce surfaces whose variation in flatness do not exceed those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet and to impart sufficient strength for indicated use.

G.Awning: Fabricate of stainless steel perforated plate to profiles as shown on Drawings. 1.Perforations: 3/8-inch holes staggered 3/4-inch on center; 22.7 percent open. H.Stainless Steel Cladding: Fabricated of embossed stainless steel, 16 gage with no

evidence of oil canning. I.Sunscreen: Galvanized steel frame with louvers fabricated to profiles and thickness as

shown on Drawings. 1.Fabricate for attachment to concrete curb. 2.Finish: Aliphatic polyurethane coating, System 4 as specified in Section 09900; color to

match travertine stone color. J.Light Housing Assemblies: 1.Stainless Steel: Fabricate assembly of embossed stainless steel gutter with wire mesh

screen as shown on Detail 23/A5.0.15. 2.Fabricate of galvanized steel plates with removable front panel as shown on Detail

38/A6.2.1. Finish: Aliphatic polyurethane coating as specified in Section 09900; color to match precast color.

K.Fixed Chair Leg Attachments: Fabricate of steel for attachment of furniture legs on

Levels 2 and 3. Fabricate angles to profiles and gages as shown on Drawings and for installation with counterset screws as shown. Finish: Painted finish as specified in Section 09900; color to match chair leg finish.



L.Column at Monumental Stair Bridge: Fabricate of embossed stainless steel tube,

1-piece unit with no joints except at cap. Diameter and height as shown on Drawings. Provide with brackets for attachment to wall supports. See Detail 29/A9.4.7.

M.Exterior Handrails: Fabricate of stainless steel tubes to gage and profiles as shown on

Landscape Drawings. Provide with 2D mill finish shot-peened to match embossed stainless steel texture.

N.Light Fixture Support Bracket: Fabricate of stainless steel bars to profiles as shown on

Detail 17/A9.3.3. Provide with 2D mill finish shot-peened to match embossed stainless steel texture.

O.Auditorium Flush Entrance Threshold: Fabricate of stainless steel bar as shown on

Detail 6/A9.3.12. Provide with 2D mill finish shot-peened to match embossed stainless steel texture.

P.Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal

fabrications to in-place construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and conditions under which items are to be installed. 1.Notify Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of

the Work. 2.Do not proceed with the Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; plumb, level, true, and free

of rack; measured from established lines and levels. B.Metalwork shall be formed to shape and size with sharp lines, angles, and arrises. 1.Shearing and punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces. 2.Thickness of metal, details of metal, details of assembly, and support shall give ample

strength and stiffness for the intended purpose. C.Conceal fastenings where practicable. At exposed locations, use mechanical fasteners

where possible.



D.For permanent connections, use welds where possible. 1.Welds exposed to view shall be ground and dressed smooth. E.Provide lugs, clips, anchors, and miscellaneous fastenings necessary for complete

assembly and installation. F.Miter corners and angles of exposed moldings and frames. G.Grout posts, plates, and similar items set in concrete with nonmetallic nonshrink grout. 1.Provide weatherproof attachment at sunscreen. H.Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments which are not part of

scheduled work. I.Replace item damaged in course of installation. 3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.After installation and adjustment, clean surfaces of fabrications. B.Remove protective wrappings when work is no longer subject to subsequent

construction damage. C.Clean to remove dirt, stains, soil, marks, and other foreign matter from surfaces. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Seismic Joint Assemblies 27720.00 05800-1

SECTION 05800 SEISMIC JOINT ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide prefabricated metal expansion joint cover assemblies as shown and as

specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04450 - Stone Veneer. 2.Section 07180 - Traffic Coatings. 3.Section 07416 - Stainless Steel Wall Panels. 4.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."05800.A"=Exterior wall to wall seismic joint. 2."05800.B"=Bridge floor to floor seismic joint. 3."05800.C"=Bridge wall to wall seismic joint. 4."05800.D"=Bridge ceiling to ceiling seismic joint. 5."05800.E"=Interior floor to floor seismic joint 6."05800.F"=Interior floor to wall seismic joint. 7."05800.G"=Interior wall to wall seismic joint. 8."05800.H"=Interior ceiling to ceiling seismic joint. 9."05800.I"=Exterior roof below grade to wall. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate method of connection to structure and adjacent material. D.Samples: Submit 9-inch long samples of exposed finish material. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Design Criteria: Products shall be capable of accommodating seismic movement as

shown on Structural Drawings. B.Field Measurements; Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop

drawings and fabrication, where possible.



C.Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop, minimize field splicing and assembly of

units at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURER A.Balco, Watson Bowman Acme (WABO), C/S Group, Ltd., or Architectural Art

Manufacturing, Inc. 2.02UNITS A.Exterior Wall: Architectural Art Manufacturing, Inc. "R Series Type A", Balco "Type

FCVS", WABO "Weatherseam" or C/S Group, Ltd., with secondary waterproof barrier and custom fabrication for waterproof connection to aluminum sheet metal.

1.Color: Black. B.Second and Third Floor Bridges: 1.Pedestrian Bridge: C/S Group "SGR1100 with Secondary Seal". a.For exterior use with floor; with neoprene gutter connected to flexible drain. b.Flush with floor, no bump, approved by ADA. c.Custom manufacture for elastomeric finish on steel plate. d.Stainless steel finish. 2.Bridge Wall: C/S Group "SGR100 with Secondary Seal". 3.Bridge Ceiling: C/S Group "SGR100 with Secondary Seal" C.Interior Units, Basement and Sub-Basement: 1.Floor: Balco "Type NBA". 2.Floor to Wall: Balco "NBAL", WABO, or C/S with 1-hour fire barrier. 2.Wall: Balco Inc. "Type 6TW", WABO, or C/S with 1-hour fire barrier. 3.Ceiling: Balco Inc. "Type 6TW", Wabo, or C/S. Neoprene type seismic joint will not be

allowed. D.Exterior: 1.Roof Below Grade to Wall: Hydrotech seismic wall assembly. 2.03 MATERIALS A.Aluminum: ASTM B221 alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209 alloy 6061-T6

sheet and plate. B.Neoprene Extrusion: ASTM C509, type II, black. C.Silicone Extrusion: ASTM D2000, 4GE, 709, M, UV stabilized; color as selected.



D.Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers,

flexible seal and filler materials, adhesive and accessories compatible with material in contact; as required for complete installation.

E.Protection: Cover exposed metal surfaces with factory-applied adhesive paper or

polyvinyl chloride (PVC) protective strippable coating. 2.04FINISH A.Aluminum Contact Surfaces on Concrete: Zinc-rich primer. B.Aluminum Floor Covers: Mill finish. C.Exposed Neoprene Gasket: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's

standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and conditions under which expansion joint covers are to be

installed. B.Proceed when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Furnish setting drawings for installation of anchorages to be embedded in concrete

construction; coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, including prepara-

tion of substrate, applying materials and protection of installed units. B.Install expansion joint manaufacturer's fire barrier where indicated. C.Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: 1.Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation. 2.Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, and plumb, level,

true, measured from established lines and levels. 3.Where horizontal covers meet vertical trim, produce a hairline joint. D.Exterior wall seismic joint assemblies shall be designed to interface with one another for



a complete watertight and weatherproofed system. 1.All transitions at exterior wall joint assembly including inside and outside corners shall

utilize factory fabricated and sealed miters. Secondary seal shall be continuous with factory fabricated and sealed miters for positive drainage and waterproof closure and shall end in a formed flexible base closure with positive drainage to exterior.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is

complete. B.When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Rough Carpentry 27720.00 06100-1

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following rough carpentry work as shown on the Drawings and as

specified. 1.Equipment supports and nailers. 2.Miscellaneous plywood backing and sheathing. 3.Wood stud framing at magnet room. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 07535 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing. 2.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3.Division 15 - Mechanical: Mechanical equipment. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."06100.A"=Blocking. 2."06100.B"=Nailers. 3."06100.C"=Plywood. 4."06100.D"=Studs. 5."06100.E"=Stainless steel nails. 6."06100.F"=Powder actuated devices. 7."06100.G"=Fire-treated wood. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Product Standard PS

20-94 and "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No. 17" of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

B.Plywood shall conform to requirements of Product Standard PS 1-95 and be

manufactured by members of the Engineered Wood Association (APA). C.Grade Marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark or provide inspection

certificates from appropriate grading inspecting agencies. 1.03DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Immediately upon delivery to jobsite, place materials in area protected from weather. B.Protect lumber stored on site from rain and excessive sun, and stack in such fashion as



to prevent twisting and warping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Lumber: 1.Dimensions: a.Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b.Actual dimensions shall conform to industry standards established by the National

Grading Rule Committee. 2.Moisture Content: Provide S-Dry seasoned lumber except for lumber of 4-inch or

greater nominal thickness, provide FOHC lumber. 3.Dressing: Lumber shall be dressed S4S, unless otherwise noted. 4.Species: Unless otherwise noted, framing lumber shall be Douglas fir. 5.Grades: Following lumbers are specified in accordance with WCLIB grade

designations. a.Blockings, Nailers, and Furring: 2 inches to 4 inches thick x 2 inches to 4 inches wide,

"Utility" or better grade, paragraph 122-d. b.Planks: 2 inches to 4 inches thick x 6 inches and wider, No. 2 Grade, paragraph 123-c. c.Studs: Douglas Fir Stud Grade with No. 2 or better plates. B.Plywood: Douglas fir, C-D with exterior glue, 3/4 inch thick, five plies. C.Wood-Preservative Treatment: 1.Pressure-treat with water-borne preservative complying with AWPI LP-2. 2.After treatment, kiln-dry lumber to maximum 15 percent moisture content. 3.Treat wood nailers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar members in contact with

waterproofing, flashings, and cement plaster. D.Wood Fire-Retardant Treatment: 1.Pressure treat lumber with Hoover "Pyro-Guard", J. H. Baxter "ACQ Exterior or Interior",

or Hickson "Dricon", fire retardant in accordance with AWPA-recommended practice C20, "Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process"

2.Treat interior plywood used in the Work with Hoover "Pyro-Guard" or Hickson "Dricon" complying with AWPA C27.

E.Rough Hardware: Furnish nails, spikes, bolts, screws, and framing connectors of

standard manufacture required to complete the Work. 1.Hot-dip-galvanize items exposed to moisture or weather. 2.Provide stainless steel nails at magnet room. F.Powder Actuated Devices: Power driven fasteners of tempered steel pins with

special corrosive-resistant plating or coating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control penetration, maximum 3/4 inch. Fastening shall be



accomplished by low-velocity piston-driven powder activated tool. Pins and tool shall be manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems or Impex Tool Corporation.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Work must be accurately cut and solidly fit together to provide strong, rigid joints, with full

bearing for all members. 2.Split, warped, curled, or otherwise defective material or careless improper workmanship

will not be accepted. 3.Surfaces must be level, plumb, and true. B.Cutting and Blocking: Provide and install wood blocking, nailers, or grounds detailed or

required to provide anchorage for finishes, accessories, etc., as required to complete work.

1.Blocking and/or backing shall be securely bolted or otherwise anchored in place. C.Plywood Sheathing: Install with mechanical fasteners spaced as required by regulatory

agency. D.Plywood Telephone Backboards: Install fire-treated plywood securely fastened in

locations as required for telephone equipment. E.Studs: Install all members true to line required. Wood shingle shims are not

permitted. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Finish Carpentry 27720.00 06200-1

SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide finish carpentry, millwork, and related items as indicated on the Drawings

and as specified. 1.The Work specifically includes the following: a.Paneling. b.Base. c.Wood doors frames. d.Bookcases. e.Mailboxes. f.Installation of slate shelves. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04415 - Slate. 2.Section 06410 - Custom Casework. 3.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 4.Section 08210 - Wood Doors. 5.Section 09820 - Acoustical Insulation and Sealants. 6.Section 11602 - Laboratory Casework. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."06200.A"=Paneling. 2."06200.B"=Base. 3."06200.C"=Door frames. 4."06200.D"=Bookcases. 5."06200.E"=Mailboxes. 6."06200.F"=Acrylic lense. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: 1.Millwork shall be manufactured in accordance with the standards established in the WIC

"Manual of Millwork" in the Grade indicated. a.Standard for Factory Finishing: Comply with Section 25. b.Bookcase shelving shall be designed for 50-pound load in accordance with WIC

Technical Bulletin 435; maximum 1/2-inch deflection. 2.Veneers specified in this Section shall match custom casework, wood doors, and



laboratory casework specified in Sections 06410, 08210, and 11602. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Submit for custom-fabricated items. Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening

methods, jointing details, finishes, and accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to one foot.

2.Prepare in accordance with WIC "Manual of Millwork," Section 1 article entitled "Millwork Shop Drawings."

3.Submit shop drawing for work specified in this Section with related doors and visual display boards specified in Sections 06410, 08210, 10100, 11602 to permit simultaneous review.

C.Samples: 1.Paneling: 12-inch by 12-inch samples of specified finishes on wood, clearly showing

each coat. 2.Base: 12-inch long by full height samples indicating specified wood and finish. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Reference Standards: 1.West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB): "Standard Grading and Dressing

Rules No. 17". 2.Woodwork Institute of California (WIC): "Manual of Millwork" 1992 Edition with 1995

revisions. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store products suitably wrapped or packaged to protect against damage. B.Store products off the ground, protected from weather, dirt, and damage. C.Store products for indoor installation indoors, in temperature and humidity conditions

similar to those that will exist in the installation areas when the building is occupied.

D.Do not remove protective coverings until time of installation. E.Protect sheet materials from receiving broken corners and damaged surfaces while

unloading and when storing. F.Follow additional instructions of manufacturer.



1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Verify field measurements are as indicated on the shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD AND PLYWOOD A.General Requirements: 1.Material Grades: WIC Premium Grade unless otherwise noted. 2.Lumber and plywood shall be kiln-dried to equilibrium moisture content

suitable for fabrication in shop and suitable for use intended. B.Paneling: 1.Solid Maple Paneling: Northern White Maple veneer, quarter-sliced; flitches

pre-selected for uniform grade and color; AA Grade for transparent-stain finish.

a.Substrate: Type I plywood in accordance with HPVA HP-1, Premium Grade or particleboard.

2.Solid Cherry Paneling: Select Cherry, quarter-sliced, book-matched veneers, WIC Premium Grade for transparent finish.

a.Veneer Thickness: Minimum 0.036" thick. 3.Perforated Acoustical Paneling: Select Cherry to match veneer; perforations of 0.2-inch

diameter, staggered, and spaced to provide 19 percent open area with whole "hole" perforation at border; equivalent to Armstrong World Industries "Widotex by Woodworks".

a.Provide door with piano hinge as shown on Drawings. C.Base: To match adjacent panel veneers in color, veining and appearance in

accordance with WIC Premium Grade standards. D.Door Frames: 1.Wood: To match adjacent panel veneer; Premium Grade; comply with WIC Section 12.

Jambs shall be rabbeted. 2.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 45-pound density, with wood veneer to match curved door. E.Bookcases: Hardwood plywood, Northern White Maple veneer, AA Grade for

transparent finish; Type I plywood in accordance with HPVA HP-1, Premium Grade.

F.Mailboxes: Fabricate to profiles as shown of plastic laminate faced particle board or

fiberboard with acrylic dividers. 1.Plastic Laminate: Comply with requirements of NEMA publication LD3, 0.053-inch thick,

as manufactured by Formica, Nevamar, or Laminart with compensating backing sheet.

a.Color and pattern shall be as shown on Drawings.



2.Particle Board: ANSI A208.1, 45-pound density, formed flat panel consisting of wood particles bonded together with a synthetic phenolic resin and cured under heat and pressure or medium density fiberboard (MDF) complying with ANSI A208.2, formaldehyde-free.

2.02ANCILLARY MATERIALS A.Rough Hardware: Provide nails, screws, anchor bolts, machine bolts, expansion

sleeves, lag screws, powder driven fasteners, joist hangers, straps, and other framing anchors as indicated and as required.

1.Nails: Hot-dip galvanized steel. 2.Screws, Bolts, Washers: Hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153. 3.Washers shall be malleable iron. B.Adhesives: Federal Specification (FS) MMM-A-125C, Type II, water and mold resistant. C.Putty: Duratite "Wood Dough" or Boyle-Midway "Plastic Wood". D.Adjustable Pins: As required for installation of slate as specified in Section 04415. E.Acrylic Lense: Rohm and Haas Plexiglass; 1/4-inch frosted, light blue. 2.03 FABRICATION A.General: 1.Job measurements shall be made as required for the proper fabrication of the Work. 2.Mill and fabricate in as long pieces as practical. Machine all surfaces and ease exposed

edges unless otherwise noted. Finish and assemble at shop to greatest extent possible.

B.Paneling: Maple veneer plywood, Grade AA veneer, slip matched adjacent pieces,

balance matched panel face assembly, sequence matched in set, by flitches. 1.Back Veneer: Of thickness and grade to balance panel. 2.Edge Veneer: To match. 3.Finish: WIC System 2 (conversion varnish); transparent-stain finish, 5 coats.

Backfinishing shall be done in factory whenever possible. Backfinish shall be one coat, compatible with finish for clarity, sheen, and balancing.

C.Base: Solid stock Maple fabricated to WIC Section 10, Premium Grade requirements,

transparent finish to match paneling. 1.Miter corners; no finger-jointing permitted. 2.Height as shown on Drawings. D.Door Frames: Fabricate in compliance with WIC, Section 12, "Interior Jambs" for

Premium Grade. E.Bookcases: Fabricate according to WIC Section 15 Custom Grade.



1.Fabricate to comply with specified deflection criteria. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify dimensions and locations and be responsible for accurate fitting and

accommodation of other trades. B.Verify that surfaces and openings are ready to receive work and field measurements

are as shown on shop drawings. C.Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this Section are placed

and ready to receive this work. D.Do not commence installation until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Transparent-Stain Field Finish: Before finishing the exposed surface of all millwork, the

finishing contractor shall remove handling marks or effects of exposure to moisture with a thorough final sanding over all surfaces of the exposed portions, using at least 150 grit of finer sandpaper, and shall thoroughly clean all surfaces before applying finish.

3.03INSTALLATION A.Install materials in accordance with details as shown and WIC Section 26. B.Install plumb and level with tight joints and securely fasten. Do cutting and fitting

required for other trades. Blind nail where possible and use finish nails where exposed. Drill pilot holes for nails where necessary to preclude splitting wood. Ease edges and sand exposed surfaces of smooth wood.

C.Securely fasten materials to supporting substrate. D.Nailing: Hammer, tool marks, and marred surfaces and edges are not acceptable on

exposed surfaces. E.Remove and replace materials damaged beyond repair or stained beyond cleaning. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.After completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces, remove and refinish

damaged or soiled areas of finish, and adjust and repair damaged or defective work as directed.



B.Provide protection for installed work until final acceptance of Project by Owner. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Custom Casework 27720.00 06410-1

SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following shop fabricated millwork as shown and as specified. 1.Wood-veneered casework. 2.Wood-veneered benches. 3.Plastic-laminate faced casework. 4.Plastic-laminate faced countertops and splash. 5.Solid-surfacing countertops with bowl and splash. 6.Display case; bulletin board and glass. B.Installation of slate countertop. C.Related Sections: 1.Section 04415 - Slate. 2.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: countertop supports. 3.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 4.Section 08810 - Interior Glazing. 5.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing System: backing plates. 6.Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: resilient base. 7.Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories: pipe wrap. 8.Section 11452 - Residential Appliances: refrigerator. 9.Section 11602 - Laboratory Casework. 10.Division 15 - Mechanical: plumbing fixtures. 11.Division 16 - Electrical: power and communication. D.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."06410.A"=Wood veneered casework. 2."06410.B"=Wood veneered display case. 3."06410.C"=Wood veneered bench. 4."06410.D"=Plastic-laminate countertop and splash. 5."06410.E"=Solid-surfacing countertop and splash. 6."06410.F"=Plastic-laminate casework. 1.02 REFERENCES A.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1.LD3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. B.Woodwork Institute of California (WIC).



1.Manual - "Manual of Millwork", 1992 Edition with 1995 Revisions. 1.03SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: Casework shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with

the standards established in WIC Manual as follows: 1.Wood-Veneered Casework: Section 14, Premium Grade. 2.Plastic-Laminate Casework: Section 15, Custom Grade. 3.Plastic Laminated Countertops and Splash: Section 16, Custom Grade. 4.Solid Surfacing (Corian): Section 17E, Custom Grade. 5.Shelving shall be designed for 50-pound load in accordance with WIC Technical Bulletin

435. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly

methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, appliances and utilities to be incorporated into casework such as power and plumbing items, and schedule of finishes.

C.Samples: 1.Three 12-inch by 12-inch samples of specified finishes on wood, clearly showing each

coat. 2.Submit 6-inch x 6-inch samples of plastic laminate colors. 3.Submit 6-inch x 6-inch samples of solid-surfacing colors. 4.One of each unit of cabinet hardware proposed for use. D.Certificates: Prior to delivery to jobsite, furnish WIC Certified Compliance Certificate

certifying the shop drawings and products furnished for this Project meet the requirements of the grades specified.

1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Each unit of casework shall bear the WIC Certified Compliance Label indicating

compliance with the grade specified. B.Standard of Factory Finishing: Comply with WIC Manual, Section 25. C.Installation of casework shall comply with WIC Manual Section 26. 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Delivery: Do not deliver casework until the building is closed in, and all painting, finishing and overhead work is complete in the spaces to receive casework.

B.Storage: Store casework in the building, out of the way of other construction activities,

at a relative humidity of 50 percent to 55 percent at 70 degrees F. C.Handling: Handle casework with care so as not to damage surfaces or subject the

cases to stress. 1.07PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the shop

drawings. B.Coordination: Prior to submission of shop drawings, coordinate requirements of

equipment to be installed in casework such as sinks. 1.Identify any conflict between equipment and casework requirement on shop drawings. 2.Do not proceed with fabrication until conflicts have been resolved. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Materials shall be per WIC standards for grades specified. B.Hardwood Plywood: Hardwood plywood, Northern White Maple veneer, plain-sliced,

adjacent veneers slip-matched; AA Grade for transparent finish; Type I plywood in accordance with HPVA HP-1, Premium Grade.

C.Laminated-Plastic Sheets (Scheduled PLAM): Comply with requirements of NEMA

publication LD3 as manufactured by Formica, Nevamar, or Laminart with compensating backing sheet.

1.Tops and Back Splashes: General-purpose type, 0.050 inch thick nominal; postforming type, 0.043 inch thick nominal.

2.Surface Finish and Texture: As scheduled on the Drawings. D.Plastic Laminate Subsurface: Medium density fiberboard (MDF), formaldehyde free,

complying with ANSI A208.2 as manufactured by Medite II. E.Hardboard: Masonite, tempered, 1/4 inch thick, smooth both sides. F.Slate: As specified in Section 04415. G.Solid Surfacing: Corian as manufactured by E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co., or Avonite,

countertop with integral bowl. 1.Countertop: 3/4-inch thick, full bullnose shape at counter edge as shown.



2.Splash: 1/2-inch thick. 3.Color: As scheduled on Drawings. H.Cork: Color white. I.Adhesive: Phenol, resorcinol, or melamine base, FS MMM-A-181D; type, grade, and

class best suited for the intended use. J.Cabinet Hardware: In accordance with WIC Supplement No. 1 to Section 15 and as

follows: 1.Hinges: Concealed type (European Style), 120 degrees opening minimum; Blum or

Hafele. 2.Casework Door and Drawer Pulls: Engineered Products Co. (EPCO) No.

MC-4024 DC. 3.Glass Door Pulls: As selected by Architect. 4.Drawer Slides: 150-pound load, full extension. 5.Cabinet Locks: Provide on cabinets as shown. 6.Sliding Glass Door Hardware: To be selected. 7.Shelves and Brackets: Stainless steel, as selected by Architect. 8.Finish: US26D, dull chrome. K.Glass: Tempered as specified in Section 08810. L.Backing Plates: As specified in Section 09110. M.Fasteners: As shown or as required for secure installation. 2.03 FABRICATION A.General: Make job measurements as required for proper fabrication of the Work. B.Casework Design: WIC Construction Type I or Type II, Style A Frameless (flush over-

lay). 1.Door and Drawer Front Style: WIC Style A. C.Wood Veneer Casework: Fabricate in accordance with WIC Section 14, Premium

Grade. 1.Veneer Plywood: 3/4-inch Maple plywood, Grade AA veneer, slip matched adjacent

pieces. a.Back Veneer: Of thickness and grade to balance panel. b.Edge Veneer: To match. 2.Semi-Exposed Solid Lumber or Lumber Visible when Casework is Open: Same as

exposed. 3.Concealed Solid Lumber: Any species containing no defects which materially affect

strength or utility of piece. 4.Finishing: Transparent finish as specified below.



D.Display Case: Fabricate of Maple framework and tempered glass with cork adhered to back panel.

1.Maple shall be Grade AA veneer with slip matched adjacent pieces. 2.Provide with lock. E.Wood Veneered Bench: Fabricate to profiles shown. F.Plastic-Lamiante Casework Design: WIC Construction Type I or Type II, Style A

Frameless (flush overlay), Custom Grade. 1.Typical: Securely bond laminated plastic to the particle board or MDF; total finished

thickness 3/4 inch minimum. 2.Door and Drawer Front Style: WIC Style A. 3.Do not miter corners of laminated plastic. 4.Make corners self-edged and beveled. 5.Construction shall conform to joinery requirements of WIC Manual. 6.Closure panels as shown. 7.Line cabinet interiors and drawers with plastic laminate. G.Laminated Plastic Countertops and Splash: Fabricate in accordance with requirements

of WIC Sections 15 and 16, Custom Grade. 1.3/4 inch thick MDF typical with high pressure plastic laminate per WIC Section

16. 2.Backsplash: Sheet of plastic laminate over 3/4-inch x 4-inch MDF backsplash. 3.Construction shall conform to joinery requirements of WIC Manual. 4.Edge Design: As detailed on the Drawings. 5.Provide cove back splash. H.Slate Countertop: 1.Conform to fabrication requirements specified in Section 04415. 2.Fabricate to profiles as shown. 3.Provide front edges of tops as shown. 4.Provide plywood and cementitious substrate for limestone as shown on drawings and as

required. I.Solid Surfacing Countertops, Splash, and Bowl: Fabricate in accordance with WIC

Custom Grade requirements of WIC Section 17E, "Decorative Synthetic Marble Countertops and Sinks," Custom Grade.

1.Round front edges of tops as shown. J.Install hardware and adjust for proper alignment and operation. 2.04FINISHING A.Preparation: Before finishing the exposed surface of all millwork, remove handling

marks or effects of exposure to moisture with a thorough final sanding over all surfaces of the exposed portions, using at least 150 grit of finer sandpaper, and shall thoroughly clean all surfaces before applying sealer and finish.



B.Transparent Finishes: WIC System 2 (conversion varnish); transparent-stain finish, 5

coats. Backfinishing shall be done in factory whenever possible. Backfinish shall be one coat, compatible with finish for clarity, sheen, and balancing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B.Do not commence installation until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Remove casework from its crates or protective wrappings as near the site of

installation as possible. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Install casework plumb and level. 1.Shim as necessary with concealed shims. 2.Accurately scribe and closely fit faceplates, filler strips, and trim strips to irregularities of

adjacent surfaces. a.Maximum Allowable Gap: 1/16 inch. 3.Install casework tops so that they will lie in one plane, without gaps between tops and

casework. B.Secure casework to structural backing with fasteners adequate to resist both gravity

loads and seismic forces. C.Except those made in the shop, make all required holes and cutouts in casework as

required for pipes, conduits, and other penetrations, or inserts provided as part of the work of other Sections.

1.Make provisions for access to plumbing valves and cleanouts, and connection of electrical work.

3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Damaged, stained, scratched, or otherwise disfigured portions of the Work shall be

touched up, refinished, or replaced to satisfaction of the Architect. B.After installation, wipe finished surfaces to remove marks of handling, and leave in

clean condition.



C.Protect casework against damage until the Work is accepted. END OF SECTION

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences Issued for Addendum No. 1 California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, CA December 1, 2000

SMP/SHG-PCF&P Blind Side Waterproofing 27720.00 07132-1

SECTION 07132 (NEW SECTION) BLIND SIDE WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes providing blind side sheet membrane waterproofing system

on shoring as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03360 - Shotcrete. 2.Section 07140 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: vertical installation below grade. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07132.A"=Waterproofing. 2."07132.B"=Drainage board. 3."07132.C"=Base drain. 4."07132.D"=Protection board. 5."07132.E"=Liquid membrane. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Submit copies of specifications, installation instructions, and general recom-

mendations by manufacturer of waterproofing materials. C.Certification that applicator is acceptable to materials manufacturer. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator's Qualifications: Applicator shall specialize in installation of specified

products and shall be acceptable to manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver products to site with manufacturer's packaging intact. B.Store products in such a manner as to protect them from damage. C.Protect materials from moisture. D.Promptly remove from site any materials which show evidence of damage,



deterioration, or contamination. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Prior to construction, the system manufacturer shall review and approve joint

layouts, methods of providing joints, concrete finishing and curing methods, and related details.

B.Prior to application, applicator shall make site inspection to review and approve

related conditions affecting performance requirements of the specified system.

1.06WARRANTY A.The system manufacturer shall furnish a written single-source performance

warranty that the installed systems will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for a 5-year period from the date of Substantial Completion. The following problems shall be specifically covered under the warranty:

1.Cohesive or adhesive failure of the system. 2.Weathering deficiencies resulting in failure of the system. 3.Abrasion or tear failure of the system resulting from normal use. B.The system overlap with fluid-applied system specified in Section 07140 shall be

warranted by manufacturer of fluid-applied system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Membrane: W.R. Grace and Co. "Bituthene Preprufe 160 (vertical) System"

rubberized asphalt type. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Membrane: Rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to high-density poly-

ethylene (HDPE) sheeting with white protective coating. 160 System 1.Thickness: 1.07 mm 2.Tensile Strength per ASTM D882:4,000 psi 3.Puncture Resistance per ASTM E154:100 lbs minimum 4.Hydrostatic Head Resis. per ASTM D5385:231 feet minimum



B.Liquid Membrane: W.R. Grace "Bituthene Liquid Membrane" 2-component elastomeric cold-applied trowel-grade material.

C.Joint Sealer: 6-inch wide, self-adhering tape, as recommended by manufactur-

er of waterproofing material. D.Mastic: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. E.Drainage Board: Cetco "Volclay Aquadrain 15XP" board consisting of

3-dimensional high-impact polymeric core and a geotextile filter fabric F.Base Drain: Cetco "Volclay Aquadrain 100 BD" high-flow strip drainage

composite consisting of 3-dimensional high-impact polymeric core wrapped with heavy 6-oz. non-woven polypropylene filter fabric. 1-inch by 12 inches high, equal to 4-inch diameter pipe in other areas.

G.Protection Board: W.R. Grace "Asphaltic Hardboard", W.R. Meadows, Inc. "PC-2

Protection Course"; 1/4-inch semi-rigid board. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces are free of dirt and debris, loose materials, sharp

protrusions, and voids or interruptions which would affect installation. B.Verify that junction of horizontal and vertical surfaces is a clearly defined sharp

right angle. C.Check that pipes, vents, drains, and other penetrations of surface are covered to

prevent entry of waterproofing material. D.Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.02PREPARATION OF SURFACES A.Follow recommendations of membrane manufacturer. B.Reinforce external corners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03APPLICATION A.General: Install waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, recommendations, and specific project application instructions which are applicable to the Work.



1.Manufacturer's representative shall inspect installation at intervals as required during the course of the work of this Section.

B.Install base drain and drainage board against soil in locations as shown on

Drawings. 1.Install drainage board in 2'-0" wide strips at 7'-6" on center. C.Install shotcrete shoring as recommended by Contractor's shoring documents. D.Verify shotcrete shoring has a smooth, rod finish with no protrusions or pockets. E.Apply waterproofing membrane with HDPE side facing the shoring substrate. 1.Apply succeeding sheets by overlapping previous sheets 3 inches along the

self-adhesive edge of membrane. 2.Roll the side lap to assure a tight seal. F.Terminate membrane at top edge by overlapping blind-side waterproofing with the

fluid-applied waterproofing specified in Section 07140. G.Apply liquid membrane over soil nail as shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences 50% Issued for Construction California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, CA September 29, 2000

SMP/SHG-PCF&P Exterior Wall Waterproofing 27720.00 07135-1

SECTION 07135 EXTERIOR WALL WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide sheet membrane to stop the passage of air and vapor through exterior walls as

shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 07640 - Aluminum Siding. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07135.A"=Sheet membrane. 2."07135.B"=Membrane flashing. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product literature on materials proposed for use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Sheet Membrane: Silicone sheet as manufactured by Dow Corning "123" or GE

Silicones "Ultraspan". 2.02ACCESSORIES A.As required for installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Check that areas to membrane are clean and dry and that substrate surface is

acceptable for the successful installation of the work of this Section. B.Do not commence installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences 50% Issued for Construction California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, CA September 29, 2000

SMP/SHG-PCF&P Exterior Wall Waterproofing 27720.00 07135-2

3.02PREPARATION A.Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials. B.Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive membrane in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install membrane materials in conjunction with materials described in other sections to

provide continuous sealed barrier in the exterior enclosure of the building. C.Apply membrane within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult

manufacturer if temperature is out of this range. END OF SECTION

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences Issued For Addendum No. 1 California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, CA December 1, 2000

SMP/SHG-PCF&P Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 27720.00 07140-1

SECTION 07140 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide complete elastomeric waterproofing system and associated flashing as shown

on the Drawings and as specified for the following: 1.Type 1: Horizontal surfaces with drainage course, pavers and flashing at bridge and

above magnet. 2.Type 2: Vertical surfaces with protection board below grade. 3.Type 3: Horizontal and vertical surfaces at planter. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 02300 - Earthwork. 2.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: finish and water-curing. 3.Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal: guardrails. 4.Section 05800 - Seismic Joint Assemblies. 5.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 6.Division 15 - Mechanical: drains. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07140.A"=Fluid-appplied waterproofing. 2."07140.B"=Protection board/drainage board. 3."07140.C"=Horizontal composite drainage mat. 4."07140.D"=Pavers. 5."07140.E"=Drainage course. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Submit the following: 1.Copies of specifications and installation instructions. 2.Details drawn specifically to show each waterproofing condition on this Project cross

referenced to Drawings. 3.General recommendations by manufacturer of waterproofing materials. C.Certification: 1.Prior to commencement of installation submit the following; a.Certification from manufacturer of waterproofing materials that applicator complies with

qualification requirements specified.



b.Written statement by manufacturer's representative accepting the proposed use of waterproofing materials and methods as specified under Jobsite meeting.

2.Prior to Delivery of Materials: Certification that materials and components proposed for use conform to requirements shown and specified.

3.Prior to Acceptance of the Work: Certification stating that materials and workmanship have been provided in conformance with Contract Documents and material manufacturer's requirements.

1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator's Qualifications: Applicator shall be acceptable to manufacturer of

waterproofing materials. B.Elastomeric waterproofing system shall be the product of manufacturer who shall have

been regularly engaged in the manufacture of the material for at least 5 years and can provide references of five comparable installations in which the proposed materials have given satisfactory service for at least 5 years.

C.Regulatory Requirement: Comply with South Coast Air Quality Control Management

District (SCAQMD) Rule 113, for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's). D.Testing: Flood testing of horizontal applications. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials in their original sealed containers, clearly marked with the brand and

manufacturer's name, and store under cover in a dry, protected place. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Concrete substrate shall have cured a sufficient length of time in accordance with the

membrane manufacturer's recommendations. B.Environmental Requirements: Waterproofing shall not be installed in standing water or

during fog or precipitation. C.Coordination Meeting: 1.Contractor shall arrange a coordination meeting, to be attended by installers and material

manufacturers' representative involved in work specified herein and in related Sections to review any details in question, and prepare written step-by-step application procedure, including a

written detailed statement of Work and shop drawings for a complete waterproofing

system. a.Following the coordination meeting, provide a written statement with date of meeting,

names and affiliations of participants.



b.Provide written list of any modifications of Contract Documents proposed in the step-by-step application procedure. Such modifications shall be done at no increase in Contract Sum.

c.Work of this Section shall not proceed until Architect has reviewed and accepted the documents to be provided following the coordination meeting.

2.Jobsite Meeting: Prior to starting Work, arrange a jobsite meeting with Architect and participants in the coordination meeting to discuss Contract Documents, review step-by-step application procedure, shop

drawings, job and surface readiness, and material storage and protection. 3.Notify Architect 2 calendar days prior to jobsite meeting, starting Work and, if Work is

done intermittently, before restarting Work. 1.06WARRANTY A.The system manufacturer shall furnish a written single-source performance warranty that

the installed systems will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency and shall remain watertight for a 10-year period from the date of Substantial Completion.

1.Owner shall provide access to membrane on vertical system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Type 1, Horizontal: American Hydrotech "System 6125" or Pennkote "Hotmelt System"

rubberized asphalt waterproofing membrane system; 215 mils thick membrane. 1.Primer/Expansion Filler/Sealer: As recommended by waterproofing system

manufacturer. 2.Flashing: Flex Flash UN, .060-inch thick uncured neoprene. 3.Fabric Reinforcing: American Hydrotech "Flex-Flash F Reinforcement" or approved

equal. 4.Metal Termination Bar: Stainless steel with stainless steel fasteners. 5.Separation Sheet/Protection Course: Fiberglass reinforced rubberized asphalt sheet;

American Hydrotech, Inc. "Hydroflex 30". 6.Prefabricated Drainage Sheet: American Hydrotech, Inc. "Hydrodrain". 7.Pavers: Precast concrete formed on bottom with ribs or buttons 1/4-inch high;

Hydrotech "Ballast Terra Pavers", Hanover "Ventloc", Stepstone "Ballastones" or Wausau Tile "Precast Concrete Pavers".

a.Size: 24 inches x 24 inches x 2 inches. 8.Drain Rock: 1-1/2-inch to 2-inch round gravel. B.Type 2, Vertical: American Hydrotech "6125 System" or Pennkote "Hotmelt System"

rubberized asphalt waterproofing membrane system; approximately 215 mils thick.

1.Primer/Expansion Filler/Sealer: As recommended by waterproofing system manufacturer.



2.Reinforcing: American Hydrotech "Flex-Flash". 3.Protection Board/Drainage Board: TClear "Thermadry" or Dow Styrofoam and MiriDrain

3000 Drainage Panel. American Hydrotech "ThermaFlo" board consisting of Styrofoam insulation with closely spaced vertical and horizontal channels with polymeric filtration fabric covering.

a.Compressive Strength: As recommended by manufacturer for specific condition. C.Type 3, Vertical and Horizontal at Planters: American Hydrotech "6125 System" or

Pennkote "Hotmelt System" rubberized asphalt waterproofing membrane system; approximately 180 mils thick.

PART 3 EXAMINATION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces to receive waterproofing are free of dirt and debris. B.Verify that projections through substrate have been installed and substrate is properly

patched and sealed to receive waterproofing. C.Manufacturer's representative shall inspect and accept substrate prior to application of

system. D.Do not commence installation until conditions are satisfactory. E.Start of installation of membrane system shall be in presence of manufacturer's

representative. 3.02PREPARATION A. Follow material manufacturer's recommendations. B.Condition of Surface: Surfaces to receive waterproofing shall be free of defects or

conditions that will interfere with, or prevent, a satisfactory installation of waterproofing.

1.Holes, honeycombs, and cavities shall be pointed or filled and finished flush utilizing

materials recommended by manufacturer of membrane waterproofing. 2.High spots, bumps, and projections shall be cut off and ground smooth. C.Contaminants: 1.Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be free of water, dew, frost, dust, dirt, oil,

grease, concrete curing compounds, laitance, previously applied waterproofing materials, and other foreign matter. If surface finish of concrete is not acceptable or if cleaning method used by Contractor is not satisfactory, then Contractor shall treat concrete substrate by sand blasting



to remove laitance, concrete curing compounds, and other contaminants. 2.Dirt and dust shall be removed with an air compressor or industrial type vacuum cleaner

or methods approved by waterproofing material manufacturer. 3.Clean exposed metal surfaces of paint, oils, rust and other contaminants and prime. D.Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers as recommended by materials

manufacturer with particular attention at construction joints. E.Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive fluid-applied waterproofing to effectively

prevent spillage or overspray of liquid materials outside membrane area. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Horizontal Membrane Application: In accordance with manufacturer's printed instruc-

tions and as follows. 1.Apply surface conditioner. 2.Horizontal: Apply membrane to 90 mils thickness, set in reinforcing fabric (spunbound

polyester) in all horizontal surfaces,, immediately apply an additional layer of 125 mils; membrane to total average dry film thickness of 215 mils. Install separate protection sheet immediately while membrane is still hot.

3.Install flashings and joint covers where recommended by waterproofing material manufacturer. Except as otherwise indicated, extend flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate to not less than 4 inches beyond finished surface to be applied over waterproofing.

4.Transitions: At inside corners, outside corners, and other changes of plane, apply membrane, 125 mils thick at transition area. Center and embed a 6-inch wide strip of reinforcing over the transition point.

5.Termination Bar: Provide termination bars where waterproofing terminates on vertical surfaces.

6.Suspended Slab: a.Apply prefabricated drainage sheet on horizontal membrane. b.Apply pavers on pedestals in pattern as indicated on drawings. 7.Roof Drain: a.Flash drain with uncured neoprene sheet. b.Apply membrane and protection board. c.Cover membrane with drain rock. B.Vertical Membrane Application: 1.Treat construction joints, control joints and cracks greater than 1/16-inch with coat of

membrane extending 6 inches beyond either side of the joint or crack into which is centered a 6-inch strip of reinforcing; top coat with membrane.

2.Apply membrane and reinforcement by trowel, spray or roller to achieve thickness of approximately 215 mils.

3.Allow hot membrane to partially cool prior to embedment of insulating drainage board/protection board.

C.Vertical and Horizontal at Planters:



1.Apply membrane to total average dry film thickness of 180 mil, with no variation below 150 mils.

2.Transitions: At inside corners, outside corners, and other changes of plane, apply membrane, 125 mils thick at transition area. Center and embed a 6-inch wide strip of reinforcing over the transition point.

3.Install protection board as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3.03FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Horizontal Membrane: Before completed membrane on horizontal surfaces are covered

by protection course or other work, plug drains and water test by ponding water a minimum depth of 2 inches for a period of 24 hours.

B.If leaks occur, repair membrane and repeat water test until no leakage is observed. C.Keep a written log of all observations. Note observed leaks on Drawings. 3.04CLEANING A.As Work progresses, remove spilled and splattered materials immediately. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Crystalline Waterproofing 27720.00 07165-1

SECTION 07165 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide crystalline waterproofing to interior walls of below grade elevator pits, utility

pits, and trenches as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: form release agents. 2.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: finishes. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07165.A"=Crystalline waterproofing. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Submit copies of specifications, installation instructions, and general recom-

mendations by manufacturer of waterproofing materials. C.Certification that applicator is acceptable to materials manufacturer. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator's Qualifications: Applicator shall be acceptable to manufacturer of

waterproofing materials. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials in their original sealed containers, clearly marked with the brand

and manufacturer's name, and store under cover in a dry, protected place. B.Maintain storage temperature between limits recommended by manufacturer. Do not

store in temperatures below 45 degrees F. C.Do not use materials which have been stored longer than 1 year. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 MATERIALS A.Crystalline Waterproofing: Xypex "Xypex Concentrate", Koester "NBI System", or

Vandex. B.Filler and Sealer: As recommended by waterproofing system manufacturer. PART 3 EXAMINATION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Check that surfaces to receive waterproofing are free of dirt and debris. B.Verify that projections through substrate have been installed and substrate is

properly patched and conditions are satisfactory for bonding the waterproofing. C.Do not commence installation until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Follow material manufacturer's recommendations. B.Cracks, joints, and holes in existing concrete shall be filled and sealed. C.Spray water on concrete to soak thoroughly prior to application. Surfaces shall be moist

but not wet when waterproofing is applied. 3.03MIXING A.Mix powder with water in accordance with manufacturer's mixing instructions, using

mechanical mixer. B.Use separate containers to measure the powder and water. C.Prepare only as much mixture as can be applied in 10 minutes. 3.04 INSTALLATION A.General: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.Install in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. 2.Allow sufficient cure time between coats. B.Sealing Strip: Apply slurry coat and dry-pack fill. C.Membrane Application: Apply concentrated slurry coat to walls and floors followed by



modified coat applied while first coat is "green". D.Cure in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.Dampen treated surface with fog-spray mist as soon as material has hardened

sufficiently so as not to be damaged or dislodged. 2.Repeat three times for 2 to 3 days. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Traffic Coatings 27720.00 07180-1

SECTION 07180 TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes providing waterproof membrane and rubber cement traffic surfaced

deck covering system as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.Section 03450 - Architectural Precast Concrete. 3.Section 05800 - Seismic Joint Assembly. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07180.A" = Waterproof elastomeric membrane. 2."07180.B" = Traffic elastomeric surface. 3."07180.C" = Cement board. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's recommended installation details, step-by-step

installation procedures, and maintenance procedures. C.Samples: Submit samples of selected finish. D.Certification: Certify that materials meet the design criteria specified. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer's Qualifications: Manufacturer-trained having had a minimum of 5 years'

experience with these products. B.Slip-Resistance: In accordance with ADA recommendations, walking surfaces shall

have a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.6. C.Take all necessary precautions and provide protection as required when using products

which produce offensive odors and physically irritating pollutants.



1.04PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.In accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Deck Covering System: Dex-O-Tex "Weatherwear with Neobond Membrane" as

manufactured by Crossfield Products Corporation. 1.Membrane: Neoprene rubber emulsion waterproofing with the following properties: a.Waterproofness: Resistance to passage when subjected to 27.7" head of water for one

month. No passage of water. b.Elongation: 320% per ASTM D751. c.Tensile Strength: 161 psi per ASTM D751. d.Adhesion to Peel to Concrete: 16.6 pounds per inch width. e.Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.175 perm inches per ASTM E86. f.Crack Bridging: 1/8" crack at 77 degrees F, no rupture, per ASTM E836. 2.Deck (Traffic) Surfacing: Waterproof, multi-layered rubber-cement troweled surfacing

with the following properties: a.Rated Class A per ASTM E108, Test Method C. b.Accelerated Aging: No chalking, crazing, cracking, blistering, or delamination per ASTM

D756. c.Water Absorption: 6.09%; no warping, cracking, crazing under 5X magnification per

ASTM D570. d.Minimum Total Thickness of Deck Covering System: 3/16 inch. e.Color Coat: To match precast concrete as specified in Section 03450. B.Underlayment: Dex-O-Tex J26. C.Cement Board: USG "Durock". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that other trades have completed penetrations of substrate before beginning

installation. B.Verify that substrate is clean, smooth, and within tolerances acceptable to system

manufacturer. C.Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION



A.Mixing, Application, and Finishing: In strict accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions. Finish to smooth, even textured finish. B.Install underlayment over cement board substrate. C.Membrane: Install waterproof membrane to 25 mil dry film thickness. D.Deck Surfacing: 1.Apply elastomeric rubber composition membrane with fabric reinforcement. 2.Apply integral flashing of similar construction. 3.Apply 2 trowel coats of liquid rubber and aggregate composition traffic surfacing over

entire deck. Sand to remove trowel ridges. 4.Apply 2 grout smoothing coats of rubber-cement composition to smooth surface. 5.Roller apply 2 coats of surface dressing to achieve uniform surface. 3.03CLEANING A.Leave areas in an acceptable condition, free from any defects or debris. 3.04PROTECTION A.Keep traffic and mechanics of other trades off the coatings until they have reached final

cure. END OF SECTION

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences Issued for Addendum No. 1 California Institute of Technology, Pasadena CA December 1, 2000

SMP/SHG - PCF&P Building Insulation 27720.00 07210-1

SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide thermal insulation as shown and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 07530 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 07550 - Modified

Bituminous Roofing: rigid insulation integral with roofing. 2.Section 07840 - Firestopping: safing insulation integral with firestopping system. 3.Section 09820 - Acoustical Insulation and Sealant. 4.Division 15 - Mechanical: pipe and duct Insulation. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07210.A"=Batt insulation. 2."07210.B"=Semi-rigid insulation. 3."07210.C"=Rigid insulation. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each

type of insulation required. C.Certificates: Certification that products proposed for use comply with criteria specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirement: 1.Insulation shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with California

standards for insulating materials. 2.Insulating materials shall be installed in compliance with Flame Spread Rating

and Smoke Density requirements of Uniform Building Code (UBC) Sections 707 and 2602.

B.Fiberglass Batt Insulation: Manufactured from minimum 10 percent post-consumer

(recycled) glass. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturers' original packaging. B.Clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable standard, and

R-value. C.Store materials off ground, protected against weather, condensation, and damage. D.Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection

during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Batt Insulation: Nominal 6-inch-thick, foil-faced, mineral-fiber or glass-fiber thermal

batt, R-19, flame spread 25, conforming to ASTM C665. B.Semi-Rigid Thermal Insulation: Owens Corning Fiberglas "Curtainwall

Insulation/CW255FRK" or USG Interiors "Curtainwall Insulation", semi-rigid, 2.25 pcf density, 3 inch-thick, nominal R-13, foil-reinforced-kraft vapor retarder faced, flame spread 25, conforming to ASTM C612.

C.Rigid Insulation: Dow "Styrofoam" or Owens Corning Fiberglass "Foamular 600"

with the following properties: 1.Extruded polystyrene, ASTM C578, Type V; R-5 per inch of foam in accordance with

ASTM C518. 2.Edges: Square and tongle and groove. 3.Compressive Strength: 25 pounds/square inch (psi). 4.Water Absorption: Less than 0.1 per ASTM D2842. 5.Permeability: 0.8 per ASTM E96. C.Accessories: Fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for

attachment to metal studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION



A.Examine areas scheduled to receive insulation to ensure protection against inclement weather and other hazards and to verify that work of preceding trades is completed.

B.Examine space allocated for insulation for proper depth to receive material. C.Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory. D.Prior to closing walls, obtain Architect's acceptance of insulation installation. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise noted. B.Install batt insulation in stud spaces of all perimeter walls to exterior, except

unheated spaces, and install in common wall between heated and unheated spaces.

1.Install with foil facing to building interior. C.Install semi-rigid insulation at curtainwalls where indicated on Drawings. D.Install rigid insulation in locations shown on Drawings. E.Maintain integrity of insulation over entire area to form a continuous

thermal-insulating shell around the heated spaces. F.Fit batt insulation snugly between framing members and around piping, wiring, and

other obstructions. G.Fill spaces completely with insulation. 3.03DEFECTIVE WORK A.Remove insulation which has gotten wet, or in areas deemed defective by the Architect,

and replace with new material. B.Restore to original condition work of other sections damaged in repair or replacement of

defective work. C.Remove or replace work damaged by weather. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Vapor Retarder 27720.00 07260-1

SECTION 07260 VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide vapor retarder barrier under slabs on grade as shown and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 02300 - Earthwork. 2.Section 03200 - Reinforcing Steel. 3.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07260.A"=Vapor retarder. 2."07260.B"=Sand 3."07260.C"=Capillary break. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product literature on materials proposed for use. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Reference Standards: 1.Vapor Retarder: Comply with ASTM E1745. 2.Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643. 1.04PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store packaged material in original containers with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use. Each container shall be identified with material name, date of manufacture and lot number.

1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Surfaces to receive vapor retarder shall be enclosed with watertight roof or other method

of protection from moisture.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Vapor Retarder: Puncture resistant vapor barrier sheet material and specifically

manufactured for below-grade use as a moisture and vapor barrier with maximum perm rating of 0.021 when tested in accordance with ASTM E96.

1.Manufacturers: Griffolyn "Type 105", W.R. Meadows Sealtight "Premoulded Membrane with Plasmatic Core", or Stego Industries "Stego Wrap".

2.System shall include fabricated boots and accessory material. 3.The material shall be a lamination of semi-flexible or flexible core materials with mat

reinforcing and cover sheets. B.Tape and Adhesive: As recommended by sheet manufacturer. C.Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. D.Sand Protection Coarse: Sand, free of drainable water. E.Capillary Break: Gravel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Check that areas to receive vapor retarders are clean and dry. B.Check that pipes, vents, drains, and other penetrations of the membrane are

completed. C.Where nails, screws, or other penetrations exist, apply heavy beads of calking

compound or manufacturer's pressure-sensitive tape. D.Do not commence installation of vapor retarder until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Installation shall be in accordance with reference standards. 1.Install vapor retarder over crushed stone capillary break. 2.Lap seams 6-inches minimum and seal with continuous tape or adhesive. 3.Turn onto foundation walls, lap face of wall at least 6-inches. 4.Seal to pipes and other permanent penetrations and seal punctures with tape. 5.Seal around screed supports or other temporary penetrations with 1-1/2-inch fillet of

plastic cement. 6.Install sand protection course prior to installation of reinforcement as specified in Section



03200. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Vapor Control Membrane 27720.00 07265-1

SECTION 07265 VAPOR CONTROL MEMBRANE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide positive side vapor control membrane system at tile flooring, wood flooring,

stone flooring, resilient flooring, or at carpet where required by results of Moisture Vapor Emission Tests.

B.Related Sections: 1.Section 09300 - Tile. 2.Section 09400 - Terrazzo. 3.Section 09635 - Stone Flooring. 4.Section 09640 - Wood Flooring. 5.Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring. 6.Section 09680 - Carpet. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07265.A"=Vapor control membrane. 1.02PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A.Product shall prevent negative-side moisture migration through the concrete and shall

allow all types of surface treatment systems to bond properly to the substrate. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: 1.Manufacturer's literature describing materials and specifications for mixing and placing. 2.Performance History: Manufacturer shall provide 5 projects references that have been

completed for a minimum of 5 years. Project references to include project name, vapor emission levels, and contractors.

C.Certificates: From floor covering manufacturers stating, in writing, that membrane is

acceptable substrate for their materials. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE



A.Installer: Trained, certified, and monitored full time for duration of installation by membrane manufacturer.

B.Manufacturer: Provide job history depicting installation experience and jobs completed

with 5 years experience in producing moisture vapor control products. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use. 1.06WARRANTY A.Furnish warranty for floor covering system against delamination due to concrete

vapor emission and/or alkalinity for a period of 10 years. 1.Warranty shall cover labor and materials necessary to repair or replace the floor covering

system if repair cannot be made. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Vapor Control Membrane: Koster "VAP 1", Floor Seal Technology, Inc.'s "Fiberseal" or

accepted equal topical water-based vapor emission membrane system. B.Floor Leveling Compound: Ardex or equal; cement-based product. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Slab-Moisture Content Testing: Perform tests to determine the subsurface

moisture content of the concrete slab. Perform 3 tests in areas up to 1,000 square feet and 1 additional test for each additional 1,000 square feet thereafter. The method of testing shall be the following:

1.Test for moisture per ASTM F1869 testing standard. Emission of moisture vapor shall not be more than recommended by manufacturer of finish flooring.

B.Floor Leveling Compound (If Required): Ardex or accepted equal; cement-based prod-

uct. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Preparation: Grind down high spots and protrusions; clean concrete of debris and dust;



and fill cracks, cavities, and low spots with a cement-based compound. Gypsum-based underlayment and filler materials not permitted.

B.Concrete Surface: Machine sand with open grit sandpaper or shot- or bead-blast to

scarify surface. C.Protection: Mask and protect walls, equipment and doors to prevent damage from

concrete surface preparation and installation of membrane system. 3.03INSTALLATION A.General: Provide for concrete slab to receive flooring if required by moisture test. B.Primer: Apply per manufacturer's recommendations. C.Membrane: Apply, finish, and cure components as recommended by manufacturer. D.Apply floor leveling compound to facilitate the installation of floor coverings. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Metal Roofing 27720.00 07411-1

SECTION 07411 METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide manufactured standing-seam steel roof assembly as indicated on the Drawings

and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05300 - Metal Decking. 2.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07411.A"=Metal roofing. 2."07411.B"=Underlayment. 3."07411.C"=Cleats. 4."07411.D"=Insulation. 5."07411.E"=Flashing. 6."07411.F"=Exterior cement board. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: 1.The Drawings are diagrammatic. They show the shape of panels, and location of visible

joints only. Provide necessary blocking, backing, girts, clips, and ex-pansion joints necessary to provide serviceable, permanent, watertight manufactured metal panel system.

2.Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with UBC 1614 Exposure B.

3.Size sealant joint appropriate for the type of sealant and thermal movement of panels. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Show full size details. C.Samples: Submit two full-width sections, 6 inches long, with specified finish for the

following: 1. Typical panel.



1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator shall have at least 2 years experience applying these types of materials with

successful completion of projects of similar scope. B.Design Requirements: UL90 rated system. 1.04PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Do not allow finish of panels to be damaged during delivery, storage, or handling.

Replace dented panels. 1.05WARRANTY A.Furnish a written warranty against defects in material and workmanship affecting

weathertightness for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion, and a written warranty against defects in material and workmanship affecting finish including without limitation, peeling or fading of finish for a period of 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFING SYSTEM A.Embossed stainless steel panels matching wall panels in Section 07416. 1.Design: 1-inch high, double-lock standing seam for concealed attachment. Width of

panels to be determined. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Stainless Steel: ASTM A240, Type 304 sheet, minimum .015-inch thickness. B.Cleats: 2-inch wide, folded, preformed and prepunched. Provide expansion cleats at

panels in excess of 30 feet. C.Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated felt paper. D.Insulation: Rigid, polystyrene board; 2-inch thick. E.Exterior Cement Board: USG "Durock". F.Flashing and Trim: Fabricated of same material, gage, and finish as adjacent panels. G.Fasteners: Minimum 7/8-inch Series 300 stainless steel screw type fastener. 2.03FABRICATION



A.Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B.Fabricate concealed cleats, angles, channels, etc., from specified sheet metal. C.Provide and fabricate exposed associated flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and

miscellaneous sheet metalwork to match roofing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Prior to installation of material, inspect surfaces to receive panels to see that they are

free of irregularities, dirt, debris, and liquids. B.Inspect panels for face imperfections and edge damage. C.Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory. 2.03INSTALLATION A.Install materials in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's printed

instructions for a completely weathertight and permanent installation. B.Install felt underlayment in shingle-weatherlap fashion; lap joints minimum 2 inches. C.Panels shall be cleaned and dry at time of installation. D.Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous coating compound. E.Anchor cleats rigidly to substrate at 12-inch centers (2 fasteners per cleat) to prevent

rotation or misalignment. F.Attach panels to cleats. Surfaces and seams shall be without waves, warps, buckles,

fastening stresses, or distortion, allowing fully for expansion and contraction. 3.02ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Clean installation in accordance with panel manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Sheet Metal Roofing 27720.00 07412-1

SECTION 07412 (NEW SECTION) SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide manufactured standing-seam steel roof assembly as indicated on the

Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05300 - Metal Decking. 2.Section 07411 - Metal Roofing: cement board. 3.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07412.A"=Metal roofing. 2."07412.B"=Underlayment. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: 1.The Drawings are diagrammatic. They show the shape of panels, and location of

visible joints only. Provide necessary blocking, backing, girts, clips, and expansion joints necessary to provide serviceable, permanent, watertight manufactured metal panel system.

2.Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with UBC 1614 Exposure B.

3.Size sealant joint appropriate for the type of sealant and thermal movement of panels.

1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Show full size details. C.Samples: Submit two full-width sections, 6 inches long, with specified finish for

the following: 1. Typical panel. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE



A.Applicator shall have at least 2 years experience applying these types of materials with successful completion of projects of similar scope.

B.Design Requirements: UL90 rated system. 1.04PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Do not allow finish of panels to be damaged during delivery, storage, or handling.

Replace dented panels. 1.05WARRANTY A.Furnish a written warranty against defects in material and workmanship affecting

weathertightness for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion, and a written warranty against defects in material and workmanship affecting finish including without limitation, peeling or fading of finish for a period of 20 years from date of Substantial Comple-tion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.AEP Span "Span Seam", Berridge, Atlanta Metal Products, Inc (AMP), or MBCI. 1.Design: Approximately 3-inch high. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Steel: ASTM A446 Grade B, 22 gage steel with Galvalume-coating. 1.Finish: Fluoropolymer finish containing 70-percent Kynar 500/ Hylar 5000

resin-base. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 1.0 mil. a.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. B.Clip: 2-piece factory-caulked sliding clip. C.Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated, unperforated roofing felt, ASTM D226, Type I. D.Exterior Cement Board: As specified in Section 07411. E.Factory Applied Sealant: Panel manufacturer's standard type for conformance

with specified design criteria. F.Flashing and Trim: Fabricated of same material, gage, and finish as adjacent

panels.



G.Fasteners: Stainless steel of required type and length. H.Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 2.03FABRICATION A.Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or

defects. B.Fabricate concealed clips, angles, channels, etc., from specified sheet metal. C.Provide and fabricate exposed associated flashings, counterflashings, gutters,

and miscellaneous sheet metalwork to match roofing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Prior to installation of material, inspect surfaces to receive panels to see that they

are free of irregularities, dirt, debris, and liquids. B.Inspect panels for face imperfections and edge damage. C.Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory. 2.03INSTALLATION A.Install materials in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's

printed instructions for a completely weathertight and permanent installation.

B.Install felt underlayment in shingle-weatherlap fashion; lap joints minimum 2

inches. C.Panels shall be cleaned and dry at time of installation. D.Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous coating compound. E.Anchor clip angles rigidly to substrate to prevent distortion or misalignment. F.Mechanically seam panels to clip angles. Surfaces and seams shall be without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, or distortion, allowing fully for expansion and contraction.

3.02ADJUSTING AND CLEANING



A.Remove protective covering and clean in accordance with panel manufacturers recommendations.

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 27720.00 07550-1

SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide APP (Atactic Polypropylene) or SBS modified bituminous sheet roofing

system including base flashing and mineral surfacing as shown on the Drawings and as specified.

B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. 2.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3.Division 15 - Mechanical: roof drain. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07550.A"=Membrane. 2."07550.B"=Rigid insulation. 3."07550.C"=Cants. 4."07550.D"=Walkway planks. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: 1.Quality as required to provide specified warranty. 2.Materials: Membrane roofing and flashing materials shall be products of, or

approved by, roofing materials manufacturer. 3.Roofing installer shall be responsible for weather tightness of membrane

roofing and associated flashing. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Product descriptions and method of application for roofing and

flashing systems. C.Shop drawings on crickets indicating type, layout, and thicknesses. D.Certificates: 1.Prior to commencement of installation submit the following: a.Certification from manufacturer of roofing materials that roofing installer



complies with qualification requirements specified. b.Written statement by manufacturer's representative accepting the proposed

use of roofing materials and methods as specified. c.An affidavit attesting the Contractor has in place and fully implemented a written Health,

Safety, and Environmental Plan and the plan is compliant with all applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations.

2.Prior to Delivery of Materials: Certification that materials and components proposed for use conform to requirements shown and specified.

3.Prior to Acceptance of the Work: Certification stating that materials and workmanship have been provided in conformance with Contract Documents and material manufacturer's requirements.

1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience with roofing of type

specified, and certified acceptable, in writing, by roofing materials manufacturer. B.Material Manufacturer's shall: 1.Be Associate Member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors' Association

(NRCA) for at least 5 years. 2.Be nationally recognized in roofing, waterproofing, and moisture survey industry. 3.Be approved by Owner. 4.provide local Field Representative to make periodic site visits, report work quality and job

progress. 5.Employ Field Technical Services Representatives available for final roof inspection. C.Project Meetings: 1.Pre-construction conference: a.Attendance: 1)Roofing material supplier/specifier 2)Contractor 3)Architect. b.Agenda: 1)Submittal of list of subcontractors, material submittal, and progress schedule. 2)Designation of responsible personnel. 3) Walkover inspection. 2.Progress Meetings: a.Will be scheduled by Architect as required. b.Attendance: 1)Roofing material manufacturer. 2)Job superintendent. 3)Subcontractors, as appropriate. 4)Architect. c.Minimum agenda: 1)Review of work progress. 2)Field observations, problems, and decisions. 3)Coordination of projected progress.



4)Other business relating to work. 3.Final Inspection: a.Scheduled by Architect upon consultation with roofing material manufacturer upon job

completion. b.Attendance: 1)Contractor. 2)Roofing material manufacturer representative. 3)Roofing material manufacturer/technical service representative. 4)Architect. c.Minimum Agenda: 1)Walkover inspection. 2)Identification of problems which may impede issuance of warranty. D.Random Sampling: 1.Roofing Material: a.During course of work, Architect may secure samples according to ASTM D140 of

materials being used from containers at job site and submit them to an independent laboratory for comparison to specified material.

b.Should test results prove that a material is not functionally equal to specified material: 1)Contractor shall pay for all testing. 2)Roofing installed and found not to comply with the Specifications shall be removed and

replaced at no additional cost to Owner. E.Plans and Specifications: 1.Contractor shall notify Architect of any omissions, contradictions or conflicts 7 days

before bid date. Architect will provide necessary corrections or additions to plans and specifications by addendum. If Contractor does not so notify Architect of any such condition, it will be assumed that the Contractor has included the necessary items in the bid to complete this specification.

2.It is the intent that this be a completed project as far as the Contract Documents set forth. It is not the intent that different phases of work on this project be delegated to various trades and subcontractors by the Contract Documents. Contractor must make own contracts with various subcontractors, setting forth the work these subcontractors will be held responsible for. Contractor alone will be held responsible to the owner for the completed Project.

3.If the Contractor feels a conflict exists between what is considered good roofing practice and these specifications Contractor shall state in writing all objections prior to submitting bids.

4.It is the Contractor's responsibility during the course of the work, to bring to the attention of and notify the Architect first verbally, then in writing, of any defective membrane, insulation or deck discovered which where not previously identified.

F.Contractor shall provide a Project Closeout Report upon delivery of the Project warranty.

This report shall include the following sections: a.Project Specifications.



b.Project Summary. c.Progress reports as a result of roof inspections. d.Job progress photos. e.Warranty document. f.Owner's Manual describing maintenance and emergency repair. g.Inspection Report to be completed by the roofing material manufacturer 2 years from

project completion; at no additional cost to Owner. G.Fire Hazard Classification: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Class A. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials requiring fire-resistance classification to the Project with labels

attached and packaged as required by labeling service. B.Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. C.Handle rolled goods so as to prevent damage to edge or ends. D.Select and operate material-handling equipment so as not to damage existing

construction or applied roofing. E.Store materials on clean raised platforms with weather protective covering when

stored outdoors. F.Store rolled goods on end. G.Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture absorption. H.Protect materials against damage by construction traffic. I.Comply with fire and safety regulations. J.Loads placed on roof from storage of materials shall not exceed safe loading

requirements. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: 1.Apply roofing in dry weather. 2.Do not apply roofing when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. B.Protection: 1.Provide special protection or avoid heavy traffic on completed work when

ambient temperature is above 80 degrees F. 2.Restore to original condition or replace work or materials damaged during

handling of bitumens and roofing materials.



3.Protect paving and building walls adjacent to hoist and kettles prior to starting work.

1.07WARRANTY A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01774. B.Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's warranty of all materials furnished under this Section. 1.Manufacturer's warranty for weathertight and watertight roofing system shall

be 10 years from Substantial Completion. C.Contractor shall warrant the entire roofing assembly including membrane, base

flashing to be watertight and weatherproof for a period of 5 years from Substantial Completion. All costs (labor and material) for repairs, if any, will be performed at no additional cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFING SYSTEM A.Provide one of the following systems: 1.APP Modified Bituminous System: Performance "Derbigum 3I1G". 2.SBS Modified Bituminous System: Tremco system as follows: a.1 layer Roof Insulation: 1-inch fiberboard set in Type IV Hot Asphalt, prime surface with

Tremprime WB prior to installing insulation. b.Type IV Base Sheet in Type IV Hot Asphalt with 25-pound minimum Type IV Hot

Asphalt. c.Install 2-ply Hot Built-up Roof System to the entire Roof Section over Base Sheet,

consisting of 2 plies of Type IV felts and interply of 25 pounds minimum of Type IV Hot Asphalt.

d.Tremco Therm MB LTD (SBS Modified Bitumen Sheet with Granule Surface) set in Type IV Hot Asphalt with 25-pound minimum interply of Type IV Hot Asphalt.

2.02 MATERIALS A.General: Materials shall be products of, or as recommended by, selected system

manufacturer and shall conform to requirements specified herein as applicable. B.Sheets: 1.Glass Fiber Ply Felts: ASTM D2178 Type IV or VI. 2.Modified Bitumen Membrane: a.APP Sheet: ASTM D6223, Type 1, Grade S, mineral-surfaced APP modified as-

phalt/polyester-reinforced membrane sheet, 160 mils thick; Performance "Derbigum GP FR".



b.SBS Sheet: Tremco "THERM MB LTD". C.Insulation: Rigid expanded perlite board having particles blended with selected binders

and fibers. 1.8-inch thick Performance "Derbiboard" polyisocyanurate insulation with 15/16-inch thick fiberglass roof insulation.

1.Tapered Board: Slope as indicated on the Drawings. D.Cants: Perlite with impregnated beveled face in accordance with ASTM C728. 1.Maximum Vertical Height above Roof Plane: As shown on Drawings. 2.Maximum Face Incline: 45 degrees to roof plane. E.Bitumen: 1.Primer: ASTM D41. 2.Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III. F.Fasteners: As recommended by roofing manufacturer for each condition. G.Flashing: Modified bituminous sheet. H.Nailers and Blocking: As specified in Section 06100, pressure-treated wood. I.Walkway Surface Planks: Preformed planks consisting of asphalt fibers and fillers, a

white granule surface, and a reinforced carrier sheet, W.R. Meadows "Sealtight" or Tremco "Tremtread Walkpads".

1.Size: 3/4 inch x 36 inches x 60 inches. J.Drainage Board: As recommended by roofing system manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck or requires workers and

equipment to traverse roof deck has been completed. B.Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, and

unevenness which would prevent the execution and quality of application of built-up roofing system as specified.

C.Do not proceed with application of roofing system until defects are corrected. 3.02GENERAL ROOFING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.Comply with manufacturer's specifications, except where more stringent require-

ments are indicated or specified. 3.03APPLICATION OF FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES



A.Provide cant strips where shown, where required, and wherever feasible to provide

45-degree bending of the membrane system. 1.All membranes shall turn up on cant strip where they abut against a vertical

surface. B.Provide base flashing felt at cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at the

roof edges, and at major penetrations through the roof deck. 1.Nail or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of membrane to vertical surfaces as

recommended by roofing material manufacturer. C.Sheet Metal Flashing: Refer to Section 07600 and other related Sections for flashing

and similar work. Coordinate to provide a complete watertight and weatherproof roofing system.

3.04APPLICATION OF ROOF INSULATION OVER CONCRETE SUBSTRATE A.Prime deck with asphalt primer. Apply one layer fiberglass ply felt with a spot mopping

of asphalt. B.Apply insulation in a continuous mopping of asphalt at the rate of 30 pounds per 100

square feet. C.No more insulation shall be installed than can be completely covered with specified

membrane roofing on the same day. D.Install crickets and sumps using tapered and flat insulation board to provide positive

drainage. Apply in a solid mopping of hot bitumen at a rate of 30 pounds per 100 square feet. Butt joints snugly and miter all corners.

3.05MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING APPLICATION A.Install 3 plies glass fiber felts shingle fashion starting from the low point on the roof set in

solid nominal 25 lbs/100 sf moppings of hot asphalt. Plies shall be lapped 19 inches installed over minimum 18 inches wide starter or header plies at perimeters and penetrations.

B.Starting at the low edge of the roof, roll modified bitumen sheet. Adhere by heat

welding or adhesive, as recommended by roofing manufacturer, solidly over the base ply. Check all laps for proper adhesion after seaming.

3.05CLEANING A.Remove excess roofing and debris, and leave premises in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Flashing and Sheet Metal 27720.00 07600-1

SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide flashing and sheet metal as shown and as specified including the following: 1.Roof flashing and counterflashing not provided under Divisions 15 and 16 or

Sections 07140 and 07411. 2.Copings, downspouts, gravel stops, and reglets. 3.Sealant work related to flashing and sheet metal. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal: stainless steel coping and sills. 2.Section 05800 - Seismic Joint Assemblies. 3.Section 07140 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing. 4.Section 07411 - Metal Roofing. 5.Section 07416 - Stainless Steel Wall Panels. 6.Section 07550 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. 7.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 8.Section 09900 - Painting. 9.Division 15 - Mechanical Equipment. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07600.A"=Galvanized sheet metal flashing. 2."07600.B"=Galvanized counterflashing. 3."07600.C"=Galvanized gravel stop. 4."07600.D"=Galvanized parapet caps. 5."07600.E"=Stainless steel coping. 6."07600.F"=Stainless steel scuppers. 7."07600.G"=Aluminum flashing. 8."07600.H"=Splash block. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A.Design Requirements: 1.Work shall conform to "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" standards

published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. (SMACNA).

2.Contractor shall be responsible for providing flashing and sheet metal work to

withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement,



and exposure to weather without failure. 3.Contractor shall be responsible for flashing and sheet metal work to be

permanently watertight. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts for manufactured items. C.Shop Drawings: Fully detailed, large-scale drawings of specially fabricated sheet

metal work showing joint locations, dimensions, and methods at joined and formed sections.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion,

and to provide ventilation. B.Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration,

staining, or damage. 1.05 SCHEDULING A.Sheet metal work fabricated and furnished under this Section for installation under

other Sections shall be available in required quantities at the site when required for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Galvanized Steel: 1.Galvanized Steel, Commercial Quality, complying with ASTM A526 or ASTM

A527 as recommended by fabricator, shop primed. 2.Coating Designation: G90, ASTM A924. 3.Thickness: 0.0276-inch (24 gage) minimum, except 0.0329-inch (20 gage) for

gravel stops and 0.0428-inch (18 gage) for clips, unless otherwise noted or required for stiffness.

B.Stainless Steel Sheets: ASTM A167 or A176, type best suited for purpose. C.Reglets: Fry Reglet or accepted equal. E.Fasteners: Use Cadmium-plated or galvanized steel at galvanized steel; use 300 alloy

stainless steel at stainless steel.



1.Provide rivets, sheet metal screws, machine screws, self-tapping screws, and stove bolts of the types and sizes best adapted to conditions of use.

2.Pop rivets may be used for metal-to-metal connections when future disassembly is not required.

a.Open-end type may be used for all applications, except where watertight connections are required, in which case use closed-end type.

b.Use pop rivets made from same type material as metals to be fastened. 3.Fasteners exposed to view shall be reviewed with the Architect. E.Solder: ASTM B32; grade as recommended by manufacturer of metal sheets for

intended use. F.Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822 made with Type II asphalts. G.Bituminous Coating Compound: Federal Specification (FS) TT-C-494, cold-applied

mastic compound for 15-mil dry-film coating thickness. H.Lead Flashing: 4-pound lead sheet, used only at ferrous roof penetrations. I.Butyl Tape: Federal Specification FS TT-S-1657, Type 1, concealed sealant for use in

conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining, non-corrosive, non-shrinking, non-hardening, non-migrating and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior concealed applications.

J.Sealant: As specified in Section 07920. K.Primer Coating: Zinc-dust/zinc-oxide metal primer. L.Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, minimum 3000 psi at 28 days. 2.02 FABRICATION A.Fabricated Metal Flashing, Rain Drainage, and Trim: 1.Shop-fabricate metal flashing/counterflashing, copings, parapet caps,

downspouts, gravel stops and similar items to comply with profiles and sizes shown and in accordance with standard details shown in "Architec-tural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA.

2.Galvanized sheet metal shall be given pretreatment and primer coating in shop when it is to be used in an exposed location and final finish field painted as specified in Sections 09900.

3.Work exposed to view, such as copings and scuppers shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet.

4.Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects.

5.Surfaces shall be smooth and free from warping or buckling. 6.Work exposed to moisture or weather shall be thoroughly watertight with

provision for free expansion without leaks.



7.Seams and joints shall be kept to a minimum. 8.Width of Seams: a.Flat Lock Seam: 1/2 inch wide. b.Lapped Seam (Soldered, Subject to Stress): 1 inch wide. c.Lapped Seam (Soldered, Not Subject to Stress): 1/2 inch wide. d.Lapped Seam (Expansion Joint, Filled with Sealant Tape): 4 inches

wide. 9.Metal sheets in straight runs shall be made up of lengths not less than 8 feet

or as shown on Drawings. 10.Joints exposed to view such shall be flush butt joints with backing for water-

tight conditions. a.Other joints, unless otherwise noted, shall be lapped joints. B.Soldering: 1.Clean and flux metal prior to soldering. 2.Sweat solder completely through seam width. 3.Make exposed soldering full flowing and smooth with finish surfaces. 4.Wash acid flux with an appropriate neutralizer solution after soldering, and

remove soldering flux on exposed and painted surfaces. C.Expansion and Contraction: 1.Provide for thermal expansion and contraction and building movement in

completed work without overstressing materials, breaking connections, or producing wrinkles and distortion in finished surfaces.

2.Make water- and weathertight throughout. 3.Where subject to thermal expansion and contraction, attach members with

clips to permit movement with out damage, or provide slotted or oversized holes with washers.

4.Make lock seam work flat and true to line, and sweat full of solder, except where installed to permit expansion and contraction.

a.Lap flat lock seams, and lap seams where soldered according to pitch, but in no case less than 3 inches.

b.Make seams in direction of flow. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for sheet metal work. B.Verify that nailers, cants, and blocking to receive sheet metal are installed and

suitable to receive sheet metal work. C.Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 PREPARATION



A.Before installing sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surface to be

covered. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Comply with details and profiles indicated on Drawings and SMACNA

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for installation of the Work.

2.Coordinate installation with other work which makes up entire system of weatherproofing, waterproofing, and rain drainage.

3.Conceal fastenings, except as otherwise indicated. 4.Conceal reinforcement within finished assembly. 5.Unless otherwise noted, separate dissimilar metals with a coating of

bituminous coating compound. a.Coating shall not be visible in finished work, except for ends of sections. 6.Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses,

distortion, "oil canning," and true to line and surface, allowing for expansion and contraction.

B.Install flashings and counterflashings where shown or required to provide watertight

protection. C. Install splash pans at termination of downspouts. 3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A.Leave Work clean and free of stains, scrap, and debris. B.Repair and replace damaged Work. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Firestopping 27720.00 07840-1

SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Provide firestopping and smokestopping as indicated and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01455 - Mock-ups. 2.Division 15 - Mechanical: mechanical work requiring firestopping. 3.Division 16 - Electrical: electrical work requiring firestopping. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07840.A"=Firestopping mortar. 2."07840.B"=Firestopping sealant. 3."07840.C"=Firestopping sleeve. 4."07840.D"=Intumescent. 5."07840.E"=Mineral fiberboard. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Criteria: Firestop and smokestop voids and openings in following locations: 1.Ducts, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, and other penetrations through floor slabs

(except on-grade slabs) and through fire rated walls and partitions. 2.Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases and utility shafts. 3.Openings between floor slab edges and exterior walls, including glass and aluminum

curtain walls. 4.Openings, gaps, and cracks between abutting fire rated assemblies and components,

such as wall-to-wall or wall-to-floor including overhead floor decks. 5.Blank openings into or through fire rated floors and walls. 6.Other locations indicated or required by applicable codes to be firestopped. B.Firestopping materials used to fill floor openings in which smallest dimension is 4 inches

shall support same loads that floor was designed to support. If equal floor loading capacity cannot be obtained with firestop material, provide permanent covering to support loads and traffic, capable of being removed to allow access.

C.Where insulated piping and duct penetrations occur, install firestopping systems

intended for use with type of insulation on penetrating item. If compatible firestop system is unavailable, remove insulation in area in contact with firestopping material.



D.Whenever finished firestop and smokestop materials are scheduled to receive finish paint or other coatings, test compatibility of firestop materials with coatings to be applied.

E.Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal. F.Do not use firestop products which, after curing, dissolve in water. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing each type of condition requiring penetration

seals. Indicate tested assembly number, firestop materials utilized, anchorage, methods of installation, actual adjacent construction materials and thicknesses, and barrier fire ratings.

C.Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation

criteria, and preparation and installation instruction. D.Certificates: 1.Manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2.Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating

approval of materials and installation. E.Qualification Data: Submit installer's qualifications verifying years of experience;

include list of completed projects having similar scope of Work identified by name, location, date, reference names and phone numbers.

F.Prepare job mock-up of each assembly proposed for use in as directed by Architect.

Approved mock-ups may be left in place as part of the finished Project and shall constitute the standard for remaining work.

1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator's Qualifications: 1.Currently approved by the firestopping and smokestopping material manufacturer. 2.Minimum 3 years documented experience. B.Regulatory Requirements: 1.Firestopping system shall have approval of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Test

1479 or ASTM E 814 as part of a listed assembly. 2.Conform to F and T ratings required by authority having jurisdiction. 3.Comply with applicable building and fire codes, and NFPA 70 requirement for fire ratings

and surface burning characteristics. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Deliver materials to jobsite in factory-sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name

and address and UL labels. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below

65 degrees F. B.Verify compatibility of firestopping system to adjacent material. 1.07SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of work involving penetrating items,

but prior to covering, concealing, or eliminating access to openings. B.Sequence work to permit firestopping and smokestopping installation to be inspected

and approved prior to being concealed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Provide products of one of the following except as specified below. 1.Specified Technologies, Inc. - STI SpecSeal & Pensil. 2.Hilti. 3.3M. 4.Hevi-Duty/Nelson, Unit of General Signal. 2.02MATERIALS A.General: Firestopping and smoke seal materials shall be asbestos free. 1.The F rating must be a minimum of 1 hour, but not less than the fire resistance

rating of the assembly being penetrated, when tested per ASTM E814. 2.Materials being applied in openings between elements of differing fire ratings

shall conform to the most restrictive rating. 3.Fire tests shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of

0.03 inches of water column. 4.Material shall be noncombustible, with flame spread of 25 or less, and smoke

development of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B.Firestop or Smoke Seal Mortar: Single component portland cement fly ash mortar,

requiring no special supports or anchoring devices to pass water hose stream tests.

C.Firestop or Smoke Seal Sealant: Single or multiple component silicone sealant.



Provide a flexible, air-tight, water proof seal that bonds to building materials. D.Firestop or Smoke Seal Sleeve: Prefabricated device used around plastic pipes in

fire-rated floors and walls. The sleeve shall be made of a steel collar lined with an intumescent material.

E.Intumescent Mastic Sealant: Single component, water-based intumescent for use

at openings and sleeves involving plastic pipe, insulated pipe or flexible cable. F.Mineral fiber board, mineral fiber matting, and mineral fiber putty-forming and

damming materials shall be used to contain the fluid material mixture prior to and during filling of penetrations and voids.

1.Mineral Fiber: USG "Thermafiber Safing Insulation" or Johns Manville "Pyro-Fiber"; safing insulation with a minimum 3.75 lb./cu. ft. density as required by approved assembly.

2.Fire tested and functionally approved forming materials may be left in place to become an integrally part of the foamed penetration seal.

3.Combustible forming and damming materials may be used for containment during installation of materials only, and must be removed from the final completed penetration seal system.

G.Provide primers as required which conform to manufacturer's recommendations for

various substrates and conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine areas scheduled to receive firestopping to ensure protection against inclement

weather and other hazards and to verify that work of preceding trades is completed.

B.Examine space allocated for firestopping for proper depth to receive material. C.Verify that supporting devices have been installed on both sides of penetrated

construction as required by UL classification. D.Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which

may affect bond of firestopping material. B.Remove incompatible materials which affect bond.



C.Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL classification requirements. B.Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating; maintain uniform

density and texture. 1.Install firestopping and smokestopping material at walls or partition openings which

contain penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items requiring firestopping and smokestopping.

2.Maintain integrity over entire area to form a continuous firestop system. 3.04FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Maintain areas of work accessible and notify code authorities and designated inspectors

of work released for inspection. B.Do not cover any penetration seal prior to required inspection. C.Inspection Requirements: Examine firestopping for proper installation, adhesion, and

curing as appropriate for respective firestopping assembly. 3.05ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace loose and damaged materials. B.Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping and smokestopping materials. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Joint Sealants 27720.00 07920-1

SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide sealant and calking work required to weatherproof the building, including

interior calking and sealing, as shown and as specified. 1.Sealants for the following work shall comply with requirements of this Section: a.Exterior joints below grade and non-facade joints including cast-in-place

concrete, aluminum, steel, plaster, and joints between different materials, etc.

b.Exterior joints in horizontal surfaces including cast-in-place concrete, pavers, and joints between different materials, etc.

c.Interior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic surfaces including control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls, perimeter joints of exterior openings, tile control and expansion joints, other joints as indicated.

d.Interior joints in horizonal traffic surfaces including control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs, tile flooring, stone flooring and other joints as indicated.

B.Related Sections: 1.Section 02741 - Paving and Surfacing. 2.Section 02755 - Site Concrete Work. 3.Section 02782 - Stone Masonry Pavers. 4.Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal: metal panels. 5.Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 6.Section 06410 - Custom Casework. 7.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 8.Section 09300 - Tile: for sealing tile joints. 9.Section 09400 - Terrazzo. 10.Section 09635 - Stone Flooring. 11.Section 10200 - Louvers and Vents. 12.Division 15 - Mechanical: sealants at Mechanical Work. 13.Division 16 - Electrical: sealants at Electrical Work. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."07920.A"=Interior wet sealant 2."07920.B"=Interior sealant 3."07920.C"=Exterior sealant 1.02SUBMITTALS



A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's specification, recommendations, and installation

instructions, including cleaning of joint surfaces, for each type of material required.

1.Indicate location of each type of sealant. C.Samples: For color selection of exposed sealant. D.Certification: From manufacturer of joint sealants attesting that their products comply

with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. E.Test Reports: 1.Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating

that materials forming joint substrates and joints sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joints sealants.

a.Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.

2.Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified.

3.Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrate acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.

1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer's Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed joint

sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based

on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24-month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect.

1.Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement (per ASTM C719), low temperature, flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering.

C.Before purchase of sealant material, confirm compatibility with each other material

sealant will be applied to in joint system. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Deliver materials in original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages with

manufacturer's name, labels, and product identification. B.Store materials out of weather in original containers or unopened packages as

recommended by manufacturer. 1.05 WARRANTY A.Warrant workmanship against leakage, deterioration, or other failure to perform properly

for 3 years. 1.Refer to Section 01774 for warranty form. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Colors: 1.Concealed Material: Any of manufacturer's standard colors. 2.Exposed Material: Custom color to be selected by Architect. B.Sealant for General Exterior Building Use Except as Noted Below: ASTM C920, Type

S, Class 25, Grade NS, single-component, low or mid-to-high modulus silicone sealant.

1.Manufacturers: Dow Corning 790, General Electric "Silpruf," or Tremco "Spectrum 1" or "Spectrum 2".

C.Exterior Exposed Metal Joints: Single-component polysulfide or polyurethane

conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. 1.Manufacturers: Pecora "GC-9," or Mameco International "Vulkem 116". D.Exterior Concealed Metal Joints: One-part butyl-rubber calk conforming to FS

TT-S-001657, Type I. 1.Manufacturers: Pecora "BC158," or Tremco. E.Interior Wet Areas: One-part mildew-resistant silicone rubber conforming to ASTM

C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. 1.Manufacturers: Dow-Corning "786" or General Electric "SCS 1702". F.Interior Nonwet Areas: One-component acrylic latex water-based sealant conforming

to ASTM C834. 1.Manufacturers: Tremco "Acrylic Latex" or Pecora "AC-20". G.Exterior and Interior Horizontal Joints Subject to Pedestrian Traffic: Two-part

polyurethane conforming to ASTM C920, Class 25, Type M, self-leveling. 1.Manufacturers: Pecora "NR-200 Urexpan" or Sonneborn "Sonolastic Paving Joint



Sealant". H.Electrical Box Sealant: Lowry's sheet calking as distributed by Harold A. Price Co.,

Richmond, California or STI "SpecSeal Putty Pads". I.Fibrous Expansion Joint Material: Preformed, cellular fiber complying with ASTM

D1751. 1.Manufacturer: W.R. Meadows SealTight "Fibre Expansion Joint Filler." 2.02MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended by sealant

manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. B.Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod-stock polyethylene foam, polyolefin foam,

polyethylene-jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl-rubber foam, or other flexible, permanent, durable, nonabsorptive material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by sealant manufacturer.

C.Cleaning Solvent: Non-corrosive type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials. D.Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer. 1.Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on

Drawings and recommended by manufacturer. B.Begin installation when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions

applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

B.Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use

of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C.Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following



requirements: 1.Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealant during application and at

position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

a.Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c.Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and

replace with dry materials. D.Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealant

directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1.Install sealant at the same time sealant backings are installed. E.Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time

skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1.Remove excess sealants form surfaces adjacent to joint. 2.Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved

by sealant manufacturer. 3.Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4.Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C1193, where indicated. a.Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3.03 CLEANING AND CURING A.Clean adjoining surfaces to eliminate evidence of spillage; do not mar surfaces. B.Cure sealants in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to

obtain high early-bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and surface durability.

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Steel Doors and Frames 27720.00 08110-1

SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following hollow metal work as shown on the Drawings and as specified: 1.Steel doors and steel frames. 2.Steel frames for glazed openings. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 2.Section 07416 - Stainless Steel Wall Panels. 3.Section 08210 - Wood Doors. 4.Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 5.Section 08800 - Glazing. 6.Section 09900 - Painting. 7.Division 16 - Electrical: security. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08110.A"=Flush metal door. 2."08110.B"=Hollow metal door frame. 3."08110.C"=Hollow metal window frame. 4."08110.D"=Hollow metal door with wire mesh. 5."08110.E"=Hollow metal door with wood and stainless steel veneer. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Cover each type of door, frame, and frame condition. 2.Include the following specific information: a.Elevation of all doors and frames. b. Jamb and head details. c.Hardware reinforcing details of doors and frames. d.Door and frame location schedule. e.Complete door and frame descriptive nomenclature. f.Material description and gages. g.Meeting stile details. h.Methods of anchorage. i.Hardware preparation locations. j.Glass molding details.



k.Wire mesh details. l.Louver details if applicable. 3.Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those indicated on

Drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Steel doors and frames shall comply with the Steel Door Institute (SDI)

"Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (ANSI/SDI-100) and other requirements as specified herein.

B.Fire-Rated Assemblies, Smoke and Draft Control Assemblies: Whenever a

fire-resistance or smoke and draft control classification is indicated, provide steel doors, frames, and hardware investigated and tested as part of a fire-rated or smoke and draft control door assembly, complete with type of fire door hardware to be used.

1.Identify each fire-rated or smoke and draft control door and frame with permanent, metal labels from approved testing agency indicating applicable fire rating.

2.Construct and install assemblies to comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 80 and UBC Standard 7-2, 713.5 CBC and as specified herein.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver, store, and handle steel doors and frames in manner to prevent damage or

deterioration. B.Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding,

spreaders, and paper wrappings to protect items during transit and Project site storage.

C.Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer. D.Store doors upright in a protected dry area on a raised platform at least 1 inch off

the ground. 1.Provide blocking between units to provide air circulation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Coordination: 1.Hardware supplier shall furnish steel door and frame manufacturer with

accepted hardware schedule, hardware templates, and samples of physical hardware where necessary to ensure correct fitting and installation.

2.Preparation includes sinkages and cutouts for mortise and concealed hardware.

3.Coordinate submittal of shop drawing for frames specified in this Section with Division 16



for electrical and security requirements and frame preparation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial carbon steel, pickled and oiled,

complying with ASTM A568 and ASTM A569. B.Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial-quality carbon steel complying with ASTM

A366 and ASTM A568. C.Galvanized Steel Sheets: Commercial-quality zinc-coated carbon steel complying

with ASTM A526, with G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized, complying with ASTM A525.

D.Shop-Applied Paint: Rust-inhibitive primer, either air dried or baked on, suitable as

a base for specified finish paints. E.Glass: As shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section 08800. F.Wire Mesh: Welded square mesh, 1-inch x 1-inch x 10 gage. 1.Finish: Baked on coating; color as selected by Architect. G.Plywood Veneer: To match paneling as specified in Section 06200. H.Stainless Steel Veneer: To match wall panels specified in Section 07416. 2.02 FABRICATION - GENERAL A.Fabricate steel doors and frames and glazed frames to required profiles and sizes

by forming and welding with exposed arrises, edges straight and sharp. B.Fit and fabricate accurately with corner hairline joints and all surfaces free from

warp, wave, buckle, and other defects. C.Welding: 1.In accordance with AWS standards for high-grade hollow metal work. 2.Grind all exposed beads smooth. D.Exterior doors and frames shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets. E.Custom door with stainless steel and plywood veneer shall be fabricated to profiles as

shown on Drawings. F.Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk, flat Phillips



or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. G.Finish Hardware Preparation: 1.Prepare steel doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware,

including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware suppliers.

a.Preparation shall be in accordance with ANSI A115. "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation," where applicable, and SDI-107.

2.Provide minimum gage hardware reinforcing in accordance with Table V of ANSI/SDI-100.

3.Concealed Overhead Closers: Provide spaces, cutouts, dust boxes, removable stops, reinforcing, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames as applicable.

4.Reinforce steel doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. a.Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware shall be done at

Project site by hardware installer. 5.Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in

accordance with "Recommended Location for Builder's Hardware" published by the National Builders' Hardware Association.

H.Shop Painting: 1.After fabrication, thoroughly clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt,

and other foreign matter, and chemically treat with phosphate compound to assure maximum paint adhesion.

2.Apply baked on shop coat of specified primer of even consistency to provide a uniform finished surface ready to receive finish painting.

3.Finish shall comply with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Primed Painted Steel Surfaces."

I.Electrical Requirements: 1.General: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified under Section

08710 and other applicable sections; arrange in manner so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.

2.Doors with Electric Hinges: a.General: Provide with metal raceway or conduit to permit wiring from electric hinge to

other electric door hardware. b.Hinges or Pivot Location: Center or intermediate as applicable; top or bottom not

permiitted. 2.03 STEEL FRAMES A.Provide steel frames of the types and styles indicated on the Drawings. B.Gages: In accordance with SDI-100 Table IV recommendations for the door Grade

specified. 1.Labeled Frames: 14 gage, or as included in UL test procedure. 2.Exterior Doors: 14 gage.



C.Shop-assemble and weld each frame into a single unit. D.Saw-miter or cope and tab all frame miters, and continuously weld at return, face,

rabbet, and stop. E.Profile bottom of jamb to contour of concrete at change in floor elevation occurring

within jamb width. F.Prepare rabbet stops for rubber door silencers. 1.Locate three on strike jamb for single doors and four on head for pairs of

doors. G.Provide concealed reinforcement to receive mortise-type hardware. 1.Mortise, drill, and tap to template requirements. H.Glazed Metal Frames: Comply with UL requirements for fire-rated frames. 1.Fabricate four-sided metal frame to shape, profile, sizes and details shown. Miter

corners accurately, weld continuously to full depth of frame and grind smooth.

2.Provide glazing stops as shown fastened with countersunk, flat Phillips head screws. 3.Glass: As specified in Section 08800. 2.04STEEL DOORS A.Classification: Grade II, Model 2, Heavy-Duty Seamless -Hollow Steel

Construction. 1.Fire-Rated Doors: Face sheets shall be 16 gage if required by tested UL

assembly at fire-rated openings. 2.Exterior Doors: 16 gage. B.Sound-deadening filler material between reinforcing members shall completely fill

space between face sheets and between reinforcing members. C.Provide removable moldings for glazed openings in flush doors. 1.Use countersunk or trusshead screws, equally spaced not more than 8 inches

on center. D.Provide astragals extending full door height on active leaf of all pairs of exterior

service doors and fire-rated doors. E.Louvers shall be full welded and factory installed. F.The top and bottom of out-swinging exterior doors shall be closed with a suitable cap to

provide protection from water's entering inside door.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be

installed and notify the Architect, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B.Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION OF FRAMES A.Install frames in accordance with SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for

Steel Frames." B.Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head

level, and maintain jambs plumb and square. C.Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. 1.Provide not less than three anchors and one floor clip per side for doors up to

7 feet high and four anchors and one floor clip per side for doors over 7 feet high.

2.Frames over 3 feet 0 inches wide shall have one anchor at head. 3.Anchors shall be furnished to suit wall conditions and floor angles or clips

welded to frame for fastening to floor. D.Whenever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly

square and plumb and anchors are securely attached. 1.Do not use shipping bars as spreaders. E.Allow for expansion movement as required. F.Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and UBC

Standard 7-2. 3.03INSTALLATION OF DOORS A.Install steel doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Project

requirements. B.Do not erect members which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed, or

otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance.

1.Remove and replace members which have been damaged in process or erection.



C.Apply hardware in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08710. D.Adjust operable parts for correct function. 3.04FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Clearances for Non-Labeled Doors: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or

required by weatherstripping and threshold installations, provide non-labeled doors with the following maximum clearances in accordance with SDI 100 requirements.

1.At jambs and head, 1/8-inch. 2.At meeting stiles of a pair of doors, 1/4-inch. 3.At bottom, measured from finish floor, 3/4-inch. B.Clearances for labeled doors shall conform to UBC Standard 7-2 and as follows: 1.Swinging Doors: With a minus 1/16-inch tolerance, 1/8-inch along the top, 1/8-inch

along the hinge and latch jambs, 1/8-inch along the meeting edge of doors in pairs, and 3/8-inch at the bottom edge of a single swing door, and 1/4-inch at the bottom of a pair of doors.

3.05PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP A.Immediately after erection, items with prime coat which has been damaged shall be

sanded smooth and touched up with same prime as applied at shop. B.Remove rust before above-specified touch-up is applied. C.Touch-up shall not be obvious. 3.06PROTECTION A.Protect installed work against damage from other construction work. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Wood Doors 27720.00 08210-1

SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Providing wood door work and installation of finish hardware as shown on the

Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: wood door frames. 2.Section 06410 - Custom Casework. 3.Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. 4.Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 5.Section 09900 - Painting. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08210.A"=Flush wood door. 2."08210.B"=Curved wood door. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's information on materials and fabrication, including

vision panels and other pertinent information. C.Shop Drawings: Door schedule indicating opening-identifying symbol, sizes, and

door type and grade, elevation, swing, and undercuts. D.Samples: Duplicate samples of corner portion of each type of door showing core,

edge band, veneer, construction and identifying labels. 1.Door veneers are to match hardwood frames in color, grain, and appearance, per WIC

standards. 2.Submit with samples of wood door frames and wood-veneered casework specified in

Sections 06200 and 06410 to permit simultaneous review. E.Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that doors comply with rating and fabrica-

tion requirements specified.



1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Flush doors shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Wood Window

and Door Association (NWWDA) Industry Standard I.S. 1-A, "Wood Flush Doors."

B.Particleboard-core doors shall meet or exceed requirements of the Woodwork Institute of

California (WIC). C.Qualifications of Manufacturers: Qualified to affix each door with NWWDA Seal of

Acceptance or quality certification stamp. D.Allowable Tolerance for Fabrication of Doors: 1.Premachining for Hardware: NWWDA "Standard Procedures and

Recommendations for Factory Machining Architectural Wood and Plastic Faced Flush Doors for Hardware."

E.Fire-Rated Assemblies, Smoke and Draft Control Assemblies: Whenever a

fire-resistance or smoke and draft control classification is indicated, provide steel doors, frames, and hardware investigated and tested as part of a fire-rated or smoke and draft control door assembly, complete with type of fire door hardware to be used.

1.Identify each fire-rated or smoke and draft control door and frame with permanent, metal labels from approved testing agency indicating applicable fire rating.

2.Construct and install assemblies to comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 80 and UBC Standard 7-2, 713.5 CBC and as specified herein.

F.Source Quality Control: Where flush wood doors are located adjacent to millwork of the

same species, both doors and millwork veneers shall be from the same source, and shall match, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Properly wrap and protect doors for shipping and handling. B.Deliver doors to site after building has reached relative humidity expected under

intended occupancy. C.Seal all four edges of doors when delivered to Project site. 1.Sealer shall be compatible with specified painter's finish. D.Label and identify doors for each opening to facilitate proper location. E.Store doors flat on level surface in clean, dry, and properly ventilated spaces. 1.Do not expose doors to abnormal heat, dryness, and humidity.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Flush Doors: Weyerhaeuser, Algoma, or Eggers. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Face Veneer at Transparent Finished Doors: 1.Typical Doors: Select White Maple, quarter cut, adjacent veneers slip matched, panel

face assemblies balance match, flitches pre-selected for uniform color and grade, NWWDA Premium A-Grade, standard thickness, kiln dried and smoothly sanded.

a.Provide prefinished doors. 2.Adjacent to Paneling: Color, grain and appearance shall match paneling as specified in

Section 06200. B.Face Veneer at Paint Grade doors: Birch, WDMA Custom A-Grade, standard

thickness, kiln dried and smoothly sanded. 1.Finish: Factory primed. C.Adhesives: NWWDA I.S. 1-A minimum Type II (water-resistant). D.Cores at Non-Rated and 20-Minute Rated Doors: Kiln dried softwood blocks or

solid particleboard in accordance with ANSI A208.1. E.Crossbands: 1/16-inch thick kiln dried hardwood; stained to match door. F.Edge Bands: Hardwood solid stock, fire-retardant treated where required, same

species as face of doors, with no finger joints, knots, pitch pockets, or other defects.

1.Treated Edge at Doors 100A, 114, and 120: Treated Maple edge with Pemko HSS2000 dadoed under edge veneer and Pemko S77 surface applied astragal.

G.Reinforcement: Provide solid wood blocking or other acceptable material for door

hardware, including for door closer and exist devices, such that no through-bolts shall be required to permanently mount hardware on door.

1.Provide reinforcement as required for sliding door hardware. H.Hardware: Furnish as specified in Section 08710. 2.03 FABRICATION A.General:



1.Conform with requirements of regulatory agencies, reference standards, reviewed shop drawings, and Contract Documents.

2.Premachine rated doors at factory by licensed fabricator for hardware requiring cutting of doors in compliance with NFPA 80.

3.Factory-cut openings, insofar as practicable. Prefit and premachine doors. Undercut where indicated.

4.Seal raw edges immediately after cutting and fitting, including areas routed for hardware.

5.Maintain maximum 12 percent moisture content for all wood materials at time of fabrication.

B.Curved Door: Fabricate wood staved door with transparent finished face veneers to

match adjacent curved wood paneling. Fabricate door to details as shown on Drawings.

C.Vision Panel Frames: Sheet steel, with corners and intersections mitered, welded,

and ground smooth; shop primed with manufacturer's standard primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Verify that door frames are of type required for door and are installed as required for

proper installation of doors. B.Do not install doors in frames which would hinder operation of doors. C.Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of

NWWDA Standards and WIC Technical Bulletin 420-R. 1.Unless otherwise required, bevel fire-rated doors 1/16 inch in 2 inches at lock

edge. B.Install fire-rated doors in fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA

Standard No. 80. C.Seal jobsite cut surfaces with two coats of door manufacturer's standard sealer

before final hanging of doors. D.Hardware: 1.Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, requirements of

regulatory agencies, and industry standards, taking care not to damage hardware, doors, frames, or their finishes.



2.Adjust and lubricate hardware, as required, for proper operation. 3.Upon completion of installation, doors and finish hardware shall operate

smoothly. 3.03FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Clearances for Non-Labeled Doors: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or

required by weatherstripping and threshold installations, provide non-labeled doors with the following maximum clearances in accordance with SDI 100 requirements.

1.At jambs and head, 1/8-inch. 2.At meeting stiles of a pair of doors, 1/4-inch. 3.At bottom, measured from finish floor, 3/4-inch. B.Clearances for labeled doors shall conform to UBC Standard 7-2 and as follows: 1.Swinging Doors: With a minus 1/16-inch tolerance, 1/8-inch along the top, 1/8-inch

along the hinge and latch jambs, 1/8-inch along the meeting edge of doors in pairs, and 3/8-inch at the bottom edge of a single swing door, and 1/4-inch at the bottom of a pair of doors.

3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Replace or rehang, as acceptable to the Architect, doors which are hingebound and

do not swing or operate freely. B.Replace prefinished doors damaged during installation. C.Refinish or replace, as acceptable to the Architect, job finished doors damaged

during installation. D.Protect installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of Work. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Access Doors and Panels 27720.00 08310-1

SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide access panels for access to concealed mechanical, plumbing, and electrical

items as specified in Division 15 and 16; coiling door fusible link as specified in Section 08331; and as shown.

B.Related Sections: 1.Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors. 2.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 3.Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: removable acoustical panels. 4.Section 09900 - Painting. 5.Division 15 - Mechanical. 6.Division 16 - Electrical. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08310.A"=Metal access panel, galvanized. 2."08310.B"=One-hour rated metal access panel, galvanized. 3."08310.C"=Metal access panel, stainless steel. 4."08310.D"=One-hour rated metal access panel, stainless steel. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Access panels in fire-rated ceilings shall bear

appropriate label. 1.04PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store panels in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B.Do not remove protective packaging until time of installation. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS



A.Obtain Architect's approval of location and size of all access panels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Karp Associates, Inc., JL Industries, or Nystrom. 1.Types: Provide galvanized steel and stainless steel types. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Galvanized Steel: Flush-panel types for gypsum wallboard. 1.Frame: Minimum 20-gage galvanized steel. 2.Door: Not lighter than 20-gage galvanized steel with 3/8-inch fiberboard liner. 3.Drywall Bead (as applicable): Galvanized steel. 4.Hinges: Concealed pivot hinge with controlled action device. a.Provide self-closing hinges at fire-rated panels. 5.Lock: Key wrench operated. 6.Finish: Factory-applied baked-on rust-resistant prime coat. 7.Size: 24 inches x 24 inches minimum at ceilings; size as required for access at walls. B.Stainless Steel: Flush-panel types for gypsum wallboard. 1.Frame: Minimum 16-gage No. 304 stainless steel. Provide with gaskets on 4 sides. 2.Door: Minimum 20-gage No. 304 stainless steel. 3.Hinges: Continuous stainless steel piano type or concealed spring allowing opening to

90 degrees. a.Provide self-closing hinges at fire-rated doors. 4.Lock: Flush, screwdriver operated with case-hardened steel cam. a.Provide self-latching lock at fire-rated doors. 5.Finish: No. 4 finish satin finish. 6.Size: As required for access and by regulatory agencies. C.Provide fastening devices, masonry anchors, casing beads, and other items as required

to secure door and frame in place. D.Provide manufacturer's standard fire-rated access panels with Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. (UL) "B" Label at fire-rated assemblies. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION



A.Examine construction to receive access panels and verify correctness of dimensions and other supporting or adjoining conditions.

B.Do not install panels until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C.Verify that locations will serve portion of work to which access is required. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install securely to framing in locations required to give access to plumbing,

mechanical, electrical, or similar devices concealed in walls and ceilings. B.Coordinate with other trades to verify correct sizes and locations of access panels. 3.03ADJUSTMENT A.Following installation, adjust access panels for smooth operation. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Overhead Coiling Doors 27720.00 08331-1

SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide automatic-closing overhead coiling fire-rated doors as shown and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: channel guides. 2.Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 3.Division 16 - Electrical. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08331.A"=Coiling door. 2."08331.B"=Guides. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Regulatory Requirement: Fire rated doors shall be constructed in accordance with

testing agency requirements and shall be Factory Mutual oversized fire-door label for 1-1/2 hour (B label).

1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: 1.Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. 2.Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency, periodic

adjustments required. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate overall dimension, general construction, configuration

slat, section, guide detail, bottom bar detail, hardware, and finishes. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installation shall be by authorized representative in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.01MANUFACTURER A.Overhead Door Corporation "630 Series-Between Jambs" or The Cookson Company

"Model FD-2". 2.02MATERIALS A.Coiling Door Slats: Minimum 22-gage galvanized rolled steel interlocking slats with

approximate face dimension of 2-5/8 inches; Overhead Door Corporation "F265" or Cookson "No. 5" flat profile.

B.Guides: Minimum 3/16-inch thick ASTM A36 galvanized steel angles as specified in

Section 05500. 1.Fasteners to Masonry: UL listed expansion anchors or through bolts or welded in

accordance with manufacturer's listing. C.Bottom Bar: Steel tube bottom bar with astragal. D.Hood: 24-gage minimum, hot-dipped galvanized steel. 1.Hood shall be equipped with thermally-controlled, internal, galvanized steel flame baffle

as required. 2.Intermediate supports installed as required to prevent sag. E.Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type. Counterbalance shall be housed in a

steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03-inch per foot of span. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel.

F.Operating Components: Manufacturer's standard, suitable for the door size and

operation specified. 1.Counterbalance assembly. G.Operation: Chain-opening, automatic closing. H.Finish: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel with baked-on prime coat and 0.6

mils thick baked-on polyester (powder-coat). Color: Gray. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that openings are prepared with headers level, jambs plumb, and are correctly

dimensioned to receive coiling doors. B.Verify correctness of backing or support conditions.



C.Install when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop

drawings, free of springing, forcing, racking, or distortion. B.Install rolling fire doors in compliance with requirements of NFPA 80. Test fire-release

system and reset components after testing. C.Anchor assemblies securely to structure and align. 3.03ADJUSTING A.Upon completion of installation, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free

from warp, twist, or distortion. B.Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, oil, and other impurities. C.Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. D.Replace any damaged or otherwise disfigured doors with new prior to the Owner's final

acceptance. 3.04PROTECTION A.Protect door to prevent damage until final acceptance of the Work. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Sound Control Doors and Frames 27720.00 08385-1

SECTION 08385 SOUND CONTROL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide sound rated door assembly complete with door, door frame, threshold, seals,

and all associated hardware as indicated on the drawings. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 2.Section 08810 - Glazing. 3.Section 09900 - Painting. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08385.A"=Acoustically-rated doors. 2."08385.B"=Acoustically-rated frames. 1.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustic transmission loss test for door assemblies shall be in accordance with latest

version of ASTM E90. B.The entire sound rated door assembly including door, door frame, threshold, seals, and

all associated hardware and components shall be supplied as a set, and tested as a set for sound transmission loss as specified.

C.Doors shall meet or exceed the STC rating shown on the door schedule. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit a schedule of items to be provided under this section along

with specifications, installation recommendations, and construction details including seal types and arrangements, jointing, and assembly of various members, anchorage, and supports.

C.Shop Drawings: Show elevations of doors and full-size details showing thickness,

gages, glass type, frame type and profile, fixing details, door elevations and details including seal types and arrangements, jointing, and assembly of various members, anchorage, and supports.



D.Submit acoustical test reports for approval. The acoustical test and report shall be as follow:

1.Acoustical tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest version of ASTM Standard E90.

2.Sound Transmission Class ratings (STC) shall be determined according to the latest version of ASTM E413.

3.Acoustical test shall be conducted for the entire door assembly (i.e., door, frame, thresholds, and seals). Test shall be conducted in a certified acoustical testing laboratory, acceptable to the Architect.

4.Acoustical reports shall be prepared by an engineer/technician qualified in the work of this nature. The reports shall include the laboratory name, date of test, test report number, STC rating, and sound transmission loss (dB) values in octave band frequencies from 125 to 4000 Hz.

E.After installation, submit field report from qualified manufacturer's representative

confirming that door assemblies have been installed an adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Unless prior written approval of Architect is obtained, all materials specified (i.e., door,

frame, and all necessary hardware including thresholds and seals) in this section shall be furnished from a single door manufacturer, who has been engaged in the manufacture of sound rated doors for at least 5 years.

B. After completion of sound rated door installation, provide field inspection by qualified

manufacturer's representative to ensure that the door assemblies are installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver, store, and handle doors and frames in manner to prevent damage or

deterioration. 1.Refer to HMMA 840 "Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Coordination: Furnish necessary templates or actual assemblies where necessary

to ensure correct installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Krieger Steel Products Company, Overly Manufacturing Company, or Jamison Door

Company. 2.02MATERIALS A.Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial carbon steel, pickled and oiled,

complying with ASTM A568 and ASTM A569. B.Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial-quality carbon steel complying with ASTM

A366 and ASTM A568. C.Stainless Steel: ASTM A167; embossed finish. D.Hinges: As provided by manufacturer to meet the door assembly performance

requirements. E.Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units for the required application F.Doors shall be 1-3/4-inch thick, fabricated from not less than 16 gage steel and filled with

sound-absorbing and damping elements. G.Infill: Manufacturer's acoustic infill for minimum total door weight of 6 lbs/square foot. H.Seals: As supplied by door manufacturer to meet the door assembly performance

requirements specified. I.Threshold: Adjustable operable threshold seal acting against a flush floor surface. J.Where indicated on Drawings or otherwise required, provide a factory-installed glazed

vision light assembly in dimensions indicated and meeting the door assembly performance requirements specified.

K.Vision Frame at Animal Holding Facility: 1.Custom frame with 12-inch x 12-inch window complying with STC 55. 2.Anemostat "LoPro" No. 904 stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 3.Provide windows with stainless steel cover and magnetic catch as shown on Laboratory

Drawings. L.Gypsum plaster grout for frames. M.Shop-Applied Paint: Rust-inhibitive primer, either air dried or baked on, suitable as

a base for specified finish paints. N.Glazing: As specified in Section 08810.



2.03 FABRICATION A.Assemble the work of this Section using all-welded construction conforming to pertinent

requirements of AWS D1.1. B.Fabricate in strict accordance with the accepted shop drawings and with pertinent

requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. C.Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed

faces or stile edges. D.Projection Room Door: Fabricated acoustical door of frosted and translucent/laminated

glass as specified in Section 08810 with adhered stainless steel panels as shown on Drawings.

E.Painting and Cleaning: 1.On surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly, apply protective coating of the

manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer or other appropriate protection accepted in advance by the Architect.

2.After assembly thoroughly clean surfaces and apply a shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer to exposed surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be

installed and notify the Architect, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.

B.Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installation with related work specified in other Sections. B.Frames shall be set accurately in position, plumb, square, level, and in alignment and

shall be securely anchored in accordance with manufacturer's directions and accepted shop drawings.

C.Sound Rated Doors shall be installed in accordance with the recommended installation

instructions of the manufacturer. Install with the manufacturer's recommended tolerances for the specified STC ratings.

D.Fully grout door frames with lightweight gypsum plaster or concrete grout as

recommended by the door and frame manufacturer to achieve the door



assembly acoustic performance requirements. Seal airtight between frame and wall on both sides.

E.Door seals to be installed and adjusted according to door manufacturer's instruction. F.Install seals such that they are aligned and continuous. Hardware shall not interrupt the

continuity of door seals. G.Adjust seals to achieve continuous positive sealing. Seals to be evenly compressed

with adequate pressure to provide acoustic seal, without over compression or seal distortions.

H.Protect seals from damage and replace any damaged seals prior to acceptance. I.Do not allow the downward force exerted by an automatic seal against the floor to cause

binding at the head. Adjust threshold seal mechanism such that there is no friction or roll of the seal when the door is operated.

J.Install the threshold seals to accommodate partition movement and normal building

tolerances. K.No light to be visible around or through the door when viewed in darkness with room

lighting on the other side and any glazing blacked out. 3.03PROTECTION AND CLEANING A.After installation, doors and frames shall be protected from damage during subsequent

construction activities. B.Upon completion, metal surfaces shall be cleaned, following the procedures

recommended by the door manufacturer. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P All-Glass Door 27720.00 08451-1

SECTION 08451 ALL-GLASS DOOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide all-glass door as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 2.Section 08800 - Glazing. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08451.A"=All-glass doors. 2."08451.B"=Tempered glass. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's information on materials, components, and

installation. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate layouts, elevations, and details. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer's Qualifications: At least three installations of similar size and usage

that have been in place for at least 2 years, installed by the same installer who will install the doors for this Project.

B.Installer's Qualifications: Approved by and under the supervision of the all-glass

door manufacturer, with not fewer than 5 years' experience installing doors of this type.

C.Doors shall comply with applicable standards of California Building Standards Code

(CCR) Title 24 and ADA for barrier-free access. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver, store, and handle components in manufacturer's standard protective

packaging.


SMP/SHG-PCF&P All-Glass Door 27720.00 08451-2

B.Store components off the ground, in a protected location. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL-GLASS DOOR A.Glass: Tempered as specified in Section 08800; 1/2-inch minimum thickness. B.Hardware: As specified in Section 08710. C.Finish: 304 Stainless steel embossed finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of all-glass door. Do not

commence installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install door in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and accepted shop

drawings. B.Adjust door components to operate smoothly in compliance with manufacturer's

instructions. 3.03CLEANING A.Following completion of installation, clean both metal and glass surfaces of excess

sealants, paint, and other adhering foreign materials. Use cleaning materials and procedure recommended by door manufacturer.

3.04COMPLETION A.When complete, doors shall be set square, plumb, and level. B.Doors shall remain plumb in positions of swing and shall operate smoothly, quietly,

and free from binding. C.Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains,

discoloration, and other damage and defects. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Double-Glazed Acoustical Windows 27720.00 08589-1

SECTION 08589 DOUBLE-GLAZED ACOUSTICAL WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide fixed acoustical steel window complete including hardware and glazing as

shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 08385 - Sound Control Doors and Frames. 2.Section 08810 - Glazing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Sound Transmission Class (STC): As shown on the Drawings; tested in accordance

with ASTM E90. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, installation recommendations, and

standard details, including fabrication, finishing, hardware, and other compo-nents of the Work.

C.Shop Drawings: Elevations of window and full-size details showing thickness,

profiles, jointing, connections and assembly of all members, reinforcement, anchorage, and supports.

D.Samples of finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Krieger Steel Products. 2.02MATERIALS A.Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial-quality carbon steel complying with ASTM

A366 and ASTM A568.


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Double-Glazed Acoustical Windows 27720.00 08589-2

B.Glazing: Two hermetically sealed sheets of glass; 3/8 inch thick on one side with 90 percent white dot pattern silkscreened on #2 surface; 1/4 inch thick tempered glass on the other with 2-1/4-inch air space with sound-retardant filler.

C.Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard molded resilient neoprene rubber gasket. D.Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units for the required

application. E.Infill: 8-pound density acoustic infill for window frame. 2.03FABRICATION A.Frames: 1.Fabricate to profiles shown on Drawings for sloped installation. 2.Corners of frame shall be continuously welded. 3.Install infill in frame. B.Provide factory glazed windows. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Take measurements at the job and be responsible for same. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Work shall be performed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and

reviewed submittals. 1.Erection shall be plumb, level, square, and in proper alignment and relation-

ship to other work. 2.Assemblies shall be securely anchored to structure. 3.03CLEANING A.Marred, defaced, scratched, or otherwise defective items shall be refinished or

replaced, as determined by the Engineer, at no additional cost to Owner. B.Clean and polish glass and glazing surfaces not more than 7 days prior to acceptance of

the Work. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Metal-Famed Skylights 27720.00 08630-1

SECTION 08630 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide prefabricated skylight unit as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: wood curbs. 2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 4.Section 08800 - Glazing. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08630.A"=Aluminum Skylights. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design system to accommodate without damage or permanent deformation to system

components or deterioration of seals; movement within system; movement between system and perimeter framing components; dynamic loading and release of leads; and deflection of structural support framing.

B.Skylights shall comply with the standards of American Architectural Manufacturers

Association (AAMA) 1600 "Voluntary Specification for Skylights". 1.Air Infiltration: Skylights shall be tested in accordance to ASTM E283 at a test pressure

of 1.57 psf. The air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.5 cfm/ft of total curb inside perimeter.

C.Design Load: Design, fabricate, and install skylight capable of withstanding Code

required uniformly distributed live load acting inward or outward without failure, leaks, permanent distortion, and mullion deflection greater than specified.

D.Concentrated Load: Provide reinforcement and anchorage for a 250 pound minimum

concentrated live load applied to a 3-square-inch area anywhere on a horizontal, or inclined at less than 30 degrees from horizontal, skylight member subject to maintenance foot traffic or other loads imposed by human contact. No failures, component disengagement, permanent deformation, or mullion deflection greater than specified permitted.

E.Deflection: Limited to 1/180 of clear span or 3/4-inch, whichever is smaller, under fully

loaded conditions.



F.Design system to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction over ambient

temperature range of 100 degrees F, dynamic loading and release of loads, creep of concrete structural members, and deflection of structural support framing without damage to skylight system components or loss of weathertightness.

1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Drawings and manufacturer's printed literature indicating method

of construction; location and spacing of anchorage; joinery; finishes; size, shape, thickness, and alloy of materials; and anchorage to adjoining work.

1.04 WARRANTY A.Submit written warranty for skylights, agreeing to replace skylights which leak water,

deteriorate, or otherwise fail to perform as required within warranty period as a result of failure of materials or workmanship.

B.By terms of warranty also agree to remove and replace other work, as required,

which has been connected to or superimposed on substrate material to be replaced.

C.Warrant period for skylights shall be 3 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Supersky "Model 80-1", O'Keefee's Inc., or Naturalite. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Supporting Members: Extruded-aluminum ASTM B221 alloy 6063-T5. B.Exterior and Interior Caps: Extruded-aluminum ASTM B221 alloy 6063-T5,

thickness 0.094 inch minimum. C.Flashings, Trim, Closures, and Accessories: Sheet aluminum, alloy 5005H14, minimum

thickness .032-inch. D.Glazing: Insulated-laminated unit as specified in Section 08800. E.Fasteners: Exposed to exterior shall be stainless steel; other fasteners and internal



components shall be aluminum, cadmium-plated steel, or nonmagnetic stainless steel.

F.Corrosion Isolation: Bituminous paint of alkali-resistant type with minimum 15-mil

dry-film thickness. 2.03 FABRICATION A.General: Skylight assembly shall be a standard, premanufactured, flat glass unit,

curb-mounted, with all components required for a complete, weathertight installation.

B.Extruded-aluminum frames shall be mitered and full-penetration heliarc welded

watertight at corners. C.Fabricate skylights with weep slots, and make provision to drain condensation and

water infiltration to exterior. 2.04FINISH A.Finish for Exposed Aluminum: High performance organic finish complying with AAMA

2604 Designation AA-M12-C42-RIX, 70 percent Kynar-based. 1.Color: As selected by Architect from standard color range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces to which skylight will be attached are satisfactory for installation. If

unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install skylights in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop

drawings. B.Set units plumb, parallel to finished roof, and true to line without warp or rack. C.Upon completion of installation, skylight shall be weathertight, and free from

scratches, dents, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. 3.03 CLEANING A.Clean aluminum and lens surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



B.Glazing panels shall be left in clean, scratch-free condition, inside and out, with

labels removed. C.Repair damaged unit, or replace with new unit, including unit which has excessive

scratches as determined by the Architect. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Interior Glazing 27720.00 08810-1

SECTION 08810 INTERIOR GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide interior glazing and glazing materials as shown and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. 2.Section 08210 - Wood Doors. 3.Section 08385 - Sound Control Doors and Frames. 4.Section 08589 - Double-Glazed Acoustical Window: glazing at acoustical window. 5.Section 08800 - Exterior Glass and Glazing. 6.Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories: framed mirrors. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."08810.A"=Interior clear float glass. 2."08810.B"=Interior clear tempered glass. 3."08810.C"=Interior laminated glass. 4."08810.D"=Interior mirror glass. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Performance Requirements: 1.Each installation shall withstand impact loading (for operating sash and doors)

without failure of any kind, including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets.

2.Deflection: Maximum L/180 with full recovery of glazing material. B.Definitions: Deterioration of coated glass is defined as the development of manufac-

turing defects including peeling, cracking or other indications of deterioration in coating due to normal use.

1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's literature substantiating that glass and glazing

materials comply with specified requirements. C.Samples: 1.Frosted Glass: 10-inch x 10-inch samples.



2.Translucent/Laminated Glass: 10-inch x 10-inch samples. 3.Gaskets and Sealants: 12 inches long of each color and type. D.Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer

indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants, with test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.

E.Certification: Manufacturer's certification that glass and glazing materials comply with

specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Industry Standards: 1.Comply with Glass Association of North America's (GANA [formerly FGMA]) "Glazing

Manual," except as otherwise noted. 2.Glass shall comply with ASTM E1300 "Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness

and Type of Glass Required to Resist a Specific Load". 3.Insulating glass shall be certified under a Insulating Glass Certification Council

(IGCC) to be Level CBA rated in accordance with ASTM E773 and E774. 4.Mirror glass shall comply with North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers'

(NAAMM) "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors".

B.Regulatory Requirements: Safety glass shall be labeled in accordance with UBC

Section 2406. C.Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of all glass, gaskets, glazing

accessories, and glass framing members adjacent to glazing sealants, to sealant manufacturer for compatibility and adhesion testing in accordance with sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods.

1.Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work.

2.Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain sealant manufacturer's recommendations for correction.

D.Installer's Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified

under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver: Deliver glass with manufacturer's label indicating type, quality, and

thickness on each piece.



B.Storage: Store materials in the manufacturers' original, unopened packaging. 1.Glass in Cases: Store indoors in a dry, well-ventilated area, protected from

moisture. 2.Glass out of Cases: Store with interleaving or spacing between individual

lights of glass, protected from moisture. C.Handling: Handle glass in a manner to prevent damage to faces and edges. D.Follow additional instructions of manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A.On form furnished in Section 01774, submit written guarantee for the following. 1.Laminated Glass: Replace laminated glass units which develop edge separation or

delamination which materially obstructs vision through glass. a.Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 4 years. 2.Coated Glass: Replace coated glass units which develop peeling, cracking or deterio-

ration in coating due to normal conditions and not due to handling or inst-allation or cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.

a.Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years. B.By terms of warranty, also agree to remove or replace other work, as required, which

has been connected to or superimposed on substrate material to be replaced. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.PPG Industries, Inc., Libbey-Owens Ford Company, or Ford Glass, unless

otherwise specified. 2.02MATERIALS A.Float Glass, Clear: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3 or better. 1.Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for size of light to be glazed

and design loads. 2.Location: Interior, except where safety glazing is required by Code. B.Tempered Glass, Clear: ASTM C1036, Type I float glass as specified above and

conforming to requirements of ASTM C1048, Kind FT, and meeting ANSI Z97.1 test requirements.

1.Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for size of light to be glazed and design loads.



2.Location: Exterior and Interior, where safety glazing required by Code. C.Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172 Kind LHS [all heat strengthened], two sheets of glass

permanently factory laminated under heat and pressure with a .060-inch thick polyvinyl butyl interlayer; Viracon or Milgard Tempering.

1.Frosted: As selected by Architect. 2.Translucent: 90 percent white dot pattern silkscreened on #2 surface. 3.Glazing Channel: Stainless steel channel with finish to match stainless steel panels

specified in Section 08385. D.Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2; 3/16 inch thick. 1.Location: Interior, at Toilets. 2.Provide silver coating, copper-protective coating, and 1-mil-thick mirror

backing paint. 3.Grind smooth all exposed edges. 4.Mounting Hardware: J-channels with fasteners as recommended by

manufacturer. 5.Mounting Mastic: Palmer's "Mirro-Mastic" or equal. E.Glazing Compound and Sealant: Pecora Corporation "864", GE "Silpruf Sealant", or

equal. F.Glazing Blocks and Spacers: Closed-cell neoprene complying with ASTM C509, in

black color, except use silicone if recommended by manufacturer. G.Glazing Gasket: Molded or extruded neoprene gasket complying with ASTM

D2000 in black color. 2.03FABRICATION, GENERAL A.Glazing-channel dimensions are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on

glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.Provide correct glass size for each opening, within tolerances and necessary

dimensions established. B.Factory-label each pane of glass; do not remove labels until final acceptance is

obtained. C.Tong marks of tempered glass shall not be visible after glass is installed. 1.On each pane include an inconspicuous but visible permanent identifying label

in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. a.Fused to glass and located in a lower corner. b.Include manufacturer's name or trademark, glass type, thickness, and

designation of treatment. c.Maximum warpage in accordance with glass manufacturer's standards.



D.Laminated Glass: Fabricate to details shown on Drawings. Coordinate cut-outs for

door hardware specified in Section 08710 and stainless steel facings and acoustical door items specified in Section 08385.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Clean glazing channel or other framing members to receive glass immediately

before glazing. 1.Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate. B.Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any which

have observable edge damage or face imperfections. C.Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant

manufacturer. 1.Primer shall be applied to aluminum surfaces to receive silicone or polysulfide

sealants, unless sealant manufacturer certifies, in writing, that primer is not required.

3.02INSTALLATION A.Comply with GANA "Glazing Manual" except as shown or specified otherwise and

except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturers of glass, glazing materials, and frame.

B.Install correct glass size for each opening within tolerances and necessary

dimensions established. C.Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as

nearly as possible. 1.Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw, and bow oriented in same

direction as other pieces. D.Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip, or abrade glass which is tempered. E.Where pressure-sensitive tape is used for exterior glazing, provide silicone cap

bead sealant; no portion of tape shall be exposed to weather. F.Install mirror glass with bottom J-channel and mounting adhesive. G.Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops of frames promptly

after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations.



3.03REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING A.Replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged resulting

from construction, natural causes, accidents, or vandalism. B.Clean and polish glass and glazing surfaces not more than 7 days prior to

acceptance of Work. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing System 27720.00 09110-1

SECTION 09110 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Provide metal studs and channel framing of vertical and horizontal surfaces, as shown

and as specified. B.Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1.Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 2.Section 05410 - Exterior Enclosures Stud Framing. 3.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: expansion bolts. 4.Section 09120 - Ceiling Suspension Systems. 5.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: metal accessories. 6.Section 09545 - Specialty Ceiling: ACT-5. 7.Division 15 - Mechanical: ductwork and plumbing. 8.Division 16 - Electrical: conduit. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09110.A"=Metal stud and joist. 2."09110.B"=Metal shaftwall stud. 3."09110.C"=Deflection track at rated partitions. 4."09110.D"=Metal backing plates. 5."09110.E"=Accessories. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for

each type of steel studs required to show compliance with these Specifications. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Allowable Tolerance: Limit tolerance for bow and alignment to 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B.Welding Qualifications: Welding procedures, welders, and tackers shall be qualified in

accordance with AWS 1.3. C.Comply with requirements of Metal Stud Manufacturing Association (MSMA). 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Deliver products and materials in original unopened packages, containers, or bundles

with manufacturer's label intact and legible. B.Remove items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition from Project

site immediately. C.Protect metal studs from rusting and damage. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Coordinate location of ductwork, plumbing lines, and electrical conduit which conflict with

location of studs above ceiling. Provide bridging of studs where required particularly at catwalk area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURER A.Metal Manufacturer: Supply materials by one manufacturer. 1.Knorr Steel Framing. 2.Western Metal Lath. 3.Cemco. 2.02MATERIALS A.Materials shall comply with ASTM C645. B.Interior Studs and Joists: Punched webs, galvanized steel, nonbearing "CEE" stud;

Knorr "SS" section except as noted. ASTM A570 Grade 30, 20 gage typical, 18 gage where ceramic tile finish occurs, other gages where shown.

1.Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized. C.Track: "Screwable Track, 'SS' Series," gage to match studs, unpunched, galvanized

steel, 1-1/2-inch flanges. D.Compensating Channel: "T-DL" Deep leg Track, 16 gage, unpunched, 1-1/2-inch

flanges, rust inhibitive finish; throat dimension as needed to allow track to nest inside.

1.Contractor's Option: The Steel Network "VertiClip Slide Clip", Cemco "Sliptrack Systems, Inc.", or Fire Trak Corporation "Fire Trak System" in lieu of compensating channel and top track.

E.Horizontal Stiffeners: 16 gage, 3/4-inch and 1-1/2-inch cold-rolled steel channels, rust

inhibitive finish.



F.Backing Plates: Knorr "WC" Section unpunched. Steel sheet, plate, and unpunched

"Wide Flange" studs of gages or thickness scheduled, galvanized or rust inhibitive finish.

G.Cold Rolled Channels: 16 gage steel, 3/4-inch furring channels and 1-1/2-inch runner

channels, rust inhibitive finish. H.Furring Channels: Roll formed 25 gage galvanized steel, hat-shaped channels, 2-5/8

inches wide and 7/8 inches deep, with 1/2-inch flanges. I.Clips: 16-gage steel unless noted otherwise, of sizes and shapes shown. J.Angles: 20-gage galvanized steel, 1-1/2-inch x 1-1/2-inch. K.Z-Channel: 25 gage galvanized steel, 1-1/2-inch deep. L.Shaft Wall: 1.20-gage, I-stud and sill track, 2-1/2 inches wide, galvanized. 2.20-gage, C-H-stud and sill track, 2-1/2 inches wide, galvanized. M.Fasteners: Grabber, as manufactured by John Wagner Associates, Inc., to suit stud,

track, or channel gage. 1.Sheet Metal Screws To Be Overlaid With Gypsum Wallboard or Other Finish Material: a.No. 8 by 9/16-inch Wafer Head Streaker for fastening 20-gage material. b.No. 8 by 1/2-inch wafer Head Self-Drilling for fastening 18-gage and above material.

Length and gage as required and as indicated. 2.Sheet Metal Screws Not Overlaid with Finish Material: a.No. 8 by 9/16-inch Hex Head Streaker for fastening 20-gage material. b.Hex Head Self-Drilling for fastening 18-gage and above material; No. 8 by 1/2-inch

minimum. Length and gage as required and as indicated. c.Others: As shown. 3.Powder-Actuated Devices (PAD): .145-inch diameter with 1-1/8-inch penetration; Hilti

DN-32-P8. 4.Expansion Bolts: As specified in Section 05500. 5.Concrete Nails: Case hardened stub nails 3/4 inch long. 6.Wire: 16-gage annealed galvanized steel tie wire. N.Welding Electrodes: AWS, low hydrogen type, as required. O.Miscellaneous Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, suitable for the use intended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION



A.Examine conditions under which metal support systems will be installed. B.Notify the Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely

completion of the Work. C.Proceed when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install Work in accordance with the applicable requirements of Metal Stud Manufacturing

Association (MSMA), AWS, and ASTM C754. B.Framing and furring work shall be plumb, straight, true and rigid. Fire rated partitions

shall conform to requirements of regulatory agencies for minimum fire resistance ratings.

C.Interior Framing: 1.Frame partitions from floor to structure above at 16 inches on center, unless otherwise

noted. 2.Use track at floor and structure above. Provide compensating channel at structure

above as shown. 3.Use stud type and gages as follows: a.At Backing Plates all Areas: Gage and type as shown. b.At All Other Partitions: 20-gage metal studs, unless otherwise shown. 4.Openings: Frame and reinforce openings for doors, windows, and ducts, as shown. 5.Fasten runner track at 2-foot centers and 2 inches from ends, or as shown. a.To Concrete Slab: With powder actuated devices. 6.Secure studs in floor tracks with sheet metal screws to suit stud gage. Provide welded,

bolted or screwed connections as shown or required. 7.Install accessories and miscellaneous specialties to plumb, true and level lines, including

other materials furnished and located as part of the Work of other Sections.

8.Provide backing plates as scheduled and detailed of length to fasten each end to metal

framing. Provide backing plate support for each point of fastening of any unit to be anchored. Provide backing plates for Owner-furnished casework and equipment as shown.

9.Furred Spaces: Provide furring channels at 16-inch centers vertically or as shown. Fasten at top and bottom and tie to horizontal furring channels at 4-foot centers. Fasten furring brackets to concrete with powder-actuated devices.

10.Studs and portions of studs without finish shall be braced as shown. 11.Joisted Ceiling: Frame studs as shown. D.Provide welded, bolted, or screwed connections as shown or required. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Ceiling Suspension System 27720.00 09120-1

SECTION 09120 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Provide metal framing suspension system for the following as shown on the Drawings

and as specified: 1.Gypsum board. 2.Lay-in acoustical panels. 3.Gypsum plaster. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: expansion bolts. 2.Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels. 3.Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster. 4.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 5.Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. 6.Division 15 - Mechanical: diffusers, sprinklers. 7.Division 16 - Electrical: light fixtures. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09120.A"=Gypsum board suspension system. 2."09120.B"=Acoustical ceiling suspension system. 3."09120.C"=Gypsum plaster suspension system. 4."09120.D"=Hanger wire. 5."09120.E"=Seismic wire. 6."09120.F"=Compression posts. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings, including: 1.Layout of suspension systems, location of hangers, seismic braces and trapezes. a.Lay out suspension system so that ceiling panel is not less than 6 inches or as shown. 2.Insert and hanger spacing and fastening details. 3.Trapeze details. 4.Splicing method for main and cross runners. 5.Support at ceiling fixtures and air diffusers. 6.Change in level details. 7.Locations and dimensions of access doors, light fixtures, supply and exhaust grilles



and diffusers, sprinkler heads, and detection devices. 8.Acoustical unit support at ceiling fixtures. 9.Seismic control details. 10.Develop and coordinate location of all Work which is to be located in ceiling with the

Sections involved prior to making shop drawing submittal. C.Product Data: Manufacturer's information on materials, fabrication, and installation. D.Samples of suspension system components. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Allowable Tolerance: 1.Deflection: Not to exceed a maximum of L/360 of span. 2.Level: a.Gypsum Board and Acoustical Ceilings: Finished suspended ceilings shall not

deviate from level in excess of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. b.Gypsum Plaster Ceiling: Maximum tolerance for flatness at furring channel grillage

shall be 1/8-inch in 8 feet in any direction. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver products and materials in original unopened packages, containers, or bundles

with manufacturer's label intact and legible. B.Remove items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition from

Project site immediately. C.Follow additional delivery, storage, and handling requirements of the manufacturer. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Work which will be concealed by suspended ceilings shall be complete, tested if

required, and inspected and approved prior to commencement of installation of materials specified herein.

B.Do not commence installation until the area has been closed in, and temperature and

humidity conditions are similar to those expected during building occupancy. C.Wet work shall be complete and cured, prior to commencement of installation of

suspended ceilings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.01MATERIALS A.Types specified are products of Western Metal Lath Company. Structural

characteristics and quality of substitutions shall meet or exceed those of types specified and referenced standards.

1.Runner Channels: 16-gage galvanized steel, 1-1/2 inches by 1.12 pounds per foot cold rolled channel.

2.Cross Furring: 7/8-inch hat-shaped channels, 25-gage cold-rolled, galvanized steel channel at gypsum board ceilings; 3/4-inch x 16 gage at metal lathed ceilings.

3.Clips: 16-gage galvanized steel, of sizes and shapes shown. 4.Metal strut or a 16-gage wire lateral tie. B.Hanger and Bracing Attachment Brackets: 3-inch-x-4-inch-x-18-gage bent steel

straps secured to metal decking with two No. 8-x-1/2-inch self-tapping screws or accepted anchorage complying with governing codes.

C.Fasteners: To suit channel gage. 1.Sheet Metal Screws: As specified in Section 09110. 2.Expansion Bolts: a.Tie Wire: Hilti Kwik Bolt "HKT 14" or Ramset/Red Head "TW", with minimum

1-1/2-inch embedment. b.Others: As specified in Section 05500. 3.Concrete Nails: Case hardened stub nails; minimum 3/4 inch long. 4.Powder-Actuated Devices (PAD's): .145-inch diameter with 15/16-inch penetration. D.Wire: 1.16-gage soft-annealed galvanized steel tie wire. 2.12-gage soft-annealed galvanized steel hanger/seismic wire. 3.10-gage soft-annealed galvanized steel hanger wire. 4.9-gage soft-annealed galvanized steel hanger wire. 5.8-gage soft-annealed galvanized steel hanger wire. E.Welding Electrodes: AWS, low hydrogen type, as required. F.Miscellaneous Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, suitable for the use intended. G.Compression Posts: Electrical metallic tubing (EMT); diameter as shown. H.Suspension System for Acoustical Ceiling: All components shall be products of the

same manufacturer. 1.Suspension System: Chicago Metallic "Ultraline 3500" or Armstrong World Industries;

intermediate duty system complying with ASTM C635. 2.Perimeter Angles and Corner Caps and Pieces: Same material as that of suspension

system, 15 gage at fixed side of corridors with hemmed edge, typical. Provide shadow moulding as shown on the Drawings.



3.Miscellaneous Accessories: Manufacturer's standard for use with suspension system furnished; furnish as required.

4.Hanger Wires: Soft-annealed galvanized complying with ASTM C636. 5.Finish: Manufacturer's Factory White low-gloss paint. 6.Compression Posts: Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT); diameter as shown. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine conditions under which ceiling support systems will be installed. B.Notify the Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely

completion of the Work. C.Proceed when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Gypsum Board Ceiling Suspension System: 1.Hanger Wires: a.Provide 8-gage hanger wires at 4-foot centers. b.Fasten hanger wires with not less than 3 tight turns. Make all tight turns within a

distance of 1-1/2 inches. Hanger wire anchors to the structure should be installed in such a manner that the direction of wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire.

c.At Concrete: Attach with Hilti CC/27/DN/27P8T. 2.Maintain 6-inch minimum clearance between all wires and unbraced ducts, pipes and

conduit. 3.Space runner channels at 4-feet centers maximum; saddle-tie to hanger wire with 2

loops secured with no less than 3 turns in 1-1/2 inches maximum. 4.Locate one runner channel within 8 inches of parallel partition where metal furring is

not continuous through partition. 5.Support runner channel with hanger wire 8 inches or 1/4 length of end span maximum

from end of channel. 6.Splice main runners by lapping and interlocking flanges 12 inches minimum. Tie near

each with double loops of 16-gage wire. 7.Space metal furring at 16-inch centers; saddle-tie with 16-gage tie wire to runner

channels with tie wire and with no less than 3 turns. 8.Splice metal furring by lapping and interlocking 8 inches minimum. Tie near each end

with double loops of 16-gage wire. 9.Form vertical ceiling sections as shown and as required. 10.Provide framing as required for access doors, furnished under Divisions 15 and 16 for



installation as specified in Section 08310. a.Seismic Wires: 1)Four 12-gage galvanized steel wires splayed at 45 degrees vertically and spaced at 90

degrees to each other horizontally. Attach to main runner within 2 inches of compression posts.

2)Fasten bracing wires with four tight turns. Make all turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches. Bracing wire anchors to the structure should be installed in such a manner that the direction of the wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire. Provide connection between diagonal wires and main runner so as to prevent slipping for a 200-pound approximate load.

a)Wire turns made by machine where both strands have been deformed or bent in wrapping can waive the 1-1/2-inch requirement, but the number of turns should be maintained, and be as tight as possible.

3)Attach to concrete with tie wire power driven fasteners. Anchor projection below concrete; 1-inch maximum.

c.Compression Posts: Provide at seismic wire locations. Compression posts shall not replace hanger wire.

B.Acoustical Ceiling Suspension System: Install in accordance with requirements of

ASTM C636, the manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the Drawings.

1.Layout to provide border units of largest possible size to relate to light fixtures, diffusers, and sprinklers, and for symmetrical effect in each space.

2.Hanger Wires: a.Provide Hanger Wires at 4-foot centers, maximum. At concrete attach with loop or

other deformation to positively bond with concrete or attach with powder actuated device.

b.Fasten hanger wires with not less than 3 tight turns. Make all tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches. Hanger wire anchors to the structure should be installed in such a manner that the direction of the wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire.

c.Maintain 6 inches minimum clearance between all wires and unbraced ducts, pipes and conduit.

d.Wire Gage: 1)Hanger Wires: 12 gage at inaccessible areas, 10 gage at accessible areas. 2)Seismic Bracing: 12 gage. 3.Grid System: a.Space main grid members at 4-foot centers maximum; tie with hanger wire with no

less than 3 diagonal turns within 1-1/2 inches. Locate hanger wires at 2 corners of each flush or lay-in light fixture and air terminals or services weighing less than 56 pounds. Anchor wires to structure above. At corridors run main grid members



perpendicular to walls. b.Install secondary grid members at 2-foot centers maximum with positive splice across

main grid members to form 2-foot by 2-foot grid. At corridors provide positive connection to main and other secondary grid members with through connectors.

c.Support main and cross grid members with hanger wire 8 inches or 1/4 length of end span maximum from end of member at ceiling perimeters.

d.Install wall angle to walls as shown. e.At rooms attach grid members to wall angles at two adjacent walls. Do not attach at

opposing walls. At opposing wall, maintain 1/2 inch clearance between wall and grid, and interconnect grid members with angle strut as shown.

f.At corridors attach grid members to wall angle on one side, and sliding angle set on wall angle, opposite side as shown.

g.At corridor intersections and where shown provide spring clip type expansion joint cover.

h.Provide counterbrace wires where hanger wires are more than 1 horizontal to 6 vertical out of plumb.

i.At the perimeter of the ceiling area where main or cross grid members are not connected to the adjacent wall, provide 16 gage wire or metal strut interconnection, with positive mechanical connection to grid members, between grid members to prevent lateral spreading. Where perpendicular distance from wall to first parallel grid member is 12 inches of less, this interconnection is not required.

j.Provide trapeze or other supplementary support members at obstructions to maintain hanger spacing. Provide additional hangers, struts, or braces as required at all ceiling breaks, soffits or discontinuous area.

4.Seismic Restraint: Provide as shown on Drawings. C.Prior to installation of acoustical materials: 1.Remove and replace suspension system components that have been damaged or

improperly installed. 2.Clean suspension system of dirt, grease, and other foreign matter. D.Gypsum Cement Plaster Suspended Ceiling; 1.Install in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Building Code, ASTM

C1063, ML/SFA 920, and as shown on the Drawings. 2.Hanger Wires: a.Provide 8-gauge hanger wires 3'-6" on center in rows 3'-6" apart. b.Fasten hanger wires with not less than 3 tight turns. Make all tight turns within a

distance of 1-1/2 inches. Hanger wire anchors to the structure should be installed in such a manner that the direction of wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire.

c.At Concrete: Attach with Hilti CC/27/DN/27P8T.



d.Maintain 6-inch minimum clearance between all wires and unbraced ducts, pipes and conduit.

3.Channels: a.Space runner channels at 3'-6" centers maximum; saddle-tie to hanger wire with 2

loops secured with no less than 3 turns in 1-1/2 inches maximum.

b.Locate one runner channel within 6 inches of parallel partition where metal furring is not continuous through partition.

c.Support runner channel with hanger wire 8 inches or 1/4 length of end span maximum from end of channel.

d.Splice main runners by lapping and interlocking flanges 12 inches minimum. Tie near each with double loops of 16-gage wire.

e.Space metal furring at 16-inch centers; saddle-tie with 16-gage tie wire to runner channels with tie wire and with no less than 3 turns.

f.Splice metal furring by lapping and interlocking 8 inches minimum. Tie near each end with double loops of 16-gage wire.

g.Form vertical ceiling sections as shown and as required. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Lath and Plaster 27720.00 09200-1

SECTION 09200 LATH AND PLASTER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following plaster work complete as shown on the Drawings and as

specified. 1.Metal lath with three coat Portland cement plaster; vertical installation. 2.Rib lath with three coat Portland cement plaster; horizontal installation. 3.Metal lath with gypsum plaster; arched installation. 4.Veneer plaster on veneer plaster base board (Auditorium Area). B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 2.Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows. 3.Section 08900 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall. 4.Section 09120 - Ceiling Suspension System: for horizontal cement plaster and gypsum

plaster. 5.Section 09900 - Painting. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09200.A"=Portland cement plaster. 2."09200.B"=Metal lath, diamond mesh. 3."09200.C"=Rib lath. 4."09200.D"=1/2" thick gypsum sheathing. 5."09200.E"=Building paper. 6."09200.F"=Gypsum plaster veneer. 7."09200.G"=Expansion joint. 8."09200.H"=Reveal. 9."09200.I"=Not used 10."09200.J"=5/8" thick veneer gyp. plaster base board 11."09200.K"=Gypsum plaster. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature identifying materials to be used,

standard colors for finish coat, and instructions for mixing and application of plaster.

C.Samples: Provide three 12-inch x 12-inch samples of cement plaster mounted on



hardboard for approval to proceed with mock-up. Architect will provide three different travertine color paint chips showing colors to be matched. Samples to have sand texture.

D.Mock-up: Provide three 2'-6" x 5'-0" cement plaster mock-up panels using the color and

textures of the approved sample boards. Plaster work to be done at the building site. Use approved casing beads. Mount the panels vertically, facing south adjacent to a 2'-6" x 5'-" travertine panel for Architect's final selection and approval of cement plaster color, texture, and workmanship.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with applicable requirements of the following American Society for Testing

and Materials (ASTM) documents: 1.C926 "Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster." 2.C1063 "Standard Specification for Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Based

Plaster." B.Comply with Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (ML/SFA) Guide Specifications for

Metal Lathing and Furring. C.Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install cement plaster to meet the

requirements of the Uniform Building Code (UBC), Chapter 14 and 25. D.Allowable Tolerances: Brown coat of plaster shall have a maximum deviation from

true plane of 1/4 inch as measured from the line of a 10-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface.

E.Applicator Qualifications: Application of specified plaster system on at least three

projects equal in scope to this Work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver manufactured materials in original unopened packages or containers with

manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B.Keep plastering materials dry, stored off ground, under cover, and away from damp

surfaces. C.Remove wet and deteriorated materials from Project site. D.Protect metallic materials and accessories from dampness or wetting. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements:



1.Protect cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. 2.In cold weather, plaster materials and areas of plaster application shall be maintained

above 40 degrees F one week prior to plastering, during plastering, and for 30 days after plastering is completed.

B.Protection: 1.Protect finished surfaces installed prior to plastering as required to prevent

damage to the finished surfaces. 2.Maintain protection in place until completion of the plastering. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE SUBCONTRACTORS A.Mowery-Thompson, Inc. 1225 N. Red Gum Street Anaheim, CA 92806 B.Berger Brothers Plastering 154 N. Aspen Ave. Azusa, CA 91702-3521 C.W.F. Hayward Co. 1264 W. 130th Street Gardena, CA 90247 D.Froelich Bros., Inc. 6371 Western Avenue Buena Park, CA 90621 2.02 LATHING MATERIALS A.Exterior Components: ASTM A525, G60, galvanized. 1.Exposed Exterior Components: Galvanized. 2.Anchorage and Fastening: Approved devices of type and size to suit

application and to rigidly secure system. B.Exterior Metal Lath: Galvanized diamond mesh; minimum 3.4 pounds per square

yard. 1.Self-Furring: Self-furred, V-groove lath where over solid substrate, provide to

hold lath approximately 1/4 inch from supporting base. C.Rib Lath: Expanded 3/8-inch rib expanded metal lath, 3.4 pounds per square yard,

galvanized, for 24-inch framing spacing. D.Casing Beads and Base Screeds: Minimum 26 gage, square edge casing beads,



USG No. 66 or equal; drip type base screeds. 1.Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Fry Reglet reveal molding "VPR2-375-375" or equal. E.External Corner Reinforcements: Galvanized welded wire corner reinforcement,

rigid nosed, not exceeding 3/16 inch, with expanded flanges at least 2-1/2 inches wide; Stockton "Corneraid", USG "1A", or Western Metal Lath.

F.Ventilating Screeds: H.K. Porter Co. Inc."No. 115" or Western Metal Lath, 26 gage

galvanized. G.Expansion Joints, Interior and Exterior (Two-piece Type): Fry "PCS 75-50

2-Piece"; 1/2-inch wide, painted to match gypsum plaster or cement plaster color; furr out as required for plaster thickness.

H.Reveal: 1.Exterior: Aluminum channel screed; Fry "PCS-75-50" painted to match cement plaster;

furr out as required for plaster. 2.Interior, Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Fry "F" reveal molding VPR-375-375. I.Gypsum Veneer Plaster Corner Bead: Corner bead for 3/32-inch grounds with flanges

of 1--1/4-inch fine mesh, equivalent to US Gypsum "Sheetrock Corner Bead No. 900".

J.Fasteners: Power driven 3/8-inch head, corrosion resistant type, minimum 1-inch;

Pneutek with nylon washer. K.Accessories: Tie wire, nails, screws and other approved metal supports, or type

and size to suit application. L.Building Paper (Felt): Comply with requirements of FS UU-B-790, Type I, 60-minute

Grade D, vapor permeable, Style 2; Fortifiber 60 minute Super Jumbo Tex. M.Metal Flashing: Galvanized sheet metal as shown on Drawings. 2.03 SHEATHING MATERIALS A.Gypsum Lath: ASTM C79, 1/2 inch thick, 4 feet wide, square edged. B.Gypsum Plaster Base: ASTM C588 Type X; product design for use with gypsum

veneer plaster systems; equivalent to US Gypsum Company "Imperial Gypsum Base".

1.Size: Thickness as noted; 48-inch width; minimum 96-inch length or longer as required.

2.04 CEMENT MATERIALS



A.Basecoat Materials: 1.Portland Cement: Normal Type I or II, ASTM C150. 2.Lime: ASTM C206, Type S. 3.Fibers: 1/4- to 1/2-inch-long chopped strands, Alkaline Resistant fiberglass,

Nylon or Polypropylene. 4.Sand: ASTM C144 with the following gradation: Sieve SizePercent Retained on US Standard Sieve MinimumMaximum No. 4 - 0 No. 8 0 10 No. 1610 40 No. 3030 65 No. 5070 90 No. 10095100 No. 20097100 5.Water: Potable and free from substances harmful to plaster. B.Finishing Materials: 1.Provide factory-prepared product containing materials required for finish coat, except

water. 2.Cement Plaster Texture and Color: Integral custom color to match travertine; texture:

sand. C.Gypsum Veneer Plaster: 2-coat system consisting of US Gypsum "Diamond

Basecoat and Finish Coat" or National Gypsum; 1/16-inch to 3/32-inch each. 1.Texture: Smooth. D.Gypsum Plaster at Arched Ceiling: To be determined. 2.05 PLASTER MIXES A.Mixing: 1.General: a.Accurately proportion water and cement materials for each plaster batch

with measuring devices of known volume. b.Size batches for complete use within maximum of 1 hour after mixing. c.Do not use caked or lumping materials, and remove such materials from

jobsite immediately. d.Mix factory-prepared cement plaster in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions. e.Use moist, loose sand in mix proportions. f.Withhold 10 percent of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then

add as needed to produce necessary consistency. 2.Mechanical Mixing: a.Clean mixer of set or hardened materials before loading for new batch.



b.Maintain mixer in continuous operation while adding materials. c.Conform to mixing sequence, cycle of operation, and time recom-

mended by manufacturer or plaster materials. 3.Hand Mixing: Do not hand-mix unless small amounts are needed, using less

than one bag of plaster material. B.Basecoat Mix Proportions by Volume for Portland Cement Lime Plaster: 1.First Coat: (For 3-coat work over metal lath). a.One part Portland cement. b.Maximum one part lime. c.Maximum four parts sand per sum of cementitious materials. d.1 to 1-1/2 pounds chopped glass fiber strands per sack of Portland

cement. 2.Second Coat: a.One part Portland cement. b.Maximum one part lime. c.Maximum four and one-half parts sand per sum of cementitious mater-

ials. d.1 to 1-1/2 pounds chopped glass fiber strands per sack of Portland cement. C.Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Mix in strict accordance with specifications of approved

manufacturer. D.Gypsum Plaster at Arched Ceiling: Mix in strict accordance with specifications of

approved manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.Prior to application ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to

receive cement plaster have been tested and approved. B.Ensure framing has been properly installed and rigidly secured. C.Verify surfaces to be plastered are free of dust, loose particles, oil, and other foreign

matter which would affect bond of plaster coats. D.Examine construction, grounds, and accessories to ensure that finished plaster

surfaces will be true to line, level, and plumb, without requiring additional thickness of plaster.

3.02 INSTALLATION A.Erect lathing and plaster in accordance with applicable recommendations of

ML/SFA, ASTM C926, and ASTM C1063.



B.Isolation: Isolate work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of

building loads into plaster as shown on the Drawings. C.Frame both sides of expansion joints independently, do not bridge joints with furring

and lathing or accessories. D.Install gypsum lath and sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

including fastener type and spacing. E.Gypsum Veneer Plaster Base: Install board with face side out. Do not install

imperfect, damaged, or damp panels; butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16-inch of open space between panels.

F.Building Paper and Air Barrier: 1.The building paper backing shall be attached to the gypsum lath separately, or

held in place by, the metal lathing, and shall not obstruct the furred spacing of the lath.

2.Provide metal flashing, building paper, and air barrier at all parapet caps, ledges and other horizontal surface locations as shown on Drawings; use Grade D at all other locations unless otherwise indicated.

3.Apply building paper in a shingled fashion, end laps of paper installed separately form the lath shall be lapped 6 inches and paper applied to the lath at the factory shall be lapped 2 inches. Schedule application so as to preclude prolonged exposure of the building paper to the sun or inclement weather.

G.Flashing: Provide lapped flashing around windows and doors as shown on the

Drawings and as recommended by California Window Manufacturer's Association (CWMA).

1.Flashing Penetrations: a.Flash around all openings with a strip of flashing membrane at least 9 inches wide and

adhesively sealed to the frames. b.Apply horizontally underneath sill attachment flange and extend past each side of

window, door or vent, fastening at top only. c.Apply vertical side sections of flashing over attachment flanges, extending past the

opening. d.Apply top horizontal section overlapping and sealed against the full height of the outer

face of the top nailing flange with a continuous bead of sealant. 2.Apply weather resistant barrier in shingle fashion, fully lapped with flashing. a.Apply under sill strip flashing at windows and over flashing at heads and jamb. H.Plaster Ceilings: Wire tie metal rib lath to furring channels or studs. Screwed lath is

prohibited. Apply lath with long dimensions at right angle to supports. Lap ends over supports 1-inch minimum. Butt ends into corners. Lap sides 1/2-inch. Wire tie sides and corner joints at 12-inch centers.



I.Install expansion and control joints in locations as shown on Drawings. J.Metal Lathing: Apply lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.

Secure side laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. Lap ends minimum 1 inch and sides 1/2 inch.

1.Run lath continuously at internal corners or terminate with casing bead. Stop lath at either side of control joints.

2.Self-furred type lath shall be secured to framing at furring points as much as possible. 3.Fasteners: Spaced maximum 6 inches on center. All ceiling lath to be wire tied to

3/4-inch cold rolled channels. 4.Apply rib lath for horizontal plaster application. K.Application of Cement Plaster: In accordance with system manufacturer's printed

instructions. 1.Start and stop cement plaster application only at junctions of plaster planes, at

openings, and at control joints. a.Do not make cold joints in plaster. 2.Plaster Thickness Measured from Face of Lath: 7/8 in total minimum. a.First (Scratch) Coat: 3/8 inch. b.Second (Brown) Coat: 3/8 inch. c.Third (Finish) Coat: 1/8 inch. 3.Scratch and Brown Coats: a.Apply scratch coat with sufficient material to embed and fill spaces of

lath and to form keys through metal lath. b.Allow scratch coat to set slightly, then score surface using metal

scratching tool with teeth 1 inch apart. c.Score surfaces in direction perpendicular to direction of supporting

framing; cure as specified. d.Apply brown coat to scratch coat, bringing out to grounds, flat to true

surface, and free of imperfections which would reflect in finish coat. e.Reconsolidate brown coat by floating, and roughen to assure bond with

finish coat; cure as specified. 4.Finish Coat: Apply in accordance with manufacturer' recommendations for

specified texture. L.Cement Plaster Curing: 1.Maintain moist conditions by fine fog spray morning and evening to scratch

coat and to brown coat during the first 48 hours of curing. 2.Permit brown coat to dry a minimum 5 days after moist curing. 3.Cure proprietary finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. M.Gypsum Veneer Plastering: Apply gypsum veneer plaster to comply with ASTM C843

and gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 1.Do not apply gypsum veneer plaster to gypsum base if face paper has faded from

exposure to light. Before applying gypsum veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restor bonding capability to faded face paper according to



manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by Architect. 2.Mix in strict accordance with directions of approved manufacturer. 3.Apply base coat over entire area immediately doubling back with plaster from

same batch to full thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections. Leave surface rough or cross-rake with fine wire rack. Allow basecoat to set to provide suction for finish coat.

4.Scratch-in and double-back with finish coat to full plaster thickness of 1/8 inch. Final trowel after surface has become firm. Use water sparingly and do not over-trowel.

5.Finish exposed surfaces true, even, without waves, cracks, or imperfections. 6.Remove areas which display cracks, blisters, pits, checks or discoloration and

replace with new plaster to match approved finish. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Patching: 1.Upon completion, point up plaster around trim and other locations where

plaster meets dissimilar materials. 2.Cut out and patch defective or damaged plaster. 3.Match patch of defective or damaged plaster to existing work in form and

texture. B.Cleaning: Remove plaster and protective materials from expansion beads,

perimeter beads, and adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Gypsum Board 27720.00 09250-1

SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide gypsum board construction complete as shown and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 2.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing System. 3.Section 09120 - Ceiling Suspension System. 4. Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster: gypsum lathing. 5.Section 09300 - Tile. 6.Section 09720 - Epoxy Flooring and Wall Covering Systems. 7.Section 09820 - Acoustical Insulation and Sealants: sound isolation. 8.Section 09900 - Painting. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09250.A"=5/8" thick Type X gypsum board. 2."09250.B"=1/2" thick Type X gypsum board. 3."09250.C"=1" thick shaftwall liner panel. 4."09250.D"=5/8" thick water-resistant gypsum board. 5."09250.E"=5/8" thick Type X water-resistant gypsum board. 6."09250.F"=5/8" thick tile backer board gypsum board. 7."09250.G"=1/2" thick tiel backer board gypsum board. 8."09250.H"=High-abuse gypsum board. 9."09250.I"=Metal reveal. 10."09250.J"=Gypsum sheathing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements; 1.Gypsum board throughout the Project, including accessories and fasteners,

shall be produced by one manufacturer. 2.Construction Tolerances: a.Gypsum board surfaces to be painted shall have no measurable

variation in any 2-foot direction and a maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet 0 inches when a straightedge is laid on the surface in any direction. See Section 09300 for tolerances required for surfaces to receive tile.

b.Shim work as required to comply with specified tolerances.



c.Do not exceed 1/16-inch offset between planes of abutting sheets at edges or ends.

1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: 1.Fire-Resistance Ratings: a.Comply with fire-resistance ratings as indicated and required by

governing authorities and codes. b.Provide materials, accessories, and application procedures which have

been listed by a nationally recognized testing agency or tested ac-cording to ASTM E119 for type of construction shown.

B.Industry Standards: Work shall comply with the applicable requirements of

Gypsum Association (GA) as follows: 1.GA-214: "Levels of Gypsum Board Finish." 2.GA-216: "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Board." 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store materials inside under cover and stack flat. B.Stack gypsum board so that long lengths are not over short lengths. C.Gypsum board shall not be stored or stacked on floors of new work in excess of 40

pounds per square foot equivalent loading. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: 1.Temperature: During cold weather, in areas receiving gypsum board

installation, maintain temperature range between 55 degrees and 70 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and after gypsum board and joint treatment application.

2.Ventilation: a.Provide ventilation during and following adhesives and joint-treatment

applications. b.Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural

ventilation. c.Under slow drying conditions allow additional drying time between coats

of joint treatment. d.Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather. B.Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces against damage and stains. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: 1.Regular Board: a.ASTM C36. b.Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise noted. c.Edges: Tapered and rounded. 2.Water-Resistant Board: a.ASTM C630. b.Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise noted. c. Edges: Tapered. 3.Fire-Rated Board: a.ASTM C36, Type X or Type C as required by fire-rated design. b.Thickness: 5/8 inch, except 1/2 inch where radius required. c.Edges: Tapered and rounded. 4.Fire-Rated Water-Resistant Board: a.ASTM C630, Type X or Type C as required by fire-rated design. b.Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise noted. c.Edges: Tapered. 5.High-Abuse Gypsum Board: Same as typical gypsum board specified above except

with specially formulated core and smooth white abrasion resistant finish paper.

a.Manufacturer: US Gypsum "Fiberoc VHI". 6.Gypsum Board Sheathing: Georgia Pacific "Dens Glass Gold". B.Shaft-Liner Board: 1.ASTM C442. 2.Thickness: 1 inch. 3.Edges: Square. C.Laminating Adhesive: As recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for

laminating gypsum board together in fire-rated construction. D.Fasteners: 1.Screws: Philips head with bugle shape, Type S, conforming to ASTM C1002.

Provide stainless steel screws at magnet room. 2.Sizes of fasteners shall be as required by code and as recommended by

gypsum board manufacturer. E.Metal Reinforcements and Casing: Electro-galvanized or zinc-coated as specified. 1.Exterior Corner: Fine-mesh expanded steel wing type, zinc-coated in conformance

with ASTM A525, G90 coating designation, or ASTM A164, Type GS. 2.Reveal at Gypsum Board with Dissimilar Material: Fry "Z" molding

"DRMZ-625-50 (or DRMZ-625-160 for 1" Reveals). 3.Ceiling Edge Trim: USG "L-Trim No. 801 Expanded Flange". 4.Control Joints: USG "L-Trim" spaced 1/2-inch apart.



5.Reveal: Fry "DRM-625-50", 1/2-inch aluminum reveal. F.Joint-Treatment Materials: 1.Joint Tape: ASTM C475. 2.Joint Compounds: Complying with ASTM C475. Provide the following types

as required: a.Joint compounds for taping and topping. b.All-Purpose joint compound. c.Joint compound for water-resistant board; USG Easy Sand or equal. G.Miscellaneous Items: Furnish components not specified but shown on the

Drawings and other items required to complete the installation. H.Gypsum Board Finish Coat: US Gypsum "Sheetrock First Coat or Sheetrock Drywall

Primer" or Hamilton "Prep Coat". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Check framing for accurate spacing and alignment. B.Verify that spacing of installed framing does not exceed maximum allowable for

thickness of gypsum board to be used. C.Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board until deficiencies are corrected

and surfaces to receive gypsum board are acceptable. D.Protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, or unaligned members shall be

repaired before installation of gypsum board is started. E.Clean partition cavities prior to installation of gypsum board. 3.02 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A.General: Work shall comply with applicable requirements of GA-216 (ASTM C840),

except where more stringent requirements are specified; by local codes; or by manufacturer of gypsum board.

1.Apply water-resistant gypsum board where indicated on the Drawings. 2.Neatly fit and stagger end joints. 3.Make joints occur on different studs at opposite sides of partition. 4.Cut and fit neatly around outlets and switches. 5.Erection technique shall result in plumb and straight surfaces with no waves or

buckles, free of unevenness at joints. 6.Brush cut edges and penetrations of water-resistant gypsum board with

thinned water-resistant (W/R) compound.



7.Apply exterior sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 8.Apply high-abuse gypsum board to walls in location indicated on Drawings. B.Ceilings: 1.Apply with long dimension at right angles to horizontal supports. 2.Provide solid bearing at end joints. C.Partitions: 1.General: Apply with long dimensions at right angles to supports (horizontal

application), unless vertical application results in fewer joints or is required by fire rating. Do not make vertical joints at jambs at openings unless a stress relief joint is installed.

2.Horizontal Application: a.Use longest lengths practical. b.Start application at top of wall. c.Work out from corner of room or space. d.Butt ends on solid backing. 3.Vertical Application: a.Apply full lengths between floor and ceiling. b.Start application at corner of room or space. c.Butt edges and ends on solid backing. D.Fastening: 1.Attach gypsum board with fasteners as specified. 2.Space fasteners in accordance with GA-216 recommendations. 3.Drive screws with power screwdriver recommended by gypsum board

manufacturer. 4.Do not hammer-drive screws. 5.Do not break through paper surface of gypsum board. 6.Set fastener heads slightly below surface of gypsum board. 7.Stagger fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges. 8.Omit fasteners at edges where metal edge trim will be installed. 9.Provide "floating" interior-angle construction for partition/walls if recommended

by manufacturer of gypsum board. a.Do not float ends at rated construction. E.Double-Layer Application: 1.Apply base layer vertically, offsetting vertical joints at least one stud space

between layers. 2.Fasten to supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

GA-216. 3.Precut and fit face layer by laminating to base layer with adhesive. 4.Provide temporary support for face layer, by fasteners or shoring, until

adhesive is dry. a.Provide alternate permanent support by attaching face layer to base



layer with screws in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5.Install double layer of gypsum board at fire-rated construction with reveal. 6.Provide edge beads for creating 1/2-inch reveal in public spaces as shown on Drawings. F. Metal Trim: 1.Apply trim at exterior corners and at interior corners where gypsum board

intersects metal or other dissimilar materials. 2.Install in longest lengths practicable. 3.Run trim straight and square with planes. 4.Control Joints: Maximum joint size 1/2 inch faced with metal control joint

accessory. a.Ceilings: Install where areas exceed 2500 sf. Distance between ceiling

control joints shall not exceed 50 feet in either direction. 1)Back with continuous furring channels each side spaced 2-1/4 inches

apart centered on break. 2)Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install 2-inch-wide continuous strip of gypsum

board between channels of same thickness as ceiling board. a)Butt strip against one channel to permit 1/4-inch clearance. b)Secure butted side to ceiling board with adhesive. b.Partitions: Install where distances exceed 30 feet and are not broken by

doors or windows. 1)Back with double studs. 2)Maintain integrity of rated partition with gypsum board or mineral fiber construction as

shown. 5.Edges: Apply applicable shape metal edge trim at exposed edges of gypsum

board and where otherwise shown. a.Gypsum Board Abutting Other Materials: Install edge trim with 1/8-inch

clearance to allow for calking. b.Apply neoprene tape where shown to assure sealed joints at abutting

surfaces. 1)Install in longest lengths practicable. 2)Adhere to edge trim prior to installation of trim. 6.External Corners: Apply metal corner beads at external corners and where

otherwise shown in single lengths. G.Perimeters, penetration, and openings in sound-rated partitions shall be installed

and sealed in accordance with requirements specified in Section 09820. H.Provide fire rated enclosures at fire dampers specified in Division 15. 3.03 SHAFT WALLS A.Install cavity-type system as shown on the Drawings in accordance with

manufacturer's printed instructions. B.System consists of metal studs as specified in Section 09110, gypsum board of



applicable type, shaft liner board, fasteners, and accessories. C.Apply face layers and finish as specified for other gypsum board. D.Fire Rating: In accordance with UL for hourly rating indicated. E. Calking: 1.General: As required to assure no air leakage. 2.Perimeter: Seal with acoustical sealant around base layer in multiple-layer

application and around steel framing in single-layer application. 3.Penetrations: Seal with acoustical sealant. 3.04 TAPING AND FINISHING A.Apply finishing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1.Do not apply tape and joint compound over joints containing acoustical sealant

until the sealant has completely cured. B.Center tape over joints and embed in uniform layer of joint compound of sufficient width

and depth to provide form and complete bond. 1.Apply skim coat while embedding tape. 2.At water-resistant gypsum board, fill fastener heads, penetrations, and joints

with water-resistant (W/R) compound. C.Treat angles with reinforcing tape forded to conform to adjacent surfaces and

straight, true angles. D.On walls of less than 3'-0" horizontal length from corner to corner that are in contact with

a countertop, fill wall to achieve a flat plane from corner to corner at the level where counter and splash material will contact the wall, and feather edges to provide a smooth transition.

E.Provide minimum 24 hours' drying time between applications of compounds. F.Apply coat of finishing compound over joint compound and tape. 1.Spread evenly and feather out beyond edge of board. 2.After first finishing coat is thoroughly dry, cover with second coat with edges

feathered out slightly beyond the preceding coat. G.Give dimples at fastener heads and marred spots on surface of gypsum board one

coat joint compound and two coats finishing compound, applied in same manner as for joints specified above.

H.Conceal flanges of metal reinforcement with minimum two coats compound. 1.Extend compound 8 to 10 inches each side of metal nosing. I.After each application of joint or finishing compound has dried, lightly sand joints.



1.Leave gypsum board and treated areas uniformly smooth and ready for painting or other decoration.

J.Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Finish shall be in accordance with GA-214. 1.Level 2 at tile backer board. 2.Level 4 typical except as noted below. 3.Level 5 for walls and ceilings in public spaces: Seminar Room, Pre-functions rooms,

and main hallways (1H1, 2H1, and 3H1). 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.Provide proper procedures for protection of completed gypsum board from damage

or deterioration until final acceptance of the Project. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-1

SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following ceramic tile work as indicated on the Drawings and as

specified: 1.Adhesive set wall tile and base at Men's and Women's. 2.Wall tile on cement board units at showers. 3.Thin set ceramic tile floor with waterproof membrane at Toilets. 4.Mortar set ceramic floor tile at showers. 5.Thin set quarry tile and base. 6.Thresholds and expansion joints for a complete installation. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.Section 07265 - Vapor Control Membrane. 3.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 4.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09300.A"=Floor tile. 2."09300.B"=Not used. 3."09300.C"=Wall tile. 4."09300.D"=Not used. 5."09300.E"=Not used. 6."09300.F"=Portland cement mortar. 7."09300.G"=Anti-fracture membrane. 8."09300.H"=Waterproofi membrane. 9."09300.I"=Cementitious backer unit. 10."09300.J"=Threshold. 11."09300.K"=Expansion joint. 1.02REFERENCES A.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): "Standard Specifications for the

Installation of Ceramic Tile." 1.ANSI A108.1: "Installation of Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Quarry

Tile and Paver Tile with Portland Cement Mortar." 2.ANSI A108.4: "Installation of Ceramic Tile, with Water-Resistant Organic

Adhesive."


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-2

3.ANSI A108.5: "Installation of Ceramic Tile, with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar."

4.ANSI A108.10: "Installation of Grout in Tilework." 5.ANSI A108.11: "Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units." 6.ANSI A118.4: "Latex Portland Cement Mortar." 7.ANSI A118.6: "Ceramic Tile Grout." 8.ANSI A118.9: "Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units." 9.ANSI A118.10: Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic

Tile and Dimension Stone Installations. 10.ANSI A137.1: "Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile." B.Tile Council of America (TCA): "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." 1.03SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: Floor tile tested both wet and dry shall have minimum static

coefficient of friction of 0.60 in accordance with ASTM C1028. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: 1.Manufacturer's information on tile, including pictorial information on

manufacturer's full line of standard patterns and colors. 2.Upon completion of ceramic tile Work, submit two copies of a list of

recommended maintenance products and procedures. C.Samples: 1.Tile: Submit three full-size samples of each color, size, and type of tile

specified. 2.Submit grout colors for color selection. 3. Trim Shapes: Each pattern and color selected. D.Certificates: Master Grade Certificate conforming to ANSI A137.1, for all tile,

issued and signed by manufacturer when tile is shipped. Type of tile, identifi-cation marks for tile packages, and name and location of Project shall be stated thereon.

1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Tile cartons shall be grade sealed by manufacturer in accordance with TCA 137.1,

and with grade seals unbroken. B.Manufactured mortars and grouts shall contain hallmarks certifying compliance with

reference standards and be types recommended by tile manufacturer for


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-3

application. C.Deliver dry-set mortar in sealed, moistureproof containers. D.Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and under cover in a

manner to prevent damage or contamination. E.Handle tile carefully to avoid chipping and breakage. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental: Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of

manufacturers for bonding and grouting materials. 1.If manufacturer has no recommendations, maintain temperature at not less

than 50 degrees F. during tile installation and for at least 7 days after completion of installation.

B.Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins. 1.Close spaces in which tile is being set to traffic and other work; keep closed

until firmly set. 1.07MAINTENANCE A.Extra Materials: 1.Supply extra 3 percent of the quantity of each color, size, and type of tile used. 2.Supply 10 percent of each type of trim used. 3.Each carton shall be clearly identified as to contents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01TILE A.General Requirements: 1.Standard Grade: ANSI A137.1. B.Wall Tile: As specified on the Drawings or equivalent by American Olean. 1.CT-1: 6 inches x 6 inches, cushion edge. 2.CT-3 Thru CT-6: 4-1/4 inches x 4-1/4 inches C.Floor Tile: As specified on the Drawings or equivalent by American Olean. 1.CT-2: 6 inches x 6 inches. D.Quarry Tile: Standard Grade conforming to ANSI A137.1; as specified on

Drawings or equivalent by American Olean. 1.Size: 6 inches x 6 inches x 1/2 inch.


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-4

E.Trim Shapes and Bases: 1.Ceramic Tile Cove Base: To match wall tile. 2.Provide bullnose, returns, trimmers, and other shapes, both standard and

special, to finish installation and as specified and indicated on the Drawings.

2.02SETTING MATERIALS A.Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. B.Sand: ASTM C144. C.Water: Clean and potable. D.Portland Cement Mortar: One part Portland cement and six parts damp sand by

volume. E.Latex Portland Cement Mortar: Mapei "Keralastic/Kerabond" flexible liquid latex

Portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.4 requirements. F.Dry-Set Mortar: Conforming to ANSI A118.1. G.Organic Adhesive: Conforming to ANSI A136.1, Type I. H.Bond Coat: Portland cement paste on a plastic bed or dry-set mortar on a cured

bed. I.Reinforcing: 2-inch x 2-inch by 16/16-gage welded wire mesh conforming to ASTM

A185. J.Waterproof Membrane: 1.Cementitious Trowelable and Anti-Fracture Membrane: Mapei PRP 315 complying with

ANSI A118.10. 2.Liquid Rubber Membrane: Mapei M19 or Laticrete 9235. K.Cementitious Backer Unit (CBU): USG "Durock"; conforming to ANSI A118.9. 1.Tape: 2-inch wide glass fiber mesh tape; type as recommended by CBU manufacturer. L.Threshold: 1.First Floor: Travertine to match adjacent flooring as specified in 09635. 2.Elsewhere: White Carara Marble, honed finish, profile as shown on Drawings. 2.03GROUTING MATERIALS A.Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Grout: Dry-polymer latex, pre-mixed with

commercial Portland cement grout; ANSI A118.6, mixed only with water and in


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-5

accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer. 1.Mapei "KER 200 (sanded) and 800 (non-sanded)". B.Two-Component Chemical Resistant Grout: Mapei "Kerapoxy" 100% solids epoxy,

water cleanable, complying with ANSI A118.3 or Laticrete "Latapoxy SP-100". 1.Colors shall be selected by the Architect from samples prepared and

submitted by the Contractor. C.Penetrating Grout Sealer: Aqua Mix "Aqua Mix Grout Sealer" (562-946-6877). D.Cleaner: Aqua Mix "Concentrated Tile & Grout Cleaner". E.Sealant: As specified in Section 07920. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces to receive ceramic tile, setting beds, or accessories before tile

installation begins for; 1.Defects or conditions adversely affecting quality and execution of tile

installation. 2.Deviations beyond allowable tolerances of surfaces to receive tile: a.Maximum Variation in Vertical Surfaces: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. b.Maximum Variation in Horizontal Surfaces: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B.Condition of Surfaces to Receive Tile: 1.Surfaces shall be firm, dry, clean, and free of oily or waxy films. 2.Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, and electrical and mechanical work

in or behind tile shall be installed prior to proceeding with tile Work. C.Do not proceed with installation work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Slab-Moisture Content Testing: Perform Calcium Chloride Test (RMA Test) with

subfloor temperature not less than 55 degrees F. If emissions exceed limit recommended by tile manufacturer do not install flooring.

1.If substrate does not meet moisture requirements of flooring manufacturer, Contractor may apply negative side vapor control membrane, at no additional cost

to Owner, in accordance with Section 07265. 2.Contractor shall wait, retest, and proceed when emissions are within flooring

manufacturer's recommended limit.


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-6

3.03INSTALLATION A.Installation of Cementitious Backer Unit: In accordance with ANSI A108.11. B.Prepare surface, fit, set, or bond, grout, and clean in accordance with applicable

requirements of ANSI standards for setting method specified and as specified herein.

1.Wall Tile: a.ANSI A108.4, organic adhesive. b.TCA Method W242. c.Prime surface before applying adhesive when recommended by

adhesive manufacturer. 2.Wall Tile at Shower: a.ANSI A108.5, dry-set or latex Portland cement mortar. b.TCA Method B415. c.Prime surface before applying adhesive when recommended by

adhesive manufacturer. 3.Floor Tile at Shower: Reinforced cement mortar bed with waterproof

membrane. a.ANSI A108.1, latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat over waterproof

membrane. 1)Backbutter tile as required for 100 percent coverage. b.TCA Method F121 with sanded latex Portland cement grout. 4.Ceramic Tile Thin Set with Anti-Fracture Membrane: a.ANSI A108.5 with waterproof membrane. 1)Backbutter tile as required for 100 percent coverage. b.TCA Method F122. c.Dry polymer-modified sanded grout complying with ANSI A118.6 shall be installed in

accordance with A108.10 and manufacturer's printed instructions. 5.Quarry Tile, Thin Set: a.Installation shall be in accordance with TCA F113, ANSI A108.5, and manufacturer's

printed instruction. b.Dry polymer-modified sanded grout complying with ANSI A118.6 shall be installed in

accordance with A108.10 and manufacturer's printed instructions. 6.Expansion Joints: TCA Method EJ171. B.Laying out Tile Work: 1.Lay out tile work so that, insofar as possible, no tile less than half full size

occurs. 2.Lay out tiles on walls so that fields and patterns center exactly on individual

wall areas. a.Exterior angles shall be bullnose. b.Cap shall be bullnose same size as wall tile. 3.Align joints vertically and horizontally.


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-7

C.Cutting of Tiles: 1.Do cutting and drilling without marring the tile. 2.Rub cuts smooth with a fine abrasive stone. 3.Set no cut edge against any fixture, cabinet, or other tile without a joint at least

1/16 inch wide. 4.Whenever possible, turn cut to inside corner. 5.Fit tile around electric outlets, plumbing pipes, fixtures, and fittings close

enough to permit standard plates and collars to overlap the tile. 6.Fill joints with grout, using colors selected by the Architect. D.Curing: Apply nonstaining laminated and reinforced Kraft paper having a

bituminous or latex binder over floor tile as soon as pointing and grouting and cleaning are completed.

1.Lap the sheets at least 4 inches, and seal the laps against the escape of moisture.

2.Leave curing paper in place until job is ready for final cleaning. 3.Keep traffic off floors during the curing period (7 days). 4.Do not permit cement grouts to dry out until cured a minimum of 72 hours. E.Joint Sealants: 1.Install sealant in expansion joints, at junction of wall tile and tub, and around

floor drains and pipes. a.After curing, remove spacers and dry and clean joints requiring sealant. b.Prime joints to receive sealant, if required, with primer recommended by

manufacturer of sealant. c.Sealant shall be expertly applied, beaded smooth and concave, without

protruding beyond adjacent surfaces. d.Sealant shall match color of grout in adjacent joints. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove cracked, stained, broken, or damaged tile; replace with new tile. B.Clean tile surfaces as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting. C.Remove grout haze, observing grout manufacturer's recommendations as to use of

acid and chemical cleaners. D.Rinse tile work thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical

cleaners. 1.Use no acids or abrasive soaps on tile, except as approved by tile

manufacturer. 2.Tile having stains or discolorations shall be replaced. 3.05PROTECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Tile 27720.00 09300-8

A.Apply a protective coat of neutral cleaner solution, one part cleaner to one part

water, to clean, completed tilework. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Terrazzo 27720.00 09400-1

SECTION 09400 TERRAZZO PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide thinset epoxy terrazzo floor and base as indicated on the Drawings and as

specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: concrete finishing. 2.Section 07265 - Vapor Control Membrane. 3.Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09400.A"=Terrazzo. 2."09400.B"=Terrazzo base. 3."09400.C"=Divider strip. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout of all crack supporession membrane,

control joints, expansion strips, and similar items for all terrazzo work. C.Product Data: Submit National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association (NTMA) maintenance

recommendations. D.Samples: Submit 6-inch x 6-inch samples of color and texture. E.Certification: Furnish certification attesting that materials meet specification

requirements. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work in accordance with NTMA. B.Installer: Regularly providing terrazzo work of type required for not less than 5 years

and contracting member of NTMA or certified to perform work in accordance with NTMA standards.

C.Floor material tested both wet and dry shall have a coefficient of friction of 0.6 in



accordance with ADA recommendations. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and under cover in a

manner to prevent damage or contamination. B.Keep products away from fire or open flame. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Do not install terrazzo when temperature is below 50 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. B.Provide barriers and signs as required, and maintain until terrazzo operations have

been completed. C.Protect surfaces adjacent to or around those receiving terrazzo against damage.

Repair or refinish adjacent surfaces stained, discolored, or otherwise damaged. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.General Polymers "Thin-set" or Crossfield Products "Dex-O-Tex Cheminert". 2.02MATERIALS A.Portland Cement: ASTM C150; Riverside Cement Co., white cement. B.Epoxy Resin: Resin shall perform in accordance with the following requirements: 1.Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D695. 2.Hardness: 60-85 per ASTM D2240. 3.Tensile Strength: 3,000 psi, minimum per ASTM D412. C.Marble Chips: As per Architect's control samples, aggregates as selected. 1.Color: As selected by Architect. 2.Size: #0, #1, and #2 marble chips to match Architect's sample board. Conform with

NTMA gradation standards. 3.Hardness: According to ASTM C241 Ha 10 minimum. 4.24-hour absorption rate not to exceed 0.75 percent. 5.Chips shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter. 6.Dust content less than 1 percent by weight. D.Precast Terrazzo Base: Shape and size as indicated on Drawings. E.Divider Strips: 1/4-inch zinc "K" strips with a depth as required; Manhattan American



Dividing Strips or Schluter. F.Crack Suppression Membrane: General Polymers "Epo-Flex" or Crossfield Products. G.Colorants: Alkali-resistant color stable pigments. H.Miscellaneous Materials: 1.Curing material: Water, wet sand, or polyethylene sheeting. 2.Cleaner: Commercially prepared, formulated for terrazzo work, pH factor between 7

and 10. 3.Sealer: Commercially prepared, penetrating type, formulated to produce a slip-resistant

surface. 2.03MIXES A.Thin Set Epoxy: Epoxy resin mixed according to manufacturer's recommendations and

blended with marble and chips, ground and grouted with epoxy resin. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces to receive terrazzo before installation begins for: 1.Defects or conditions adversely affecting quality and execution of installation. 2.Deviations beyond allowable tolerances of surfaces to receive terrazzo: a.Maximum Variation in Vertical Surfaces: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. b.Maximum Variation in Horizontal Surfaces: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. B.Condition of surfaces to receive terrazzo shall be firm, dry, clean, and free of oily or

waxy films. C.Do not begin terrazzo work until concrete substrate has cured 28 days, minimum. D.Do not proceed with installation work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Apply primer to manufacturer's instructions. B.Install crack supporession membrane over construction pout joints and over beam lines

in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Slab-Moisture Content Testing: Perform Calcium Chloride Test (RMA Test) with



subfloor temperature not less than 55 degrees F. If emissions exceed rate recommended by flooring manufacturer, do not install terrazzo flooring.

1.Contractor shall wait and retest and proceed when emissions are within flooring manufacturer's recommended limit.

2.If substrate still does not meet moisture requirements of flooring manufacturer, Contractor may at no additional cost to Owner, apply vapor control membrane in accordance with Section 07265.

3.04INSTALLATION A.Place terrazzo mix over prepared substrate to a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch. B.Trowel to a dense flat surface. C.Apply flush vertical base; 3/8 inch minimum topping bonded to wall. 3.05FINISHING A.Finish terrazzo to NTMA requirements and as follows. B.Rough Grinding: 1.Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. 2.Follow initial grind with 80 or finer grit stones. C.Grouting: 1.Clean floor with clean water and rinse. 2.Remove excess rinse water, dry and apply epoxy grout, supplied by epoxy manufacturer,

to fill voids. D.Cure grout. E.Fine Grinding: 1.Grind with 80 or finer grit stones until all grout is removed from surface. 2.Upon completion, terrazzo shall show a minimum of 80 percent marble chips. 3.06CLEANING A.Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces and apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. 3.07PROTECTION A.Do not permit traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Acoustical Ceilings 27720.00 09510-1

SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 1.Suspended acoustical ceiling panels for suspension systems specified in Section 09120. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 01315 - Project Coordination. 2.Section 09120 - Ceiling Suspension System. 3.Section 09545 - Specialty Ceiling: ACT-1. 4.Division 15 - Mechanical: sprinklers and air diffuses. 5.Division 16 - Electrical: lighting fixtures. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09510.A"=Not used. 2."09510.B"=Acoustical ceiling Type ACT-2. 3."09510.C"=Acoustical ceiling Type ACT-3. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's information on materials, fabrication, and installation.

Provide certification of flame spread rating and UL classification. C.Samples: Submit 12-inch-square samples of each type of unit to illustrate color

and range of appearance. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Design Requirements: 1.Ceilings shall be designed and detailed to comply with ASTM C635 and ASTM

C636. 2.Fire-rated ceiling shall be rated in accordance with ASTM E119 and bear an

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Time Design number applicable to the proposed installation.

B.Qualifications of Installer: Minimum of three project installations of extent

comparable to proposed Project.



C.Allowable Tolerance of Finished Acoustical Ceiling System: Level within 1/8 inch in

12 feet. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness. B.Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. C.Do not begin installation until sufficient materials to complete a room are received. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55

degrees to 70 degrees F prior to and during installation of materials. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A.Extra Material: Furnish extra material equal to 3 percent for each type of acoustical

unit installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Acoustical Panels: Acoustical units shall conform to ASTM E1264 Type III, Form

2; Class A flame spread. 1.Manufacturer: As specified on the Drawings or Armstrong "Ultima 15/16" or

Celotex. 2.Sizes: a.ACT-1: See Section 09545. b.ACT-2: 5/8 inch thick x 24 inches x 24 inches. c.ACT-3: 5/8 inch thick x 24 inches x 48 inches. 3.NRC: .70 4.CAC: 35. 5.Edge: Beveled tegular. 6.Finish: Factory-applied white vinyl latex. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION



A.Examine surfaces to receive the work of this Section. 1.Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry, clean of dust, dirt, and imperfections that

may affect finished installation. B.Verify suspension system is level to specified tolerances the properly install the work of

this Section. C.Notify the Architect in writing of conditions preventing the proper application of

acoustical ceilings. D.Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Acoustical Units: 1.Install in grid system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and

recommendations. 2.Install in level plane in straight line courses. 3.Apply panels and tile with grain in same directions, not checkerboard. 4.Minimum Width of Border Tiles: One-half unit dimensions, unless otherwise shown. 5.Coordinate lay-in system with electrical fixtures and mechanical work which will be

integrated with the ceiling. 3.03 CLEANING A.Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. B.Touch up scratches, abrasion, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces. C.Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed acoustical units, and replace

with new acoustical units. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Specialty Ceiling 27720.00 09545-1

SECTION 09545 SPECIALTY CEILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide acoustical panel systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems. 2.Section 09120 - Ceiling Suspension Systems. 3.Division 15 - Mechanical: diffusers. 4.Division 16 - Electrical: lighting. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09545.A"=Specialty ceiling Type ACT-1. 2."09545.B"=Specialty ceiling Type ACT-4. 3."09545.C"=Specialty ceiling Type ACT-5. 1.02DESIGN CRITERIA A.Performance Characteristics: 1.Acoustical: NRC 0.90 when tested in accordance with ASTM C423. 2.Light Reflectance: 92 percent with standard white color. 3.Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide a ceiling system with Class A surface

burning characteristics as determined by testing panel components in accordance with ASTM E84 test procedures.

B.Grid system and components shall be the products of a single manufacturer. C.System shall be pre-engineered by manufacturer's Civil or Structural Engineer. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications. C.Shop Drawings: Layout including integrated electrical and mechanical items,

information on materials, installation methods, and adjacent materials. D.Samples: Submit 12-inch-square samples of grid material to illustrate color and range

of appearance.



1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE B.Allowable Tolerance: 1.Deflection: Not to exceed a maximum of L/360 of span. 2.Level: Finished suspended ceilings shall not deviate from level in excess of 1/8 inch in

12 feet. 1.05PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name. B.Handle and store materials to protect them from damage or deterioration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Ceiling System (Scheduled ACT-1): 100 percent suspended accessible acoustical

panel system. 1.Manufacturer: Decoustics "Ceilencio Modular with Claro Finish" or equivalent by DWL. 2.Description: 24-inch x 24-inch modular panels with 1/8-inch defined butt joint, 1-inch

acoustic core and coated finish providing acoustical transparency with a flat painted gypsum board appearance.

B.Perforated Ceiling System (Scheduled ACT-4): Suspended perforated metal system as

scheduled on Drawings. 1.Perforated metal panel with 22 percent open area; 1/8-inch holes staggered 1/4-inch on

center. Paint to match paint color P-1. C.Stainless Steel Perforated Ceiling System (Scheduled ACT-5): Joist supported

stainless steel perforated metal system. 1.Perforated embossed stainless steel panels with 22 percent open area; 1/8-inch holes

staggered 1/4-inch on center. Custom fabrication cut in radial design as shown on Drawings. Embossed stainless steel to match exterior wall panels in Section 07416.

D.Installation Accessories: Manufacturer's standard downward release system of torsion

springs and butterflies mechanism and other components as required for complete installation.

E.Wire: Hanger and seismic wire as specified in Section 09120. F.Fasteners: 1.Expansion Bolts: a.Tie Wire: Hilti Kwik Bolt HKT 14 or Ramset/Red Head TW, with minimum 1-1/2-inch



embedment. b.Others: As specified in Section 05500. 2.Powder-Actuated Devices (PAD's): .145-inch diameter with 15/16-inch penetration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces to receive the work of this Section. B.Inspect panels and supporting hangers for damage. Do not install defective units. C.Notify the Architect in writing of conditions preventing the proper installation of system. D.Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and

recommendations. B.Install in level plane in straight line courses within specified tolerances. C.Panels shall not twist, warp, bow, or bend after proper installation. 3.03CLEANING A.Clean soiled units after installation. B.Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units, and replace with new units. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Stone Flooring 27720.00 09635-1

SECTION 09635 STONE FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 1.Mortar-set travertine floor with base. 2.Travertine stair treads. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: curing compound. 2.Section 04450 - Stone Veneer. 3.Section 05510 - Metal Stairs. 4.Section 07265 - Vapor Control Membrane. 5.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09635.A"=Travertine stone floor tile. 2."09635.B"=Travertine stone stair tread. 3."09635.C"=Mortar. 4."09635.D"=Travertine stone base. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: Provide stone material from sequentially quarried blocks, from a

single quarry, to ensure normal acceptable range of shade variation. Stone specified in this Section and in section 04450 shall be from same source.

1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's printed instructions for recommended maintenance

products and installation instructions for stone flooring and accessories required. 1.Include manufacturer's recommendation for substrate moisture. C.Shop Drawings: Show layout for stone, dimensions, expansion joint and edge strip

locations, and installation details. D.Samples: 1.12-inch by 12-inch representative samples of each stone type for review and finish.



2.Joint grout for review of color. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications of Installer: Minimum of three project installations of extent comparable to

proposed Project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Properly package for shipment to prevent breaking, chipping or other damage. B.Cover materials as necessary to protect against wetting and staining prior to use. C.Store materials in a manner to prevent damage. D.Handle and store setting and grouting materials in compliance with manufacturer's

instructions. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Coordinate finish of concrete as specified in Section 03300 with requirements of this

Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Stone Floor Tile: To match filled and honed travertine wall panels specified in

Section 04450. 1.Size: 30 inches x 30 inches. B.Stone Stair Treads: To match filled and honed light travertine wall panels specified

in Section 04450. C.Stone Base: To match flooring; flat and curved. D.Setting Materials: 1.Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. 2.Sand: Sharp, clean, salt-and silt-free, conforming to ASTM C144. 3.Water: Clean and potable. 4.Mortar and Grout: Provide mortar additives and grouts which are the product of one

manufacturer. a.Mortar Additive: Laticrete 4237 Latex Thin Set Mortar Additive or Mapei

"Kerabond/Keralastic", non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous product.



b.Grout and Mortar Admixture: Laticrete 3701 or Mapei. E.Expansion Joint Sealant: See Section 07920; color as selected to match stone. 2.02MIXES A.Thick Bed Set Mortar: 1.Comply with 3,000-psi compressive strength. 2.Mix Portland cement, course sand, grout and mortar admixture in proportions as

recommended by manufacturer. 2.03FABRICATION A.Cut stone to shape in accordance with details as shown on Drawings. B.Provide stone free from cracks, seams, starts, and other defects which impair strength,

durability, and appearance. C.Fabricate stair treads with contrasting strips for compliance with disabled accessibility

requirements specified in CCR Title 24 and ADA. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness which would

prevent execution and quality of stone flooring as specified. B.Verify slab conforms to recommended tolerances and finish is acceptable for

intended installation C.Do not begin installation until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Clean surfaces to be covered to remove soil, dusty concrete, mortar or like items. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Slab-Moisture Content Testing: Perform Calcium Chloride Test (RMA Test) with

subfloor temperature not less than 55 degrees F. If emissions exceed rate recommended by stone flooring manufacturer, do not install flooring.

1.Contractor shall wait and retest and proceed when emissions are within flooring



manufacturer's recommended limit. 2.If substrate still does not meet moisture requirements of flooring manufacturer,

Contractor may at no additional cost to Owner, apply vapor control membrane in accordance with Section 07265.

3.04INSTALLATION A.Conform with material manufacturers' specifications, accepted shop drawings, and

as specified. B.Mix setting materials according to manufacturer's recommendations. C.Installation of thick bed set stone: 1.Apply mortar. 2.Trowel a bond coat to wet concrete or slurry coat to back of each stone piece. 3.Place stone in wet coat and rake joints free of mortar. 4.Tamp stone firmly into bed to required level. 5.Clean excess mortar from surface of stone. D.Install thin-set stone base. E.Expansion and Control Joints: Install where stone abuts resisting surfaces, and where

they occur on substrate. 1.Rake joints through setting bed to supporting slab. F.Grouting Joints: 1.Maintain uniform joints of 1/8 inch. 2.Maintain tight and flush joints. 3.Grout with latex Portland cement grout. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace stone with is loose or damaged with new stone to match

adjoining. B.Cleaning: 1.Remove dirt and soiled spots from exposed faces of stone and metal edge strips. 2.Clean exposed surfaces with materials and methods as recommended by material

manufacturers. 3.05PROTECTION A.Protect finished installation from damage and stains until final acceptance of Project. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Wood Flooring 27720.00 09640-1

SECTION 09640 WOOD FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide wood flooring system as shown on the Drawings and as specified including the

following: 1.Preparation of surfaces to receive wood flooring. 2. Wood nailers, preservative treated. 3. Asphalt felt vapor barrier. 4. Plywood subfloor. 5. Special trim, borders, and cover plates. 6. Wood plank flooring. 7. Sanding and finishing of wood flooring. 8. Cleaning and protection. B.Related Work: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09640.A"=Wood flooring. 2."09640.B"=Nailers. 3."09640.C"=Vapor barrier. 4."09640.D"=Plywood subfloor. 5."09640.E"=Firestop insulation. 6."09640.F"=Cork expansion strip. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: 1.Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for flooring, including correct preparation,

finishing and testing of concrete subfloor. 2.Submit manufacturer's maintenance literature indicating procedures for care and

preservation of wood flooring. C.Shop Drawings: Showing layout and types of wood flooring, including plans, elevations,

sections, details of anchorage and attachments to other units of Work, and baseboard.



D.Samples: 1.Submit three samples indicating extreme ranges of color and grain that will be

encountered in actual installation. 2.Identify each sample, as to species, cut, grade, and finish. E.Certifications: Manufacturer's certification attesting that the material furnished will meet

specification for grade, quality, dryness, and treatment. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer's Qualifications: Minimum of three project installations of extent comparable to

proposed Project and approved by flooring manufacturer. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture in shipment, storage, and handling.

Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until concrete, plaster, masonry, ceramic tile, and other wet work is complete and cured to a condition of equilibrium and temperature and humidity are maintained at or near occupancy levels.

1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Moisture Content: At time of delivery, average moisture content of wood flooring to be 6

to 9 percent, with a maximum of 12 percent for any one piece and not more than 5 percent outside of given average range.

B.Environmental Conditions: 1.Building shall be dry and closed in with wet work completed. During cold weather, room

temperature shall be maintained at a minimum level of 65 degrees F. Room dampness shall not exceed an Equilibrium Moisture Content reading of 8% as tested with a sling psychrometer by wood floor installer prior to installation of flooring. Reduction of room dampness, if required, shall be by the use of heat or air conditioning as applicable and fan ventilation, as required.

2.Do not install wood flooring until spaces are enclosed and at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition wood for 5 days before start of installation by placing in spaces to receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between 65 degrees F and 75 degrees F. before, during, and after installation. Open sealed packages of wood flooring to permit natural adjustment of moisture content and allow flooring to acclimate to the room conditions.

C.After floors are finished, area to be kept locked to allow curing time for the finish. If after

curing time for the finish, the Contractor or Owner requires use of area, he shall protect the floor by covering with non-fibered kraft paper or red rosin paper with



taped joints, until acceptance of area by Owner. 1.07WARRANTY A.Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer, Installer, and

Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:

1.Buckling, warping, squeaking, and loosening. 2.Excessive open joints or cracks. 3.Deterioration of finishes beyond normal wear. B.Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under

other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.08EXTRA STOCK A.Deliver extra material to Owner. Before installation begins, furnish not less than 1

percent of the type wood flooring installed on the Project, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Flooring: Provide the following wood strip-type flooring: 1.Species: Cherry. 2.Grade: First Grade 3.Cut: Plain - Sawn 4.Back Channeling: Provide manufacturer's standard channeling on back face of each

strip. 5.Thickness: 25/32 inch 6.Face Width: 6 inches 7.Lengths: Provide random lengths with no pieces less than 24 inches long. 8.Matching: Tongue-and-grooved and end-matched. 9.Seasoning: Manufacturer solid wood flooring from kiln-dried lumber B.Accessories: 1.Wood Nailers: As required to achieve correct finish floor elevations, 2-inch x 3-inch

minimum nominal dimension. Standard and Better Grade Eastern Hemlock, Douglas Fir, Pine or Spruce, in lengths of 18 inches to 48 inches, S4S, Wood nailers shall be kiln-dried to average moisture content



of 10 percent (12 percent maximum and 8 percent minimum). Provide cut-back asphalt floor mastic, as approved by Architect, for setting of wood nailers.

2.Plywood Sub-Floor: Plywood sub-floor shall be one layer of 3/4 inch thick by 4 feet by 8 feet Douglas Fir Plywood, Underlayment Grade using exterior glue, sanded per US Product Standard PS 1, and fire-retardant treated Class A rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84.

3.Fasteners: Flooring fasteners shall be 2-inch long epoxy coated staples or 2-inch barbed cleats.

4.Vapor Barrier: Provide 15# asphalt impregnated felt. 5.Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork expansion strip FS HH-C-576, Type I-B Class

2. 6.Wood Trim: Where indicated to match wood flooring, provide wood baseboard molding

and shoe molding of same species and grade as wood flooring. Except as other wise indicated, provide wood stripping, reducer strips, saddles, thresholds, and other wood accessories indicated in or adjacent to wood flooring of same species, grade, and cut as wood flooring.

7.Acoustic Firestop Insulation: US Gypsum Thermafiber. 8.Adhesive: Conform to requirements of APA Performance Specification AFG-01. C.Finishing Materials: 1.Stain: Penetrating-type, nonfading wood stain of color required to match Architect's

sample. 2.Wood Filler: Type compatible with stain or finish, pigmented if necessary to match

Architect's sample. 3.Floor Sealer: Penetrating-type, pliable, compatible with stain and finish used and as

recommended by flooring manufacturer. a.Provide water-based sealer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Installer shall examine the substrates on which wood flooring will be installed, and the

conditions under which the work will be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion and maintenance of wood flooring.

B.Substrate Conditions: Test for concrete substrate dryness before proceeding with

installation. Test with a 3% solution of phenolphthalein in grain alcohol (97%). Sprinkle a few drops on concrete at several locations. If drops turn red, do not

proceed and allow substrate to cure/dry. 1.Contractor shall wait and retest and proceed when emissions are within flooring

manufacturer's recommended limit. 2.If substrate still does not meet moisture requirements of flooring manufacturer,




C.Levels: Variations in subfloor and underlayment levels shall not exceed 1/4" in 10'-0". D.Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a

manner acceptable to the Installer as approved by the Architect. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install flooring in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. B.Wood Nailers: Install wood nailers around perimeter, leaving 1/4 inch between ends, and

allowing for expansion joint of at least 3/4 inch around perimeter. In field of room install wood nailers in rows, at right angles to the longest dimension of the room, or at a 90 degree angle to the direction floor is to be laid as directed by the Architect. Wood nailers in the fields of the room shall be laid with end joints staggered, in rows 16 inches on center, with ends lapped 4 inches, and with 3/4 inch gap at perimeter ends. Wood nailers shall be dry, no excess residue of preservative treatment. Wood nailers shall be embedded in a solid bed of trowel applied cutback asphalt floor mastic.

B.Insulation: Install specified insulation between wood nailers, filling space completely. C.Plywood Sub-Floor: Install plywood subfloor with long dimension (and grain of outer

plies) at right angle to wood nailers. End butt joints of plywood subfloor shall be centered on a wood nailer. Stagger plywood end joints by at least 24 inches. The plywood subfloor shall be set in a continuous bed of specified adhesive and be face nailed 6 inches on center to every wood nailer using 7d resin coated wire nails.

D.Vapor Barrier: A vapor barrier of 15# felt sheeting shall be laid loose on top of the

installed plywood subfloor, with edges butted, prior to installation of the wood flooring.

E.Wood Flooring: 1.Wood flooring shall run in direction indicated on Drawings or as indicated by Architect

on approved shop drawings. 2.Wood flooring shall be blind nailed, each strip nailed to each wood nailer. Nails shall be

driven at an angle of 50 degrees from horizontal, at a point where flooring tongue leaves shoulder. Each strip of flooring shall be driven up tight except that a 1/32 inch space shall be left between boards to permit expansion, use metal spacer strips. Stagger end joints.

3.In addition to blind nailing specified above, each floor board shall be face screwed at approximately 3 inch centers across width of boards at butt joints, and shall be face screwed at approximately 4'-0" centers along length of each



board. Screws at butt joints and along length of boards shall be staggered and shall be random spaced in order to avoid regular pattern. All screws shall be #10 wood screws, 1-1/2 inches long, cadmium plated, and shall be countersunk. Screw holes shall be filled in with edge grain clear matching plugs, glued in place. Plugs shall be carefully selected to match graining of boards, end grain of plugs shall be parallel with grain of boards so as to conceal plugs as far as practicable. Care shall be taken in setting plugs so that none are set below the finished face of the adjoining boards.

4.Provide 1/2-inch wide cork expansion at perimeter of floor, and at door thresholds. Set cork expansion strip flush with top surface of flooring. Cork shall match color of finished wood flooring. Where flooring will be covered by wood base, omit cork but provide 1/2-inch wide expansion space beneath wood base (between wood floor and adjoining construction).

5.Provide special Cherry trim, borders, coverplates, and strips to complete Include all cutting, shaping, and fitting of items necessary for a tight fitting, uniform installation free of irregularities. Special trim, borders, cover plates, and strips shall match adjacent wood flooring.

3.03SANDING AND FINISHING A.Sanding: New wood flooring shall be sanded with approved cylindrical sanding

machine with the grain of the wood, to a perfectly smooth, level, even surface, free from plane or other tool marks or scratches which would show through the finish hereinafter specified. Take care not to damage adjoining surfaces and materials. Floors shall be traversed not less than five times, using finer paper in each traverse, starting with No. 2 paper and finishing with No. 000 Carborundum cloth. After the final-sanding, floors shall be swept clean and shall not be walked on until after the first finishing coat has been applied and is dry. The first coat of finish shall be applied the same day as the final sanding i s completed.

B.Finishing: After sanding, wood floor areas shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping and

by rubbing with soft cleaning cloths wrung out in approved solvent, and fastened around the end of a push broom removing all dust, sand and grease; allow sufficient time to dry; then finish wood floors as follows:

1.Stain and Wax Finish: a)Stain Coat: Penetrating oil stain, apply smoothly and evenly to obtain color required by

Architect. Stain coat to be applied same day final sanding is completed.

b)Sealer Coat: Penetrating clear oil sealer, apply smoothly and evenly. c)Wax Coat: Apply at least 3 coats of paste floor wax (carnauba wax or equal). 2.After stain coat is dry, and then again after sealer coat is dry, floor shall be burnished

smooth with steel wool using a power machine. After each coat of wax is thoroughly dry, polish the floor with an electric polisher to obtain the smoothness, luster an sheen required by the Architect. Wipe floor clean



after each burnishing and polishing operation. The color and sheen of the floor shall match the finish of the wood floor samples approved by the Architect.

3.04PROTECTION A.Protect installed unfinished and prefinished wood flooring during remainder of

construction period with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation.

B.Do not cover site finished floors with Kraft paper, rugs or any other material until finish

reaches full cure, usually 6 or 7 days. 3.05CLEANING AND REPAIRING A.At completion of construction work, remove temporary protection from the work of this

Section. B.Clean work of this Section. Examine work and repair damage. In the event damage is

irreparable, remove and replace such work at no additional cost to the Owner. Do all required "touch-up" to marred or abraded surfaces. Leave entire work in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences Bulletin #43 California Institute of Technology, Pasadena CA April 20, 2001

SMP/SHG - PCF&P Resilient Flooring 27720.00 09650-1

SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide resilient flooring including base and other accessories as shown on the

Drawings and as specified, complete. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: curing compound. 2.Section 05510 - Metal Stairs. 3.Section 06410 - Custom Casework. 4.Section 07265 - Vapor Control Membrane. 5.Section 09680 - Carpet. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09650.A"=Not used. 2."09650.B"=Sheet vinyl. 3."09650.C"=Stair tread and landings. 4."09650.D"=Vinyl base. 5."09650.E"=Edge strips. 6."09650.F"=Floor leveling compound. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's printed instructions for recommended maintenance

products and installation instructions for resilient flooring and accessories re-quired.

1.Include manufacturer's recommendation for substrate moisture. C.Samples of each type indicating full range of color or pattern of resilient flooring,

base, and accessory materials. 1.Resilient Sheet Flooring: 12-inch x 12-inch section. 2.Stair Tread/Landing: 9-inch x 12-inch samples. 3.Accessory Flooring Materials: Minimum 9 inches long. 4.Tile: Full size.



1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications of Installer: Minimum of three project installations of extent comparable to

proposed Project. B.Regulatory Requirement: 1.Flammability: Materials shall have the following flammability ratings, according to NFPA

253 or ASTM E648: a.Smoke Density: 450 or less. b.Critical Radiant Flux: Class I - Minimum 0.45 watts per square centimeter. 2.Slip Resistance: In accordance with ADA Section A4.5, flooring shall have a minimum

static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for steps and floors per ASTM D2047 "Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Mea-sured by the James Machine".

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store and protect accepted materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions

and recommendations. B.Unless otherwise directed, store materials in original containers at not less than 70

degrees F. for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: 1.Maintain temperature in spaces to receive resilient flooring between 70

degrees F. and 90 degrees F. for not less than 24 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation.

2.Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. thereafter until acceptance. 1.06MAINTENANCE A.Extra Materials: 1.Furnish additional floor-covering materials for replacement and mainte-

nance. 2.Furnish in cartons 5 percent of tiles of each size, color, and kind used, at

the completion of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS



A.General: 1.Uniform in thickness and size. 2.Edges cut accurately and square. 3.Uniform color with variations in variegated patterns kept to a minimum. B.Sheet Vinyl: As shown on Drawings or Mipolam "Practica 200," colors 2000, 2009,

2010. 1.Anti-static Sheet Vinyl: As shown on Drawings or Polyflor; colors as shown on Drawings. C.Vinyl Composition Tile: Armstrong "Standard Excelon Interior Texture", Azrock

"Cortina Color", or Polyflor "2000" conforming to ASTM F1066. 1.Size: 12 inches x 12 inches x 1/8 inch thick. 2.Colors: a.Color 1: Armstrong #51899 Cool White, Azrock #V873 Sand Dune, or PolyFlor

color to be determined. b.Color 2: Armstrong #51904 Sterling, Azrock #V865 Thistle Gray, or PolyFlor color

to be determined. CD.Stair Tread, Riser, Landing, and Stringer: 1.Manufacturer: a.Stair No. 1 and 2: Johnsonite "Roundel", Burke, or Nora; round raised discs at stair and

landing. Color: Marley/Flexco 043 Fjord. b.Stair No. 3 (Scheduled VCT): Vinyl treads to match Marley/Flexco contract solid vinyl

color C-9 HW; custom size for depth of tread. 2.Provide safety strips for the visually impaired at bottom tread and top landings to meet

standards of California Building Standards Code (CBSC) Title 24 and ADA.

DE.Rubber Base: ASTM F1861; height as shown on Drawings. 1.Manufacturer: As shown on Drawings. 2.Provide factory-pre-molded external corners. 3.As long lengths as practicable to suit conditions of installation. 4.Types: a.Coved at resilient flooring. b.Straight at carpet. EF.Edge Strips: Molded vinyl, 1-1/2 inches x 1/8 inch thick, with exposed edge 1/4

inch rounded, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 1.Unless otherwise specified, match thickness of abutting flooring material. 2.Provide uniform thickness. FG.Adhesive: Provide type and brands of water-resistant adhesive as recommended

by manufacturer of resilient flooring material for conditions of installations. 1.Primer: As recommended by flooring materials manufacturer. GH.Floor Patch-and-Leveling Compound: Products manufactured specifically for the



purpose as recommended by manufacturer of resilient flooring material furnished.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness which would

prevent execution and quality of resilient flooring as specified. B.Inspect all surfaces to receive sheet flooring and bring to the attention of manufacturer's

representative and Architect any conditions that may adversely affect the installation of the materials specified in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. C.Do not proceed with installation of resilient flooring until defects have been

corrected, except where correction is indicated below under Article 3.02, "Preparation."

3.02 PREPARATION A.Prepare concrete substrate in accordance with ASTM F710 and the flooring

manufacturer's printed instructions. B.Surface of subfloor shall be clean and smooth prior to laying flooring. C.Depressions, holes, or cracks shall be filled and patched. D.Protrusions shall be removed and sanded smooth. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Slab-Moisture Content Testing: Perform Calcium Chloride Test (RMA Test) with

subfloor temperature not less than 55 degrees F. If emissions exceed rate recommended by flooring manufacturer, do not install resilient flooring.


2.If substrate still does not meet moisture requirements of flooring manufacturer,


B.Perform adhesive bond test using both the adhesive and the flooring material that is to

be installed to determine that satisfactory bond can be achieved.



3.04 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A.Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.Prime surfaces if recommended by adhesive manufacturer. B.Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by

adhesive manufacturer. C.Apply uniformly over surfaces. 1.Cover only that amount of area which can be covered by flooring material

within the recommended working time of the adhesive. 2.Remove any adhesive which dries or films over. 3.Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesive. 4.Promptly remove spillage. D.Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool. E.Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to ensure proper application of

adhesive. 3.05INSTALLATION OF SHEET MATERIALS A.Install flooring where indicated on the Drawings, using adhesives, in strict

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Lay sheets in single length from wall to wall. C.Extend flooring into recesses, door reveal, and similar spaces. D.Lay sheets with seams square to room axis; match pattern at seams. E.Layout shall minimize seams. Double cut seams. Make seams under center of

doors. F.Make heat-welded seams tight, and solidly adhere to substrate. G.Finished floors shall be smooth and free from buckles, cracks, breaks, waves, and

projecting edges. H.Resilient flooring shall fit neatly around corners or other obstructions. I.Defective or damaged work shall be replaced at no extra cost prior to acceptance of

installation by Owner. 3.06INSTALLATION OF TILE MATERIALS A.Place to produce smooth, even surface with joints tightly butted and



accurately aligned. B.Symmetrically arrange with axis of room, unless otherwise shown on

Drawings. C.Run grain or pattern of adjacent tiles in the same direction, unless otherwise

shown on Drawings. D.Lay no tile that is less than 1/2 the width of a field tile, except where required

for irregularly-shaped areas. E.Fit neatly and tightly into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes

and penetrations, and around permanent cabinets, equipment and under cabinet recesses.

F.At door openings where resilient flooring and other floor materials meet, make

joining under center of doors. G.Following installation of resilient flooring, divert traffic from installation area

for at least 24 hours. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF BASE AND EDGE STRIPS A.General: 1.Match edges at seams or double-cut adjoining lengths. 2.Install with tight butt joints. B.Top-Set Base: 1.Install base around perimeter of room or space, at base of partitions, columns,

pilaster, and other permanent fixtures where base is scheduled. 2.Unroll base material and cut into accurate lengths as required for minimum of

joints. 3.Apply adhesive and firmly adhere to wall surfaces in accordance with

manufacturer's directions. 4.Heat-weld top-set base to sheet vinyl. 5.Press down so that bottom cove edge follows floor profile. 6.Use premolded corners for internal and external corners. 7.Scribe base accurately to abutting materials. 8.Tightly butt joints; make no joint widths greater than 1/64 inch. C.Edge Strips: 1.Apply adhesives and bond securely to substrates in straight, true lines. 2.Provide where resilient flooring terminates, exposing edge of covering. 3.Center edge strips under doors where resilient flooring terminates at a door

opening. 4.Top of strips shall be flush with top of resilient flooring. 5.Install reducer strips where required to provide smooth transition between



resilient flooring and other finish. a.Center reducers under doors, where flooring materials terminate at door

openings. b.Cut ends to fit edges of door frames and abutting surfaces; fit edges to

adjoining floor covering. 3.08STAIR TREADS AND LANDINGS A.Install as specified in Section 05510 solidly adhered to concrete. 3.09 FINISHING AND CLEANING A.Upon completion of installation of floor covering and adjacent work and after

materials have set, clean surfaces with a neutral cleaner as recommended by manufacturer for type of floor-covering material installed.

B.Protect completed work from traffic and damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Carpet 27720.00 09680-1

SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide carpeting and cushion for double-stick installation as shown and as

specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: curing compound. 2.Section 07265 - Vapor Control Membrane. 3.Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: base and edge strips. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09680.A"=Carpet 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Performance Requirements: Face yarns shall be of same dye batch, and finish

material shall be of same mill run in each unit. B.Carpet Treatment: Shall provide static dissipative floor covering suitable for spaces

using computers. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's printed literature of the following: 1.Data indicating compliance with specified critical radiant flux. 2.Maintenance and Cleaning Instructions: These instructions must include

recommendations for commercial cleaning, spot cleaning, vacuum clean-ing, and recommended type of furniture casters and glides for use with each carpeting selected.

C.Shop Drawings: Submit seaming diagrams; show edge conditions, seaming

directions, and location of cutouts. D.Samples: Submit samples of color range of selected carpet and accessories to the

Architect. 1.No materials shall be purchased until the Architect has accepted the samples.



2.Carpet: 18 inches x 27 inches, of each type, color, and pattern selected by the Architect.

3.Cushion: 12 inches x 12 inches. 4.Accessories: 12-inch-long sample of each accessory. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Approved by carpet manufacturer. B.Regulatory Requirement: Provide carpet and padding with a minimum critical radiant

flux limit of 0.45 watts/cm2 (Class I) in compliance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 253.

1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver carpet in bales with manufacturer's registry numbers attached and intact. B.Store carpet in dry, well-ventilated spaces; protect from damage. C.Deliver metal material in crates; bent material will not be accepted. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: Store materials for one day prior to installation in area of

installation to achieve temperature stability. 1.07MAINTENANCE A.Extra Materials: 1.Furnish single piece 3 percent coverage of each color of carpet installed. Wrap and

label with carpet type, pattern and color. 2.Deliver to Owner unused carpet pieces over 2 square feet and 8 inches in least

dimension. 3.Store where indicated by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Carpet CPT-1: Bentley as shown on Drawings or equal. 1.Style: Lincoln Center, as shown on Drawings. 2.Construction: Loop over loop. 3.Color: As shown on Drawings 4.Machine Gage: 1/8 in. 5.Pile Height: .250 inch (high) 6.Yarn Weight: 36 oz./sq/yd.



7.Total Weight: 66 oz./sq/yd. 8.Yarn Content: Solution Ultron VIP of Nylon. 9.Primary Backing: Polypropylene 10.Secondary Backing: Woven Polypropylene 11.Static Control: Static control fiber 12.Width: 12'-6" 13.Flame Resistance: Passes methenamine pill test. 14.Soil Resistance: 3M Commercial carpet protector. B.Carpet CPT-2: Masland as shown on Drawings or equal. 1.Style: Texere 2.Construction: Textured loop pile 3.Color: As shown on Drawings. 4.Machine Gage: 1/10 in. 5.Pile Height: .312 inch 6.Fiber Weight: 36 oz./sq/yd. 7.Weight: 82 oz./sq/yd. 8.Dye Method: Back Dyed 9.Primary Backing: Woven Polypropylene 10.Secondary Backing: Woven Polypropylene 11.Static Control: Less than 3.0 KV 12.Flame Resistance: ASTM E648 greater than 0.45 watts/CM2 Class 1. C.Carpet CPT-3: Bolyu Contract as shown on Drawings or equal. 1.Style: Ballina 2.Construction: Textured loop. 3.Color: As shown on Drawings. 4.Machine Gage: 1/10 in. 5.Stitch Count: 13 SPI 6.Pile Height: .250 inch 7.Pile Thickness: .187-inch 8.Yarn Weight: 30 oz./sq/yd. 9.Density: 5.775 10.Dye Method: Solution. 11.Primary Backing: Polypropylene 12.Secondary Backing: Precision Plus. 13.Static Control: Less than 3.5 KV 14.Width: 12 feet 15.Flame Resistance: Passes methenamine pill test. 16.Soil Resistance: Scotchgard Commercial. D.Carpet CPT-4: Bolyu Contract as shown on Drawings or equal. 1.Style: Kinsale 2.Construction: Textured loop. 3.Color: As shown on Drawings 4.Machine Gage: 1/10 in.



5.Stitch Count: 12 SPI 6.Pile Height: .219 inch 7.Pile Thickness: .156 inch 8.Yarn Weight: 30 oz./sq/yd. 9.Dye Method: Solution. 10.Primary Backing: Polypropylene 11.Secondary Backing: Precision Plus. 12.Static Control: Less than 3.5 KV 13.Width: 12 feet 14.Flame Resistance: Passes methenamine pill test. 15.Soil Resistance: Scotchgard Commercial. E.Cushion: Sponge-Cushion "Tread-Mor #2580", Dura Undercushions Ltd "Duracushion",

Nouveau Carpet Cushion "Supreme", for double-stick installation. 1.Thickness: 1/4-inch. 2.Density: 26-pound density. F.Carpet and Seam Adhesive: As recommended by carpet manufacturer. G.Carpet Tape: Cloth, double face, 2 inches wide. H.Floor Patch-and-Leveling Compound: Products manufactured specifically for the

purpose as recommended by manufacturer of carpet material furnished. I.Edge Strips: As specified in Section 09650. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation in 1/4 inch

in 10 feet and are ready to receive Work. B.Verify surfaces are clean, dry, sound, and free of oil, grease, wax, and other foreign

matter that would impair installation. C.Do not begin installation until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Protrusions or low spots must be sanded or filled, as needed, to achieve a smooth

surface. B.Vacuum floor surfaces.



3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Slab-Moisture Content Testing: Perform Calcium Chloride Test (RMA Test) with

subfloor temperature not less than 55 degrees F. If emissions exceed rate recommended by carpet flooring manufacturer, do not install resilient flooring.


2.If substrate still does not meet moisture requirements of flooring manufacturer, Contractor may at no additional cost to Owner, apply vapor control membrane in accordance with Section 07265.

B.Perform bond test using the adhesive and cushion that is to be installed to determine

that satisfactory bond can be achieved. 3.04INSTALLATION A.Carpet Cushion: Install cushion by the double stick system, rubber side down. 1.Cushion seams should be at right angles to carpet seams. 2.Using pressure-sensitive adhesive, trowel adhesive uniformly over floor surface and

press cushion, rubber side down, onto adhesive. 3.Butt the cushion seams; ensure contact with adhesive. 4.Trim excess cushion at perimeter of room. 5.Spread adhesive on cushion surface following adhesive manufacturer's directions;

following set-up time, position carpet on adhesive-covered cushion. B.Carpeting shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications,

installation instructions, and recommendations. 1.Install in accordance with seaming plans and as directed. 2.Cut and fit closely and evenly at walls and to and through thresholds. 3.Seams and cross seams selvage edge trimmed, hot melt; tape seaming according to

manufacturer's instructions. 4.Hold cross seams to an absolute minimum. 5.Match carpet lines and patterns at seams in both width and length. 6.Fill strips, where required; minimum width 9 inches, minimum length 36 inches. 7.Take care not to nick or mar base and door trim. C.Lightly roll carpet after application to remove air bubbles and ensure bond. 3.05CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A.Remove spots and smears of cement from carpet immediately with solvent. B.Remove rubbish, wrapping paper, selvages, and scraps. C.Remove loose threads with scissors.



D.Repair or replace any damaged base and door trim. E.Upon completion, vacuum floors with a commercial vacuum cleaner. F.After each area of carpet has been installed, protect from soiling and damage. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Fabric Wall and Ceiling Covering 27720.00 09725-1

SECTION 09725 FABRIC WALL AND CEILING COVERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following wall and ceiling coverings as shown on the Drawings and as

specified. 1.Assembled-in-place impact resistant acoustic wall and ceiling panels. 2.Prefabricated impact resistant acoustic wall panels. 3.Glue-on fabric. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. 2.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems. 3.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: gypsum board substrate. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09725.A"=Acoustical wall and ceiling panel. 2."09725.B"=Acoustical core. 3."09725.C"=Wood blocking. 4."09725.D"=Prefabricated wall panel. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation recommendations

for products proposed for use on this Project. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Submit Shop Drawings showing details at intersections of panels with other panels,

shelves, countertops, doors, electrical outlets and switches, thermostats, and other building components. Indicate core materials.

2.Indicate construction of panels, panel layout, panel joints, connections and attachments. 3.If more than one dye lot of fabric color is required, indicate where each dye lot will be

installed. D.Coordination Drawings: 1.Submit Coordination Drawings showing relation of stretched fabric system and adjacent

work. 2.Indicate proposed panel wall layouts for each application, showing where panel joints



and where differences in panel widths and lengths occur to accommodate surrounding work.

E.Quality Control Submittals: 1.Submit manufacturer's certificate attesting that materials meet the specified

requirements. 2.Submit manufacturer's dye lot compliance form with fabric attached (strike-off). 3.Submit evidence of completion of previous work similar in scope and quantity to the work

under this Section. 4.Submit samples or manufacturer's certification of acoustic performance for

premanufactured acoustic panels and for site fabricated acoustic panels, including fiberglass core, fabric facing, and any interlining that is to be used.

F.Samples for Verification: Submit samples for verification purposes for each color, tex-

ture, and pattern selected for installation. Prepare samples from the same materials to be used on the Project. Include the following:

1.Fabrics: 36-inch-long minimum, full-width sample from dye lot used for the Work with specified fabric treatments applied. Show not less than one pattern repeat. Mark top and face of fabric.

2.Panel Core: 12-inch-square, showing edge treatment. G.Contract Close-Out Submittals: Maintenance data for each fabric, for inclusion in

"Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Section 01773. Include precautions for cleaning materials which may be detrimental.

1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Single Source: Provide each pattern and color of wall covering from a single mill run. B.Installer's Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has successfully installed

fabric-wrapped panels similar in design and extent to those required for this Project, and is approved by panel manufacturer.

C.Surface-Burning Characteristics: 1.Provide materials identical to those tested for the following fire performance

characteristics, per ASTM E84, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

a.Flame Spread: 25 or less. b.Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 2.Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

organization. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver fabric with manufacturers labels indicating brand name, pattern, color, size, and

thickness.



B.Store fabric horizontally. Do not store fabric rolls in upright position. C.Store materials at temperatures between 45 degrees F. and 85 degrees F. 1.05SITE CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: 1.Maintain temperature in space to receive wall covering at minimum temperature of 60

degrees F. for 72 hours before, during, and 48 hours after installation, measured at base elevation.

2.Provide adequate continuous ventilation as required for the wall coverings, sealers, and adhesives used but in no case for a time less than that recommended by the manufacturer for full drying and curing.

1.06SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.General Requirements: Install fabric-wrapped panels after adjacent work has been

completed including the installation or application of architectural woodwork, hardware, doors and frames, wall covering, painting, ceiling systems, floor covering, and electrical and mechanical systems.

1.07WARRANTY A.Fabric-Wrapped Panel Warranty: 1.Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair (re-stretch)

panels that fail in material or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

2.Failures include, but are not limited to: a.Fabric sag. b.Fabric discoloration. 3.Warranty period for fabric-wrapped panels is minimum 2 years after the date of

Substantial Completion. 4.This warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may

have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.08MAINTENANCE A.Extra Materials: 1.Furnish from same production run as materials installed, packaged with protective

covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

2.Fabric: Furnish quantity of full-size rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed. 3.Panels and Panel Fasteners: Furnish number equal to 5 percent of amount installed.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01SYSTEMS A.Impact Resistant Acoustic Wall and Ceiling Panels (Site Fabricated): Fabritrak or

Stretchwall. 1.6-7 PCF Fiberglass with 1/8-inch 18 PCF face; total 1-inch thickness. 2.Fabric Facing: KnollTextile "Foundation W351/1 Natural"; recycled polyester, 16.5

ounces per yard. 3.Rigid vinyl framework with clamping jaws, one-piece section 1-1/2 inch wide by 3/8-inch

thick, fire retardant. 4.NRC: .90 5.Joints: Square edge butt joints. B.Impact Resistant Acoustic Wall and Ceiling Panels (Prefabricated): Decoustics or

Capaul. 1.Impact facing bonded to acoustical backing with fabric facing; total 1-1/8-inch. 2.Fabric Facing: KnollTextile "Foundation W351/1 Natural"; recycled polyester, 16.5

ounces per yard. 3.NRC Range: 0.70-0.90. 4.Fire Resistance: Class A, 25 or less. 5.Joints: Square edge butt joints. 6.Provide with concealed factory installed mounting hardware. C.Glue-On Fabric: KnollTextile "Foundation W351/1 Natural"; recycled polyester, 16.5

ounces per yard. 1.Adhesives, as well as primers and sealers if required, shall be mildew-resistant,

non-staining to wall covering, and conform to recommendations of wall covering manufacturer.

D.Accessories: Adhesive and heavy duty staples as recommended by the system

manufacturer. 2.02FACTORY-FABRICATED PANELS A.General Requirements: 1.Panel Size: Use full fiberglass panels. Cut panels and size to accommodate approved

layout and variations in wall dimensions and reveals. As far as possible, provide panels uniform in width and length, except as otherwise required by layout or obstructions. Panels formed by piecing are not acceptable.

2.Wrap fabric straight and on the grain on the same direction on all panels, un-backed. No seams are allowed.

3.Fabricate panel covered with fabrics with patterns or directional weaves so pattern or weave match in adjacent panels.

4.Stretch fabric tight and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions. Repair sagging.



Full fabric gluing to panel face will not be accepted. 5.Stretch batting over surface and wrap around edges. 6.Conceal mounting devices on backside of panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine walls and ceilings for unsuitable conditions where fabric wrapped panels are to

be installed. B.Verify that surfaces to receive glued-on wall coverings are satisfactory for their

installation. C.If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions

have been corrected. D.Inspect panels for damage. Do not install defective material. 3.02 SITE FABRICATED PANELS A.General: Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1.Fabric shall be stretched tautly over the subsurface and framework without the use of

adhesive. 2.Fabric Border shall be inserted completely into the clamping inlet jaws of the framework

creating a clean crisp appearance devoid of raw edges or lose threads. 3.Fabric pattern shall be matched and true. 4.Fabric shall be removable and replaceable for changability and to provide access to the

surface behind the fabric. 5.The framework shall not "read through" the fabric. 6.Interlining shall be installed beneath the face fabric only where necessary to prevent

fiberglass from showing through or where required to properly stretch the fabric.

7.Adjoining panels shall have abutted joints. B.Field measure each wall area which is to receive the panel system to establish the exact

layout of the units as shown on the Contract Documents. C.Apply the framework; secure with suitable mastic and fasteners located not more than 2

inches on center. D.Install framework plumb and straight, and flush in proper alignment. E.Install sub-surface material, continuous and flush to the shoulder of the track. F.Cut the fabric from each roll marking and maintaining sequence of drops and matching



direction of weave for sequential and uniform installation. G.Install fabric from the face side after the framework is securely fastened to ensure

perfect horizontal and vertical grain alignment. H.Fabric shall be stretched tautly, evenly and smoothly. 3.03PREFABRICATED PANEL INSTALLATION A.Panel Installation: 1.Remove electrical outlets and switch plates, and other work which might interfere with

the installation of the panel system. 2.Layout panels in accordance with approved layout drawings. 3.Install panels level at top and bottom. Vertical panel joints shall be true and plumb. 4.Install panels with fabric running in the same direction. 5.Joints between panels shall be no greater than 1/32 inch. 6.At panels, locate the following wall mounted items flush with face of panels: a.Electrical and communications outlets and switches. b. Clocks. c. Thermostats. d. Other similar permanent building fixtures and equipment. 7.Field cut panel penetrations and neatly fabric-wrap for a clean, snug fitting edge. 3.04GLUE-ON INSTALLATION A.Install with good substrate bond, smooth, clean, and without wrinkles or defects. B.Remove selvage, overlap, and double-cut with straight-edge. C.Apply wall and ceiling coverings consecutively in same order they are cut from rolls,

including areas above and below openings. D.Install with seams vertical and plumb, with seams at least 6 inches away from corners. E.Use stiff bristle brush or flexible broad knife to eliminate air pockets and to secure fabric

to substrate surfaces. F.Visually inspect to verify that installed fabric is secure, smooth, clean, without wrinkles,

and with no gaps or overlaps. G.Inspect all seams, verifying that precise match had been achieved, and correcting

mismatch of color and/or pattern as necessary to secure the Architect's approval.

3.05CLEANING A.After completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces and finished materials. Use a



vacuum cleaner or a cleaner's brush. Use spot removers, solvents or water to clean fabric surface only if approved by fabric manufacturer and after having tested by applying on fabric remnants and ensuring no decoloration, rings, or any other marks occur to fabric after it dries.

B.Replace fabric on panels which are stained or damaged. Replace panels which are

defective. C.Clean adhesive from each wall covering strip as work proceeds using warm water

and clean, soft sponge. Wipe dry immediately. D.Leave premises in a clean and orderly condition. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Stone Facing 27720.00 09750-1

SECTION 09750 STONE FACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide stone facing as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04450 - Stone Veneer. 2.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 3.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09750.A"=Travertine. 2."09750.B"=Anchors. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Stone shall be sound and free from defects affecting strength, durability, and

appearance, no piece of stone showing flaws, imperfections, crystallization and damage before setting or during project warranty period after acceptance will be accepted; natural variations in color and marking characteristic with stone will be accepted.

B.Stone specified in this Section and in Section 044450 shall be obtained from a single

quarry. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Provide data on stone and anchoring system. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorage details, and jointing

methods. 1.Each stone indicated on these drawings shall bear the corresponding number marked on

the back with a non-staining mark. 2.Prior to submission of shop drawings and fabrication, coordinate requirements of

equipment to be installed stonework such as lighting system and electrical outlets.

a.Identify any conflict between equipment and fabrication requirement on shop drawings.



b.Do not proceed with fabrication until conflicts have been resolved. D.Samples: Submit samples showing full range of color, marking, characteristics,

and finish. Coordinate with submission of samples specified in Section 04450. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store stone panels vertically on edge, resting weight on panel edge. B.Protect stone from discoloration. C.Handle and store in such a manner as to prevent breakage and chipping. D.During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather,

cover stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored.

1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the shop

drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Travertine: As specified in Section 04450. B.Anchors, Dowels, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel. C.Cleaner: 1.Commercial, neutral liquid type especially prepared for stone work, as recommended by

stone fabricator. 2.Ph factor between 7 and 10. 3.Free from crystallizing salts or water-soluble alkaline salts. 4.Biodegradable and phosphate free. D.Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. 2.02FABRICATION A.Cutting: Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit, and finish stone work to shapes and dimensions

shown. Make exposed plane surfaces true to line. 1.Cut holes and sinkage in stones for anchors indicated on the accepted shop drawings. B.Joints: Cut with edges square and at right angles to face. Make arrises straight, sharp,



true, and continuous at joints. C.Anchorage: Cut and drill stone units in shop as required for supports, anchors, ties,

bolts, and other inserts. D.Exposed edges shall be square throughout, unless otherwise shown and shall be

finished to match faces. E.Fabricate units for uniform coloration between adjacent units and over the full area of the

installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify supporting structure is true and plumb, and within acceptable tolerances as

required for the installation of the work of this Section. B.Proceed when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02PREPARATION A.Clean stone prior to setting; remove foreign material that could impair installation or

appearance. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Stone Application: 1.Supports: Provide channels, angle supports, anchors and accessories required. 2.Fill holes, slots, and other sinkages during installation of units. Set units into final

position with stainless steel shims, if required. Anchor panels into place by bolting or welding, as shown on the Drawings and in the accepted shop drawings.

3.Anchorage: Attach to stone by hooking anchors into slots on stone units, as detailed on shop drawings, and secure anchors to structural backup. Space anchors as shown and in accordance with applicable codes and accepted shop drawings.

4.Units shall be flush and level across adjoining faces. 5.Units shall be fully anchored into place. B.Joints: 1.Make joint widths as shown. 2.Sealant System: As specified in Section 07920, polyurethane system with back-up rod. 3.04TOLERANCES



A.Maximum variation from plumb of walls and columns: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, within 1/4 inch of correct plumb location at any point.

B.Joints shall have a uniform thickness of 1/4-inch, unless otherwise detailed. Joints shall

not vary more than 1/16 inch in adjacent courses within 2 feet of each other and not more than 1/8 inch from the specified width.

3.05ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged work not matching

approved samples. B.Clean Work and adjacent surfaces free from dirt, stains, other defacements, and

foreign materials and splatters as Work progresses and upon completion, using accepted procedures. Under no circumstances shall wire brushes, harsh abrasive cleansers, or acids be used to clean Travertine.

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Reinforced Gypsum Units 27720.00 09776-1

SECTION 09776 REINFORCED GYPSUM UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide molded-glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum (GFRG) column covers as indicated

on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 04450 - Stone Veneer: travertine base. 2.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems. 3.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 4.Section 09900 - Painting. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09776.A"=Glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum board. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Allowable Tolerance: 1.Dimensional, All Directions: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2.Skin Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 3.Thickness, Total Unit: Plus 1/8 inch-3/16-inch. 4.Warpage or Bowing: Plus or minus 1/16 inch per foot. 5.Out-of-Round: Plus or minus 1/4 inch per 24-inch diameter. B.Physical Properties: 1.Shell Thickness 1/8 to 3/16 inch. 2.Weight (Depending on Reinforcing): 1-1/2 to 2 pounds per square foot. 3.Density: 103-112 pounds per cubic foot. 4.Tensile Strength: 1,800 to 2,000 psi. 5.Compressive Strength: 4,200-4,500 psi. 6.Modulus of Elasticity: 13 - 17 x 10. 7.Impact Strength: 8.0 to 8.8 foot-pounds per sq. in. 8.Hardness (Rockwell "R"): 81. 9. Instron Failure Test (Built-in Furring): 280 pounds (minimum). 10.Fuel Contribution (ASTM E84): 0. 11.Flame Spread (ASTM E84): 0. 12.Smoke Index (ASTM E84): 0. 1.03SUBMITTALS



A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Complete erection drawings showing the following: a.Unit shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions. b.Finishes. c.Joint and connection details. d.Location and details of hardware attached to structure. e.Relationship to adjacent material. f.Description of loose, cast-in, and field hardware. 2.Show location of units by same identification marks placed on units. C.Samples: Prior to fabricating sample units, submit not fewer than three samples

representative of finished exposed faces showing typical range of color and textures.

1.Sample Size: Approximately 8 inches x 8 inches and of appropriate thickness, representative of the proposed finish product.

1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport units in crates. B.Handle in a manner that avoids excessive stresses or damage. C.Store on a clean, dry surface in an area protected from moisture and damage,

preferably in an upright position. 1.05SITE CONDITIONS A.Prior to fabrication, verify jobsite dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Units: High-density gypsum, free of resin and asbestos, reinforced with

continuous-filament random glass fiber mat. Chopped strand fibre reinforcing is not permitted.

B.Channels and Clip Angles: As specified in Section 09110. C.Reinforcing: Steel or wood. D.Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping bugle-head screws, Type G, length as

required for each assembly.



2.03FABRICATION A.Fabricate to profiles and dimensions as shown on accepted shop drawings. B.Meter glass fiber and plaster slurry rates at spray head to achieve desired mix

proportion and glass content. C.Reinforce units with steel or wood. D.Coordinate with coved travertine base as specified in Section 04450. E.Finished column cover surfaces shall be smooth and ready to receive primer and

paint as specified in Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine areas to receive Work, and verify that setting conditions and dimensions

are satisfactory for installation. B.Commence when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B.Install angle clips, channels, and other steel supports as shown or as required. C.Lift units with suitable devices. D.Set units plumb and level. E.Secure base flange to floor slab with mechanical fasteners. F.Secure top flange to steel supports with screws. G.Patch countersunk fasteners to match units' texture. H.Tape, float, and sand joints as specified in Section 09250. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Acoustical Insulation and Sealants 27720.00 09820-1

SECTION 09820 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes providing acoustical batt insulation and sealant work for acoustical

control as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Section: 1.Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: perforated acoustical paneling. 2.Section 07840 - Firestopping: sealing fire-rated construction. 3.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems. 4.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09820.A"=Acoustical batt. 2."09820.B"=Acoustical sealant. 3."09820.C"=Acoustical blanket, black-faced. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's specification, recommendations, and application

equipment and procedures, installation instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Indicated acoustical blanket on shop drawings specified in Section

06200 for acoustical wall paneling assembly. D.Statement of Installation: Signed by installer and Contractor stating that sealant

installed complies with Specifications and that installation methods comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for each condition of installation and use on Project.

1.03DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials in original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages with

manufacturer's name, labels, and product identification. B.Clearly identify acoustical batt manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable

standard, and R-value.



C.Store materials off ground, protected against weather, condensation, and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Acoustical Batt: 3-1/2 inch-thick sound-control batts, unfaced glass-fiber or

mineral-fiber friction-fit type, flame spread 25, conforming to ASTM C665. B.Acoustical Blanket, Black-Faced: Owens Corning Fiberglas "Select Sound 200 or

Certainteed "CertaSound", 2 pcf density insulation; black-coated finish with low light reflectivity.

1.NRC Performance: 0.85 for 2-inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C423 tests on a Type A mounting.

2.Flame spread 25, smoke developed 50 in accordance with UL 723. C.Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements: 1.Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and

openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E90.

2.Manufacturers: US Gypsum "Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant", Pecora Corp. "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant", Tremco "Acoustical Sealant", or Ohio Sealants "Sound Sealant".

D.Accessories: Fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the

particular installation conditions. 1.Provide wire mesh to hold fiberglass blankets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on

Drawings and recommended by manufacturer. B.Verify that surfaces in contact with sealant are free of form release agents and other

coatings applied during fabrication. C.Examine space allocated for insulation for proper depth to receive material. D.Begin installation when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02INSTALLATION



A.General: Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

unless otherwise noted. B.Batt Insulation: 1.Install acoustical insulation in sound insulated spaces as indicated on Drawings. 2.Install 2 layers of acoustical blanket behind perforated paneling; hold in place with wire

mesh. 3.Fill voids to create a continuous sound-isolation plane. 4.Fit insulation tightly between framing members, at end joints of insulation, and

around piping and electrical work. 5.Stagger end joints between studs and, where occurs, between two planes of

insulation. C.Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM

C919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

1.Sealing Gypsum Board: a.Sound-insulated walls indicated on the Drawings shall be sealed airtight

with acoustical sealant specified. b.Hold gypsum board back 1/4 inch from intersecting gypsum board or

other surfaces and apply a bead of acoustical sealant. c.Only one layer of gypsum board in a two-layer construction need be

sealed. 2.Penetrations: a.Penetrations or openings as a result of conduits, ducts, pipes, and

around electrical junction boxes in sound-insulated walls shall be sealed airtight.

b.Holes too large to seal with sealant alone shall be first packed with mineral wool fiber and then sealed airtight with non-hardening sealer.

c.Backs of electrical junction boxes in acoustically rated constructions shall be sealed airtight by a sheet calking.

d.See Section 07840 for treatment of penetrations in fire-rated partitions. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Painting 27720.00 09900-1

SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Painting and finishing as required to complete finishing of the Work including the

following items: 1.Exposed exterior surfaces. 2.Exposed interior surfaces. 3.Mechanical diffusers. 4.Visible interior of ductwork. 5.Electrical subpanels painted to match adjacent wall surface. 6.Mechanical and plumbing vents on roof. B.Related Sections: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various

specification sections. C.Surfaces Not to Be Painted: 1.Factory-prefinished items as specified in various Sections. 2.Prefinished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings. 3.Painting specified elsewhere and included in respective Sections, including but

not necessarily limited to, shop priming. 4.Code-Required Labels: Keep equipment identification and fire rating labels

free of paint. 5.Surfaces concealed in walls and above ceilings except as specifically

indicated otherwise. 6.Ducts, piping, conduit, and equipment concealed in walls and ceilings, unless

specifically indicated otherwise. D.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."09900.A"=Exterior metal paint, ferrous 2."09900.B"=Exterior metal, aliphatic urethane coating. 3."09900.C"=Exterior galvanized metal paint. 4."09900.D"=Exterior galvanized metal, aliphatic urethane coating. 5."09900.E"=Exterior cement plaster and concrete paint. 6."09900.F"=Interior flat wall paint. 7."09900.G"=Interior eggshell enamel. 8."09900.H"=Interior semigloss enamel. 9."09900.I"=Interior gloss enamel. 10."09900.J"=Interior epoxy. 11."09900.K"=Interior lacquer. 12."09900.L"=Interior stain/lacquer.



1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: 1.Not less than 30 days before beginning work, submit a complete list of

materials proposed for use, together with manufacturer's specifications. 2.Paint materials and products shall be subject to the Architect's acceptance. C.Color Sample: 1.Prepare custom colors on hardboard, 8 inches x 8 inches in size. a.For exterior, submit colors matching adjacent material such as stainless steel, travertine,

precast. 2.Submit stock colors on manufacturer's standard large-size

(5-1/2-inch-x-8-1/2-inch) chips. 3.Samples shall be resubmitted as requested until required sheen, color, and

texture is achieved. 4.Prepare wood samples on type and quality of wood specified for use on

Project. 5.Label and identify each sample as to location and application. D.AESS Steel Samples: Provide sample to show bare prepared steel, primed steel, first

finish coat and final finish coat. E.Field Samples: Apply paint colors and finishes to 3-foot square sample wall areas, as

directed. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Architect's and Owner's review of in-place Work. Colors may be require adjustment at no additional cost to Owner.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Include on label of containers: 1.Manufacturer's name. 2.Type of paint. 3.Manufacturer's stock number. 4.Color. 5.Instructions for reducing, where applicable. B.Field Quality Control: 1.Request review by the Architect of first finished room, space, or item of each

color scheme required for color, texture, and workmanship. 2.Use first acceptable room, space, or item as the Project standard for each

color scheme. C.Regulatory Requirements:



1.Comply with the regulations of the South Coast Air Quality Management Control District (SCAQCMD) Riule 113 for Volatile Organic Contents (VOC's).

2.Paint shall be certified by the manufacturer as "non-lead" (less than 0.06 percent lead by weight in the dried film) as defined in Part 1303 of the Consumer Product Safety Act.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver sealed containers with labels legible and intact. B.Storage of Materials: 1.Store only acceptable Project materials on Project site. 2.Store in a suitable location. 3.Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment. 4.Comply with health and fire regulations. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Requirements: 1.Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions

under which coatings and coating systems can be stored and applied. 2.Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. B.Protection: Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces

not being painted concurrently or not to be painted. 1.06 WARRANTY A.Furnish warranty on form in Section 01774. B.Color and Life of Film: 1.At the end of 1 year, colors of surfaces shall have remained free from serious

fading, and variations (if any) shall be uniform. 2.Materials shall have their original adherence at end of 1 year, and there shall

be no evidence of blistering, running, peeling, scaling, chalking, streaking, or stains at end of this period.

1.07MAINTENANCE A.Extra Materials: 1.At completion of the Work, deliver to Owner extra stock of paint equaling

approximately 3 percent of each color used in each coating material used. 2.Stock shall be in tightly sealed and clearly labeled containers. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.01 MATERIALS A.Product numbers specified in Article 3.05, "Paint Systems," are as manufactured by

Frazee Paint Co. and ICI Dulux unless otherwise indicated. B.Materials selected for coating system of each type of surface shall be the product of

a single manufacturer. C.Thinner: As recommended by each manufacturer for his respective product. E.Unsuitability of Specified Products: Claims concerning unsuitability of any materials

specified will not be entertained, unless such claim is made in writing to the Architect before the Work is started.

2.02 COLORS A.The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance of painter and

reserves right to select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces through-out building.

1.Colors may be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard palette or be custom mixed.

B.Submit samples of selected colors as specified in Part 1 above. C.Colors of paints, including shades of stain, shall match color chips on schedule. D.Areas or surfaces indicated as black, either on the Drawings or in the Specification,

shall be so painted, unless specifically directed otherwise. 2.03 MIXING AND TINTING A.Deliver paints and stains ready mixed to jobsite. B.Accomplish job mixing and job tinting only when acceptable to the Architect. C.Mix only in mixing pails placed in suitably sized nonferrous or oxide-resistant metal

pans. D.Use tinting colors recommended by manufacturer for specific type of finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION



A.Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work.

B.Proceed with preparation or coating application when conditions are suitable. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Wood: 1.Clean soiled surfaces. 2.Sand to smooth and even surface, then vacuum off. 3.Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects with filler after priming

coat has dried; color to match finish color. 4.Do not seal wood surfaces to receive stain or natural finish. 5.Sand between enamel or varnish coats. 6.Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Sand excessively rough areas to

match adjacent surfaces, and remove any material that would affect stain penetration or appearance.

B. Gypsum Board: 1.Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound. 2.Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes. a.Dampen with clear water. b. Fill with thin layers of drywall joint cement. 3.Allow to dry. 4.Sand smooth after drying; do not raise nap of paper on gypsum board. C.Metals: 1.Remove mill scale, rust, and corrosion. 2.Clean oils, grease, and dust from surfaces. 3.Touch up chipped or abraded areas in shop coatings using appropriate primer. 4.AESS Steel: Remove all burss, fill al gouges with weld and grind flush. Clean in

accordance with SSPC 10 "Near White Blast Cleaning". 5.Galvanized surfaces shall receive a wash coat made by dissolving 8 ounces

copper acetate or copper sulfate in 1 gallon of water; apply with brush. D.Cement Plaster: 1.Fill cracks and irregularities with Portland cement grout or patching mortar to

provide uniform surface texture. 2.Surfaces shall not be painted until they have completely cured and have a

stabilized moisture content, but in no case less than 30 days from completion of surface.

E.Concrete: 1.Fill cracks and irregularities with Portland cement grout or patching mortar to

provide uniform surface texture.



2.Surfaces shall not be painted until they have completely cured and have a stabilized moisture content, but in no case less than number of days recommended by paint manufacturer.

F.Surfaces which cannot be prepared or painted as specified shall be immediately

brought to the attention of the Architect in writing. 1.Starting of work without such notification will be considered acceptance by the

Contractor of surface involved. 2.Contractor shall replace unsatisfactory work caused by improper or defective

surfaces, as directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 APPLICATION A.Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations

recommended by paint manufacturer. B.Application: 1.Apply paint with suitable brushes, rollers, or spraying equipment. 2.Apply stain in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.Rate of application shall not exceed that recommended by paint manufacturer

for surface involved. C.Comply with recommendation of product manufacturer for drying time between

succeeding coats. D.Finish coats shall be smooth and free from brush marks, streaks, laps or pileup of

paints, and skipped or missed areas. E.Leave all parts of moldings and ornaments clean and true to details with no undue

amount of paint in corners and depressions. F.Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no

overlapping. G.Refinish whole wall where portion of finish is not acceptable. H.Adjust natural finishes as necessary to obtain identical appearance on veneers and

solid stock. I.Hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place

shall be removed prior to painting and replaced upon completion of each space. J.Top and bottom edges of doors shall receive same paint system finish required for

door faces. K.Paint visible surfaces behind vents, registers, or grilles flat black. 1.Wash exposed metal with solvent, then prime and paint as scheduled.



2.Spray-paint wherever practicable. L.Do not paint over fusible links, UL labels, or sprinkler heads. M.Exposed Plumbing and Mechanical Items: Items without factory finish such as

conduits, pipes, access panels, and items of similar nature shall be finished to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, unless otherwise directed.

3.04 CLEANING A.Touch up and restore finish where damaged. B.Remove spilled, splashed, or spattered paint from surfaces. C.Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. D.Leave storage space clean and in condition required for equivalent spaces in

Project. 3.05PAINT SYSTEMS A.General: 1.Exterior paint systems are specified and identified by number and interior paint

systems by letter. 2.Only major areas are schedule, but miscellaneous and similar items and areas

within room or space shall be treated with suitable system. 3.Number of coats scheduled is minimum. a.Additional coats shall be applied at no additional cost if necessary to

completely hide base material, produce uniform color, and provide satisfactory finish result.

4.This specification shall serve as a guide and is meant to establish procedure and quality. Confer with Architect to determine exact finish desired.

B.Acceptance of Final Colors: Final coat of paint for both exterior and interior shall

not be applied until colors have been accepted by the Architect. C.Exterior Painting Schedules: (Frazee numbers used, unless noted otherwise.) System 1 Semi-Gloss Aliphatic Polyurethane Coating on Galvanized Metal (handrails, light housing

assembly) 1 coat Tnemec 69 High Build Epoxoline* 1 coat Tnemec 73 Series Endura-Shield at 3.0-5.0 DFT. *Shop primed. System 2 Galvanized Metal Satin-gloss Acrylic (doors, frames, sheet metal flashing)



Pretreat*Jasco Prep N-Prime 1 coat 661 Metal Prime 1 coat 381 Super Bond 1 coat 221 Acri-Lite * = omit if not required by Architect. System 3 Aluminum satin-gloss acrylic. Pretreat*Jasco Prep N-Prime 1 coat 661 Metal Prime 1 coat 381 Super Bond 1 coat 221 Acri-Lite * = omit if not required by Architect. System 4 Semi-Gloss Aliphatic Polyurethane Coating on Ferrous Metal (AESS Steel) 1 coat Tnemec 69 High Build Epoxoline *2 coatsTnemec "73 Endura-Shield" 2 to 3 mils DFT * = lightly sandblast between coats. D.Interior Painting Schedules: (Frazee numbers used, unless noted otherwise.) System A Flat Finish on Gypsum Board 1 coat061 Aqua Seal 1 coat011 Velvin Flat 1 coat011 Velvin Flat System B Eggshell Acrylic on Gypsum Board 1 coat061 Aqua Seal 1 coat22 Satin Glide Eggshell 1 coat22 Satin Glide Eggshell System C Semigloss Acrylic (Non-blocking) on Gypsum Board 1 coat*061 Aqua Seal 1 coat21 Satin Glide Semi-gloss 1 coat21 Satin Glide Semi-gloss System D Epoxy Finish on Gypsum Board 1 coatTnemec Series 130 1 coatTnemec Series 113 or 114 Tufcoat at 4.0-6.0 DFT. System E Waterborne Lacquer Finish on Interior Wood 1 coat560HO32 Lacquer Sanding Sealer



1 coat520HO42 Semi-gloss Lacquer 1 coat520HO42 Semi-gloss Lacquer System F Stain/transparent Finish on Interior Wood 1 coat685 Pigmented stain 1 coat760 Lacquer Sanding Sealer 1 coat726 Satin Lacquer 1 coat726 Satin Lacquer System G Semigloss Finish on Interior Wood 1 coat 367 Enamel Undercoater 1 coat124 Mirro-Glide Semi-gloss 1 coat124 Mirro-Glide Semi-gloss System H Semigloss Acrylic Finish (non-blocking) on Ferrous Metal or Aluminum 1 coat 661 Metal Prime (if not shop primed) 1 coat 367 FraFlo 1 coat 124 Miro Glide Semi-Gloss System I Epoxy Finish on Concrete 1 coat 562 Primer 1 coat 542 Aro-Gard 1 coat 542 Aro-Gard System J Eggshell Finish on Gypsum Plaster 1 coat 65 Acry-Prime 1 coat 22 Lo-Glo 1 coat 22 Lo-Glo END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Visual Display Boards 27720.00 10100-1

SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Provide the following as shown and as specified. 1.Markerboards (Whiteboards). 2.Greenboard; vertical sliding and fixed. 3.Tackboards. 4.Cork with fabric. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems: backing plates. 2.Section 11602 - Laboratory Casework. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."10100.A"=Markerboards (Whiteboard). 2."10100.B"=Greenboard, fixed. 3."10100.C"=Greenboard, sliding. 4."10100.D"=Tackboard. 5."10100.E"=Cork with fabric. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's current published specifications including information

about care and maintenance of surfaces. C.Shop Drawings: Show shape, size, material, assembly, joints, fastenings, and

connections. 1.03DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store rolled materials on end; store flat materials flat. B.Handle carefully to prevent damage. Replace damaged parts at no cost to Owner. 1.04SCHEDULING A.Do not install units until walls have received final finish.



1.05EXTRA STOCK A.Provide one eraser and one set of markers per board. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01UNITS A.Markerboards (Whiteboards): Greensteel, Claridge, or Nelson Adams. 1.Construction: Porcelain enamel writing surface fused to minimum 26 gage

enameling-grade sheet steel laminated to 1/4-inch hardboard and backed with 0.015-inch thick aluminum foil or panel thickness as indicated on Laboratory Drawings. Surface shall be type for writing with liquid chalk, shall permit instant cleaning, and shall be stain resistant.

a.Color: As selected by Architect. 2.Frame: Wood to match laboratory casework. 3.Aluminum chalktray. 4.Size: As shown on Drawings. B.Vertical Sliding Greenboards: Greensteel, Claridge, or Nelson Adams; fixed and

sliding panels. 1.Construction: Enameling iron or steel of low metalloid and copper content, especially

manufactured and processed for temperatures over 1400 degrees used in coating porcelain on steel units for architectural purposes; minimum 22 gage.

a.Facing Surfaces: Primer coat with minimum 0.0025-inch vitreous-porcelain writing surface, factory applied to 7/16-inch-thick fiberboard core.

b.Color: Green. c.Panel Edges: Porcelain enamel. 2.Housing shall be designed to carry the complete load; panels equally

counterbalanced. 3.Frame: To be selected by Architect. 4.Aluminum chalktray. 5.Size: As shown on Drawings. C.Tackboards: Greensteel, Claridge, or Nelson Adams. 1.Construction: 1/8-inch cork with Claridge "Duracore" or equivalent backing; total

thickness 1/2-inch or panel thickness as indicated on Laboratory Drawings.

a.Color: As selected by Architect. 2.Frame: Wood to match laboratory casework. 3.Size: As indicated on Drawings. D.Cork: Greensteel, Claridge, or Nelson Adams. 1.Construction: Nominal 1/4-inch cork.



a.Color: As selected by Architect. 2.Fabric: As selected by Architect. 3.Adhesive: As recommended for installation. 4.Size: As indicated on Drawings. E.Fasteners: As required to provide solid anchorage. 2.02FABRICATION A.Factory fabricate units to sizes required. B.Laminate board to back-up material using adhesive in accordance with adhesive

manufacturer's directions. C.Frame: 1.Cut to lengths required; joints in straight runs will not be permitted. 2.Miter corners and provide concealed reinforcing as required for rigid frame and hairline

joints. 3.Ensure frames conceal edges. D.Mount securely in frames with concealed fastenings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces to receive units and verify that: 1.Surfaces are trues and free from foreign matter and projections. 2.Finishes have been applied to receiving surfaces. 3.Backing is adequate. 4.Receiving dimensions are correct. B.Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Shim walls as required for flat plane of board surfaces. B.Ensure edges are plumb and vertical, and joints are hairline tight. C.Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Contract

Documents. D.Attach securely through finish wall to rigid backing. E.Replace units which show any visible imperfections. Field repairs will not be



acceptable. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Metal Toilet Compartments 27720.00 10160-1

SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide ceiling-hung metal toilet partitions and wall hung urinal screens as shown

on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: overhead supporting structure. 2.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing System. 3.Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."10160.A"=Metal toilet partitions. 2."10160.B"=Metal urenal screens. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets, parts list, installation instructions, and

maintenance procedures. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate type, location, and attachment of accessories and installation

layout and details. C.Samples: 1.Manufacturer's standard colors of specified finish, for selection by Architect. 2.12-inch-x-12-inch pieces of selected colors. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Requirements of Regulatory Agency: The layout of compartment designated disabled

accessible and hardware provisions shall comply with current accessible requirements in California Building Standards Code (CBSC) Title 24.

1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Protect materials from damage during handling and storage on site; work showing dents, deformations, or other defects will not be accepted.

B.Repair scratches or defacement to match original finish; replace damaged items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Mills Series 600, Sanymetal Products, Inc. Century Partition Type, or Global. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Sheet Steel: Hot-rolled and zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A525; sheets

shall also be mill phosphatized. B.Reinforcing: Hot-rolled steel. C.Insulation Core: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb or corrugated Kraft paper, rot-

and vermin-proof. D.Hardware, Fittings, Fasteners, and Accessories: Stainless steel, clear anodized

aluminum, or chrome-plated non-ferrous castings. 2.03FABRICATION A.Types of Products: Ceiling-hung partitions, wall mounted urinal screen. B.Face Sheets: Flush, seamless, stretcher-leveled steel sheets bonded under pressure

to insulation core with waterproof cement. C.Minimum Gages of Steel: 1.Face Sheets of Doors: 22 gage. 2.Face Sheets of Partitions and Urinal Screens: 22 gage. 3.Face Sheets of Pilasters: 20 gage. 4.Reinforcement for Tapping: 14 gage. 5.Reinforcement for Anchoring: 12 gage. D.Minimum Thickness: 1.Doors, Partitions, and Urinal Screens: 1 inch. 2.Pilasters: 1-1/4 inches. E.Construction: 1.Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Two face sheets securely bonded to insulation core and

reinforced as required for hardware and fasteners. a.Design and reinforce panels supporting grab bars to support a minimum of 250 pounds.



2.Edges of Sheets: Either integrally interlocked or secured with a continuous interlocking molding.

3.Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 4.Reinforcement: Concealed. F.Toilet Compartments: 1.Sizes: As shown on Drawings. 2.Locations: As shown on Drawings. G.Urinal Screens: 1.Sizes: As shown. 2.Locations: As shown. H.Hardware, Fittings, and Fasteners: 1.Provide theftproof fasteners for exposed hardware and component connections. 2.Conceal operable parts of hinges in door, gravity rising or nonrising spring tension

actuated. 3.Provide manufacturer's standard latches, with emergency release operation without use

of special tools or keys. 4.Latch on accessible compartment shall not require grasping or twisting to use. 5.Inside and outside of accessible compartment door shall be equipped with a loop or

U-shaped handle immediately below the latch. I.Accessories: Provide 1 combination coat hook and door bumper in each toilet

compartment. J.Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish system to exposed ferrous

surfaces, except hardware and fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces to receive materials are satisfactory for their installation. Do not

commence installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install toilet partitions, urinal screens, hardware, fittings, and accessories in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop drawings. B.Provide fasteners suitable for attaching to adjacent construction. C.Conceal evidence of drilling in finished Work.



3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Adjust brackets to provide uniform clearances not exceeding the following: 1.Pilaster and Wall: 1 inch. 2.Panels and Wall: 1 inch. 3.Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. 4.Pilasters and Doors: 3/16 inch. B.Adjust hardware for proper operation. C.Set hinges to hold doors ajar when not latched. 1.Exception: On accessible compartment, door shall be self-closing. D.After completion of installation, clean and polish exposed compartments and screen

surfaces, and touch-up minor scratches to match finish or replace with new as determined by Architect.

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Louvers and Vents 27720.00 10200-1

SECTION 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide aluminum wall louvers as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: supplemental framing. 2.Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3.Section 07920 - Joint Sealants: perimeter sealants. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."10200.A"=Fixed metal louver. 2."10200.B"=Removable metal louver. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data of louvers, including standard drawings,

and free area of each type of louver. C.Shop drawings showing fabrication details and installation conditions. D.Samples: Manufacturer's standard colors. 1.03DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver, store, and handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to prevent

damage. 1.04WARRANTY A.Provide special warranty against fading and crazing of fluoropolymer finish for a period

of 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.01MANUFACTURERS A.C/S Louvers "Model RS-7305", The Airolite Company "Model SCH8", Ruskin, or Airline. 2.02MATERIALS A.Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T52 alloy, thickness as required for specified

design requirements. B.Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, compatible with fabricated items. C.Finish: PPG "Duranar", Valspar "Fluropon" or equal fluoropolymer spray coating

containing 70 percent "Kynar 500" resin conforming to requirements of AAMA 605.2.

1.Color: As selected by Architect. 2.03FABRICATION A.Components shall be fabricated to manufacturer's standard design with removable

section and curb. B.Fixed Louvers: 1.Free Area: As scheduled on Drawings. 2.Minimum Thickness: .081 inch. 3.Blades, Mullions, and Frames: Manufacturer's high performance louver design; 4

inches deep. 4.Assemble louvers by welding; grind welds smooth. 5.Install vertical stiffener assemblies between blades, spacing as recommended by

manufacturer. 6.Screens: Provide on the interior of the louver where scheduled on Drawings; 1/2-inch

mesh aluminum with aluminum frame; removable for cleaning. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Check openings to assure that dimensions conform to Drawings. B.Assure that openings are free of irregularities which would interfere with installation. C.Verify that supplemental framing is installed as required. D.Commence installation when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02INSTALLATION



A.Install plumb and true, securely fastened, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Seal perimeter with sealant specified in Section 07920. 3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Repair damage to louvers and to factory finish to match original, or replace as

determined by Architect. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Wall Surface Protection System 27720.00 10265-1

SECTION 10265 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes providing the following as shown on the Drawings and as specified: 1.Stainless steel corner guards. 2.Stainless steel crash rails. 3.Vinyl wall protection. B.Related Section: 1.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems: backing plates. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."10265.A"=Stainless steel corner guard. 2."10265.B"=Crash rail/bumper guard. 3."10265.C"=Wall covering. 4."10265.D"=Jamb guard. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets for each item specified. C.Shop Drawings: Provide layout indicating installation details, backing, and adjacent

construction. D.Samples: Complete chart of manufacturer's available colors for selection by

Architect. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall surface protection system components

that are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for the fire performance characteristics indicated below. Identify wall surface protection system components with appropriate markings from the testing and inspection organization.

1.Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2.Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Deliver and store corner guards, crash rails, handrails and fasteners in

manufacturer's original packaging, identified with manufacturer's name and type of product, and size.

B.Store indoors, protected form moisture and other sources of damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEMS A.Corner Guards (Stainless Steel): Wilkinson "WCGP-M", Pawling "CG-50", or JSM

"Series 400 Surface Mounted Corner Guards". B.Crash Rail: Life-Science "Sani-Rail Wall Protection System", or C/S "Acrovyn

ECR-32A". 1.Construction: Anodized aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel except in Cage Wash

Rooms which shall have type 304 stainless steel only. 2.Provide with continuous inside and outside corners and end returns, custom lengths as

needed for locations shown on Drawings. 3.Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard fasteners of size and length suitable for the

conditions of installation; 16 inches on center. C.Impact Resistant Wall Covering: Boston Metal Products "Tuff-Guard, Series 60",

Construction Specialties, Inc. "Acrovyn-High Impact Wall Covering", or Institutional Products Corporation; semi-rigid sheet wall covering.

1.Sheet Size: 4 feet by maximum length. 2.Sheet Thickness: 0.060 inch thick. 3.Installation Type: Wainscot height. 4.Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard matching moldings and trim as required. D.Jamb Guard: Life Science Products, Inc. roller-action stainless steel, minimum 4-foot

length. E.Adhesive: Water-based type as recommended by wall covering manufacturer for

proper installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.After application of wall base and finish painting of walls is complete, examine areas



and conditions under which wall protection systems are to be installed. B.If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not proceed with the Work until such conditions

have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Prior to application, clean side of corner guards that will be in contact with wall surface. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Install corner guards and crash rails in conformance with manufacturer's instructions

and as specified herein. B.Install corner guards at locations shown. 1.Install corner guards with bottom edge at top of wall base extending to full height of wall

or as shown on Drawings at epoxy base. 2.Fill behind corner guards to eliminate any voids. Set edges of corner guards in sealant. C.Install bumper rails at locations and mounting heights shown. D.Install wall covering with adhesive. E.Install jamb guards at locations and mounting heights shown, in conformance with

manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Prior to time of final acceptance, strip corner, edge, and wall guards of protective

coverings, and clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Remove and replace any defective, misaligned, or damaged units, at no additional cost

to Owner. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Access Flooring 27720.00 10270-1

SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide factory-fabricated concrete-filled, pedestal supported, stringer-framed and

corner-locked access floor system as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: sealer. 2.Section 09560 - Resilient Flooring: base. 3.Division 15 - Mechanical: underfloor fire extinguishing system. 4.Division 16 - Electrical: conduit. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."10270.A"=Access flooring pedestal. 2."10270.B"=Access flooring panels. 3."10270.C"=Access flooring anchors. 4."10270.D"=Resilient flooring. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design Requirements: 1.Pedestals: System shall be engineered to comply with seismic requirements for a 2-foot

high pedestals. 2.Floor Panels: a.Live Load of 100 Pounds per Square Foot: Maximum deflection of 0.04 inch. b.Concentrated Load: 750 pounds; maximum deflection of 0.08 inch. c.Permanent Deformation: Maximum of 0.02 inch at design load. d.Ultimate Load-Carrying Capacity: Not less than twice design strength. 3.Lateral Stability: Design system for lateral loads and CCR Title 24 with stability in all

directions, with or without panels in place. B.Surface Electrical Resistance: Maximum one ohm per panel. D.Allowable Tolerances: 1.Floor Panel Flatness: Plus or minus 0.02 inch on diagonal on top of panel or

underneath edge. 2.Floor Panel Length: Plus or minus 0.02 inch. 3.Floor Panel Squareness: Plus or minus 0.005 inch in panel length. 4.Finish Floor: Level within plus or minus 0.010 inch over entire floor and plus or minus

0.060 inch in 10 feet, but in no case shall dimension from structural to



finish floor be less than 6 inches. E.Materials shall comprise a complete system produced by one manufacturer. F.Test Methods: Comply with the following: 1.Test Method for concentrated, ultimate, rolling, overturning moment, and axial loads shall

be in accordance with the "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors" as published by CISCA, the Ceiling and Interiors Systems Construction Association.

2.Test Method for Impact Load: Panel without floor covering shall be supported on actual understructure. An impact load is applied to the panel via a one square inch indentor which is struck by a predetermined load dropped from a height of 36 inches. The panel shall be loaded at its weakest point. Weakest point to be determined by an independent test lab.

3.Test Method For Electrical Resistance: The electrical resistance of the access floor system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 99. The test is modified for access floors where one electrode is placed onthe floor surface covering and the other electrode is attached to the understructure.

1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, including maintenance

instructions, for each item specified. D.Shop Drawings: Indicate panel layout, details of assembly and anchorage, detailed

components of assembly, anchorage and edge details and intersections with other construction, elevation differences, location of perforated panels, and panels requiring drilling or cut-out for services, appurtenances, or interruptions.

C.Samples: Submit floor-covering samples showing manufacturer's full range of

available colors for selection by the Architect. D.Certification: Manufacturer's certified laboratory test data which indicates that the

supplied system complies with the specified design requiredments. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1.National Fire Protection association (NFPA) Standard No. 75. 2.Maximum flame-spread rating of assembly of 25, per ASTM E84. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Deliver and store in manufacturer's original packaging, identified with manufacturer's name and type of product, size, and location for installation.

B.Packaging shall be such to prevent damage during shipping and handling. C.Store indoors protected form moisture and in a manner to prevent materials from

twisting, bending, or other damage. 1.06MAINTENANCE A.Extra Materials: 1.Provide 100 spares of each size of floor panel. 2.Provide ten spare pedestals and ten spare stringers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Interface AR "Tec-Crete" or Tate "ConCore 1000". 2.02SYSTEM TYPES A.Floor Panels: 1.Composite steel and concrete, welded construction. a.Size: 24 inch x 24 inch nominal. b.Panels shall be interchangeable, easily removable by one person with suction-cup tool,

and easily inserted. c.Finish Flooring: High pressure laminate; color to be selected by Architect. 1)Bonding Adhesive: Moisture resistant, type recommended by surface covering

manufacturer. B.Stringers (beams): Steel stringers shall form grid pattern for supporting each edge of

each floor panel and, in turn, supported by pedestal located at each corner of each floor panel.

C.Pedestals: 1.Height to raise finish floor as shown on Drawings. a.Shaft: Threaded tube, minimum 1-inch outside diameter. b.Vertical Adjustment of Shaft: Minimum 1-1/2-inch range with vibration-proof locking

arrangement. c.Steel Base: Minimum 1/8 inch thick x 4 inches square. d.Attachment: Mechanically anchored to concrete substrate. 1)Provide pedestal manufacturers' standard mechanical attachment to resist horizontal

force of 20 pounds applied at top of pedestal. 2)Panel fasteners shall be captive, not self-tapping.



D.Electrical Outlets: Coordinate cutting of holes and trim of boxes in floors; see Section 16140.

E.Electrostatic Grounding Connectors: Solid Copper. F.Accessories: 1.Panel-Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard equipment for type of panel installed.

Provide minimum 4 per floor. 2.Cable Cutout Protection: a.Extruded polyvinyl chloride or neoprene edging. b.Closed-cell neoprene sheet, ASTM D1692, 3/8 inch thick, self-extinguishing and

nonburning. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and conditions under which access flooring is to be installed. B.Verify that required sub-floor utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. C.If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not proceed with the Work until such conditions

have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Clean substrate surfaces. B.Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. C.Verify locations of all cutouts. 3.03INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Install floor system under supervision of manufacturer's authorized representative, rigid,

firm, and free of vibration, rocking, rattles, squeaks, and other noises. 2.Accurately align panels and fit neatly to floor or room perimeters. 3.Layout floor panel installation with no panel smaller than 12 inches in either direction. 4.Make each panel level and flush with surrounding panels and matched at corners. 5.Remove construction debris as work progresses. 6.Use care to ensure that metal particles resulting from cutting or other installation

operations do not fall into subfloor area or are retained on any floor components.

B.Pedestals:



1.Securely fasten pedestal-base flanges in accurate, permanent location to substrate with mechanical fasteners.

2.Pedestal flanges shall have full bearing on subfloor over entire area of flange; perform necessary leveling by grinding or filling substrate.

C.Positively secure stringers (beams) to pedestal heads. D.Floor Panels: Mechanically attached panels shall be bolted at the corners in

accordance with manufacturer's standards. E.Provide positive electrical grounding of entire access-floor system. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Vacuum-clean area. 1.Remove extraneous metal particles or items which have fallen into subfloor area or have

been retained on floor components. B.When installation is complete, clean soiled or discolored surfaces of factory-finished

panels. C.Remove all panels damages, improperly installed, or soiled beyond cleaning, and

replace with new panels. D.Adjust system as necessary to be sturdy, rigid, firm, and free of vibration, rocking, rattles,

or squeaks. E.Cover and protect the factory-finish floor with 20-pound Kraft paper properly sealed to

prevent tearing. F.Protect flooring during equipment installation. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Identifying Devices 27720.00 10400-1

SECTION 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Providing the following signage as shown on the Drawings and as specified: 1.Signs at entry to parking and disabled accessible parking spaces as required by

California Building Standards Code (CBSC) and ADA. 2.Engraved signs for toilet room doors in compliance with CBSC and Americans With

Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). 3.Elevator and stairway signage. 4.Evacuation signage. 5.Decals at accessible entries. 6.Room capacity signage. 7.Room number plaques. 8.Laboratory signage. 9.Building letters and numbers. 10.Donor Signage. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 02765 - Pavement Marking: striping and disabled symbol in paint at

pavement. 2.Section 04450 - Stone Veneer: carved stone letters. 3.Section 04451 - Stone Lettering. 4.Section 07416 - Stainless Steel Panels. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."10400.A"=Parking signs. 2."10400.B"=Toilet room signs. 3."10400.C"=Elevator signs. 4."10400.D"=Stair signs. 5."10400.E"=Evacuation signs. 6."10400.F"=Entry decal. 7."10400.G"=Room capacity sign. 8."10400.H"=Room number. 9."10400.I"=Laboratory signage. 10."10400.J"=Not used. 11."10400.K"=Building letters and numbers. 1.02SUBMITTALS



A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate type, style, color, and method of attachment. C.Samples: One full-size sample of each sign type, indicating construction color, size,

layout of letters and method of attachment. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer's and Installer's Qualifications: Identifying devices shall be fabricated and

installed by a sign company acceptable to the Architect and regularly engaged in the execution of quality sign work, having successfully provided work, similar to the various types shown and specified herein, on previous completed projects.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Include installation templates, adhesive and installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PORCELAIN SIGNS AT PARKING A.Provide porcelain enamel on steel signs with beaded text and symbols meeting

requirements of CBSC Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 1129B. B.At entry to parking provide State Access Code required sign, minimum 17 inches x

22 inches as follows: 1."Unauthorized vehicles parked in designated accessible spaces not displaying

distinguishing placards or license plates issued for persons with disabilities may be towed away at Owner's expense. Towed vehicles may be reclaimed at

__________________________________________________________ _________________________(list towing service address) or by telephoning _________________________________________. C.At parking spaces provide state required sign, minimum 70 square inches,

displaying disabled accessibility symbol. 1.Sign shall be painted with system specified in Section 09900. 2.02TOILET ROOM SIGNS A.Signs: Etched stainless steel to be selected by Architect.



B.Provide signs required by CBSC Title 24, Chapter 1103. 1.Men's Room: 12-inch equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up. 2.Ladies' Room: 12-inch diameter circle. C.Provide rectangular signs required by ADA with pictogram, raised copy, and Braille tags. D.Attachment: Concealed type as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of

substrate involved. 2.03STAIR SIGNAGE A.Signs: Andco "PME 1000" or Mohawk "Series 200A Sand-Carved"; 1/8-inch thick hard

phenolic ES plastic laminate and raised copy/Grade 2 Braille. 1.Color and Size: As selected by Architect; letter style Helvetica. 2.At Stairs: Signs shall identify each stairway, indicate whether there is roof access, the

floor level, and the upper and lower terminus of the stairway. 3.Text at Elevator: "IN CASE OF FIRE, USE STAIRS" 2.04ELEVATOR SIGNAGE A.Signs: Etched stainless steel to be selected by Architect. 2.05EVACUATION SIGNAGE A.Signs: Etched stainless steel to be selected by Architect. B.Text: Graphic signage indication evacuation routes as required by CBSC Title 19

Section 3.09. 2.06 ENTRY DECALS A.Provide minimum 4-inch square decal with international handicapped symbol white

on blue background with white border, applied to glass at accessible entry doors.

2.07ROOM CAPACITY SIGNAGE A.Signs: Etched stainless steel to be selected by Architect. B.Text: "MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY: ______ PERSONS". 1.Size: 1-inch high letters. 2.08ROOM NUMBER PLAQUES A.Manufacturer: Etched stainless steel to be selected by Architect.



B.Text: To be determined. 2.09LABORATORY SIGNAGE A.Sign: Manufacturer and design to be selected by Architect. B.Laboratory Entrance: Provide each interior laboratory entrance with a Caltech

Emergency Information sign with the following information: 1.Emergency contacts. 2.Hazards present. 3.National Fire Protection (NFPA) diamond. 4.Proposition 65 warning. C.Radioactive Materials: 1.Entrance: Provide each Laboratory where radioactive materials are used or stored with

a sign posted at the entrance "CAUTION RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL" 2.Radioactive Area: Areas where radiation levels might expose a person to 5 millirem in

any one hour shall be posted with a "CAUTION RADIATION AREA" sign. D.Laser Lab, Entrance: 1.The entrance to a lab with Class 2 and 3a lasers that do not exceed the maximum

exposure limit for irradiance shall be posted with "CAUTION LASER" sings.

2.The entrance to a lab with Class 3a lasers that exceed the maximum exposure limit for irradiance and class 3b and 4 lasers shall be posted with "DANGER LASER" signs.

E.Magnetic Field, Entrance: 1.The entrance to a facility that contains a strong magnetic field shall be posted with: "WARNING STRONG MAGNETIC FIELD" "NO PACEMAKERS" "NO METALLIC IMPLANTS" "NO NEUROSTIMULATORS" "NO LOOSE METAL OBJECTS" F.Gaseous Fire Suppression System, Entrance: The entrance to a facility that contains a

gaseous fire suppression system shall be posted with "CAUTION" "This Area is Protected by "[type of gas]" System". "In case of discharge exit from the protected area immediately". G.Biosafety, Entrance: The entrance to a biosafety Level 3 and 4 facility shall be posted

with: 1.Entry requirements (immunization and clothing). 2.Emergency contacts. 2.10BUILDING LETTERS AND NUMBERS



A.Letters: 1.Material: Stainless steel. 2.Letter Style: To be determined. 3.Mounting: As shown on Drawings for installation on stainless steel panels specified in

Section 07416. 4.Text: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.10DONOR SIGNAGE A.Embossed stainless steel flush plate with recessed stainless steel letters. 1.Letter Style: As shown on Drawings. 2.Text: As shown on Drawings. 3.See Donor Sign Drawings. 2.11ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners: As recommended by sign manufacturer for substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.General: Install as indicated and approved, plumb and level, accurately aligned, and

securely anchored. B.Building Identification Letters: Attach pin-mounted numbers/letters to wall in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C.Parking Signs: 1.Install parking space signs at front of space of public parking and at entrance

to off-street parking or immediately adjacent and visible from each stall as required by State Access Code.

2.Install parking space signs centered at 80 inches above the parking surface, at the head of parking space as required by State Access Code.

3.Provide mounting hardware, including painted posts, as needed. D.Toilet Room Signs: 1.Install signs after surfaces on which they are to be mounted are painted and

finished. 2.Location: Mount signs centered at 60 inches above finished floor. 3.Install State Access Code required signage centered on door and ADA

required signage on wall adjacent to latch side. 4.Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5.Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.



E.Stairway Identification Signs: Provide signs at each floor level in all stairways, where shown on the Drawings and wherever otherwise required by the Uniform Building Code.

1.Location: Locate signs 5'-0" above floor level landing in a position which is readily visible when the door is in the open or closed position.

2.Coordinate locations with Architect. F.Elevator Signage: Install on wall in locations where directed by Architect. G.Entry Decals: Install on glass at accessible entries in locations as accepted by

Architect. H.Room Capacity Signs: Provide signs indicating maximum occupant capacity at

locations as directed by Architect. I.Room Numbers: Provide signs at locations as directed by Architect. J.Laboratory Signage: Provide signs at locations as shown on Laboratory Drawings. K.Evacuation Signage: Post adjacent to elevator call station and at stairways in exact

locations where directed by Architect. L.Building Letters and Numbers: Install in location shown on Drawings. M.Donor Signage: Install on walls as shown on Drawings. 3.02CLEAN AND ADJUST A.Remove and replace signs and material which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or

damaged in any other way during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

B.Clean sign material using only cleaners and methods in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION

Broad Center for the Biological Sciences Issued for Construction California Institute of Technology, Pasadena CA September 29, 2000 September 10, 2001

SMP/SHG - PCF&P Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 27720.00 10522-1

SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide fire extinguishers, hangers, and cabinets complete as shown and as

specified. B.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are defined

as follows: 1."10522.A"=Fire extinguisher and cabinet. 2."10522.B"=Fire extinguisher bracket. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for fire

extinguishers and cabinets required. C.Shop Drawings: Show locations and methods of attachment. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Furnish fire extinguishers and cabinets from only one manufacturer. B.Provide extinguishers which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and which bear UL

mark. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store packaged products in original containers with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use. B.Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of products to prevent damage.

Where necessary, stack products off ground on level platform, fully protected from weather.

1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS



A.Schedule Sequencing: Schedule installation of items to occur after application of

exposed finishes wherever installation will not damage exposed finish surfaces and completion of finishes will not impede installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01EQUIPMENT A.Fire Extinguishers: UL-rated, 4A-60:BC, 10-pound nominal capacity, for Class A, B,

and C fires. 1.Manufacturers: JL Industries "Model Cosmic 10E", Larsen, or Potter-Roemer. B.Recessed Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 18 gage steel tub, cold-rolled 20 gage steel

door, 16 gage steel frame. White enamel finish interior, prime coated exterior; trimless with solid door vertical duo door and 5/16-inch flat trim with vertical duo door. Polished finish pull handle with friction catch.

1.Manufacturers: JL Industries, Larsen, or Potter-Roemer Inc. C.Mounting Brackets for Surface-Mounted Extinguishers: Manufacturer's standard for

extinguisher specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine the substrate and conditions under which fire extinguishers and cabinets

are to be installed, and notify the Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work.

1.Ensure adequate support will be available at time of installation. B.Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in

a manner acceptable to the installer. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install cabinets and extinguishers where indicated on the Drawings. 1.Provide fire extinguisher in each cabinet. B.Prepare recesses in rated walls as required to maintain fire-separation integrity of

partition. C.Securely fasten to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.



1.Typical Fastenings: Use machine screws or bolts to metal backing. Toggle bolts will not be permitted.

2.Drill and tap mounting surfaces for mounting hardware as required. D.Provide specified mounting brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets. 1.Secure to mounting surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E.Determine the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. 1.Inspect, charge, and tag the fire extinguishers within 10 days before the Substantial

Completion date. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Toilet Accessories 27720.00 10810-1

SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide toilet accessories complete with attachment hardware as shown and as

specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 08800 - Glazing: frameless glass mirror. 2.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems: backing plates. 3.Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."10810.A"=Framed mirror. 2."10810.B"=Combination paper towel dispenser and disposal unit. 3."10810.C"=Combination seat cover and toilet tissue dispenser with sanitary napkin

disposal (Female), Type 1. 4."10810.D"=Combination seat cover and toilet tissue dispenser with sanitary napkin

disposal (Female), Type 2; serving 2 compartments. 5."10810.E"=Combination seat cover and toilet tissue dispenser (Men's). 6."10810.F"=Vanity or lavatory mounted all-purpose soap dispenser. 7."10810.G"=Clothes hooks. 8."10810.H"=Recessed soap dish. 9."10810.I"=Grab bars. 10."10810.J"=Shower curtain rod. 11."10810.K"=Shower curtain. 12."10810.L"=Folding seat. 13."10810.M"=Utility shelf and mop strip. 14."10810.N"=Pipe wrap. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Accessories shall be the product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise

specified. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list,



and installation requirements for each accessory item specified. C.Maintenance data, operating instructions, and keys required for each type of

equipment and lock. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. B.Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage,

or wetting. C.Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. D.Protection: 1.Maintain protective covers on units until installation is complete. 2.Remove protective covers at final cleanup of installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Coordinate submission of installation instructions so that backing, blocking, framing,

and formwork can be properly installed and work of other trades will not be delayed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., American Specialties, Inc., or Bradley

Corporation. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, commercial grade, Type 302/304, gage as

standard with manufacturer of specified items. B.Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded. C.Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold rolled stretcher leveled; with G90 galvanized

coating. D.Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement. E.Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; as recommended by accessory

manufacturer for component and substrate. 1.Fastening shall be concealed and theftproof when available.



F.Locks: Provide locks and furnish keys for standard lockable items. 2.03FINISHES A.Provide manufacturer's finish for each item indicated in accessory schedule,

stainless steel where available. 1.Where there are choices of available finishes, not including satin stainless

steel, provide chart for Architect's selection. B.Exposed Finishes: Stainless steel, No. 4, satin finish; satin chrome finish

acceptable where stainless steel not available for accessory item scheduled. C.Concealed Surfaces: Pretreat and clean. Spray apply one coat primer and baked

enamel finish. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A.Framed Mirror (M1): 18" W X 36" H 1.No. 0600 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-290 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 700 made by Bradley. B.Combination Paper Towel Dispenser & Disposal Unit (Comb 4): 1.No. 6467 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-38032 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 2027 made by Bradley. C.Combination Seat Cover and Toilet Tissue Dispenser with Sanitary Napkin Disposal

(Comb 1): Recessed. 1.No. 0482 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-3574 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 5912 made by Bradley. D.Combination Seat Cover and Toilet Tissue Dispenser with Sanitary Napkin Disposal

(Comb 2): For toilet partition at women's toilets serving two compartments. 1.No. 0481 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-3571 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 5911 made by Bradley. E.Combination Seat Cover & Toilet Tissue Dispenser (Comb 3): 1.No. 0484 made by American Specialties. 2.No. 3474 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 5921 made by Bradley. F.Lavatory-Mounted All-Purpose Soap Dispenser (SD 1): 6" spout shall extend over

basin. Provide short soap bottle for disabled clearances. One each lavatory.



1.No. 0331 D made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-8221 6 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 6306 made by Bradley, provide with All-Purpose soap valve. G.Clothes Hooks (CH): One for each individual toilet room. Mount to back of door. 1.No. 0751 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-2116 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 9119 made by Bradley. H.Recessed Soap Dish (SD 2): One for each shower stall. 1.No. 0406 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-661 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 9352 made by Bradley. I.Grab Bars (GB): 1.Surface mounted, concealed fastenings, for mounting on metal toilet partitions and

ceramic-tiled gypsum board partitions. See Section 09110 for steel backing plates in gypsum board partitions. Bars to be 1-1/2" diameter stainless steel with non-slip peened finish.

2.Structural Strength: The structural strength of grab bars, fasteners, and mounting devices shall meet the following specifications :

a.Bending stress in a grab bar or seat induced by the maximum bending moment from the application of a 250-pound point load shall be less than the allowable stress for the material of the grab bar or seat.

b.Shear stress induced in a grab bar or seat by the application of a 250-pound point load shall be less than the allowable shear stress for the material of the grab bar or seat, and its mounting bracket or other support is considered to be fully restrained, then direct and torsional shear stresses shall not exceed the allowable shear stress.

c.Shear force induced in fastener or mounting device from the application of a 250-pound point load shall be less than the allowable lateral load of either the fastener or mounting device or the supporting structure, whichever is the smaller allowable load.

d.Tensile force induced in a fastener by a direct tension force of a 250-pound point load, plus the maximum moment from the application of a 250-pound point load, shall be less than the allowable withdrawal load between the fastener and supporting structure.

e.Grab bars shall not rotate within their fittings. 3.At water closets in accessible toilet compartments and all individual toilet rooms: a.No. 3200P, type 56 made by American Specialties. b.No. B-6237 made by Bobrick. c.No. 800 Series, type 059 made by Bradley. 4.At showers: a.No. 3200P, type 61 made by American Specialties. b.No. B-62616 made by Bobrick. c.No. 800 Series type 028 made by Bradley.



J.Femine Napkin, Tampon Dispenser (FNTD): Doors shall be 18 gauge with full length stainless steel piano hinge. Tumbler locks on door and coin boxes shall have separate keys for maximum security. Coin denomination required for 25 cents.

1.No. 6468 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-352 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 872 made by McKinney/Essex K.Shower Curtain Rod: Concealed mounting, one for each shower stall. 1.No. 1206 rod w/1203 Flange made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-207 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 9538 made by Bradley. L.Shower Curtain: One for each shower stall. 1.Preshrunk 8 oz. white duck, with chrome plated brass grommeted holes 6" o.c., with

sufficient chrome plated brass curtain hooks. M.Folding Seat (FS): Folding cushioned shower seat with stainless steel frame. One for

each shower stall. 1.No. 8210L or R made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-517-B-516 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 956 x 9561 made by Bradley. N.Utility Shelf & Mop Strip (USM): Provide one for each Janitor's Closet, 30" long. 1.No. 1315 made by American Specialties. 2.No. B-224 made by Bobrick. 3.No. 9983 made by Bradley. O.Pipe Wrap (PW): Brocar Products, Inc. "Trap Wrap C500 Series" or LavGuard

"Truebro". 2.05 FABRICATION A.Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B.Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. C.Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building

finishes. D.Form surfaces flat without distortion; maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. E.Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes, to prevent

electrolysis. F.Hot dip galvanize components; package complete with anchors and fittings.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Check openings scheduled to receive recessed units for correct dimensions,

plumbness of blocking or frames, and preparation that would affect installation of accessories.

B.Check areas to receive surface-mounted units for conditions that would affect quality

and execution of Work. C.Do not begin installation until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install fixtures and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions. B.Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Use tamper-proof, security type fasteners. D.Attach grab bars to backing installed in wall and attached to concrete to withstand loads

prescribed by California Building Standards Code (CBSC), Title 24, Section 1115B7 and 1115B8.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Adjust accessories for proper operation. B.After completion of installation, clean and polish exposed surfaces. C.Deliver keys and instruction sheets to Owner. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Owner-Furnished Contractor-Installed Equipment 27720.00 11000-1

SECTION 11000 OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.This section describes the responsibility requirements for equipment which is

identified as follows: 1.N CF-CI: New; Contractor-Furnished, Contractor-installed. 2.N OF-CI: New; Owner-Furnished, Contractor-installed. 3.N OF-OI: New; Owner-Furnished, Owner-installed. 4.EO-R-CI: Existing; relocated, Contractor-installed. 5.EO-R-OI: Existing; relocated, Owner-installed. B.Related Section: 1.Section 01325 - Schedule and Reports. 2.Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems: backing. 3.Division 11 - Equipment: laboratory equipment. 4.Division 15 - Mechanical: Rough-in for plumbing. 5.Division 16 - Electrical: Rough-in for electrical. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."11000.A"=N CF-CI: New; Contractor-Furnished, Contractor-installed. 2."11000.B"=N OF-CI: New; Owner-Furnished, Contractor-installed. 3."11000.C"=N OF-OI: New; Owner-Furnished, Owner-installed. 4."11000.D"=EO-R-CI: Existing; relocated, Contractor-installed. 5."11000.E"=EO-R-OI: Existing; relocated, Owner-installed. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.For N CF-CI Equipment: 1.Submit shop drawings and material data. 2.Samples of colors and finishes. 3.Complete parts list identified by equipment list symbols. 4.Maintenance data, operating instruction, manufacturer's warranties and keys required for

each type of equipment and lock identified by room number in which equipment is installed.

C.For N OF-CI Equipment: Submit shop drawings indicating type, size and location of

backing material for installation as required. Furnish installation drawings



indicating rough-ins for plumbing, wiring, piping, ventilation and service require-ments.

D.Written test and adjustment certifications. 1.03DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Delivery of Equipment: Contractor shall receive equipment in manufacturer's packaging

and crating with contents clearly identified and properly marked with its respective symbol.

B.Handling of Equipment: Handle equipment to prevent damage. Provide temporary

skids under items weighing more than 150 pounds. C.Protect equipment from damage. Replace damaged equipment at no increase in

Contract Sum. D.Environmental Requirements: Owner-Furnished items shall not be delivered to project

site until building is fully enclosed and HVAC system is functioning. 1.04PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Schedule: Items shall be identified on the Project Schedule. 1.Specific requirements of items as specified in the individual Sections. 2.The Contractor's Baseline CPM Schedule shall include activity logic restraints between

Contractor activities and N OF-OI activities. The Contractor shall provide a written request for information within 14 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed if it is unclear as to the activity durations for N OF-CI activities.

B.Contractor shall schedule pre-installation meeting with the Owner's Representative and

Architect to coordinate and review details, schedules, and responsibilities of the work of this Section.

1.05IDENTIFICATION AND RESPONSIBILITY A.Equipment Work for this Project is listed and specified with corresponding symbols for

identification and responsibility clearly established for each item. B.Symbols designating responsibility have the following definitions: N CF-CINew; Contractor furnished and installed. See individual specification section as

noted on Schedule. N OF-CINew; Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed. Owner responsible for coordinating

deliveries with Contractor to assure timely delivery of equipment. Contractor responsible for identifying equipment on Project Schedule; refer to Section 01325. Contractor



responsible for obtaining from Owner complete information regarding utility rough-in requirements and space and backing requirements. Contractor shall receive items at time of delivery, uncrate, inspect for shipping damage, assemble and install. Contractor shall furnish to Owner written receipt for items at time of delivery. Contractor shall provide necessary materials and components to install the equipment in an operating condition, but not including repairing of any existing damages to the equipment unless specifically referred to in these Specifications.

N OF-OINew; Owner-furnished, Owner-installed. The specific piece of equipment is not in

this Contract, actual installation of this equipment will be by the Owner. This equipment will be identified on the Drawings as "N.I.C." Roughing-in for the OF-CI equipment is provided under applicable Sections governing the type of work. Rough-in and final utility connections for this equipment is work of Sections governing the applicable utility.

EO-R-CIExisting equipment to be reinstalled by Contractor. Contractor responsible for

removing equipment, wrapping to protect equipment, and safely storing on-site until time for reinstallation. Contractor responsible for utility rough-in requirements and space and backing requirements. Contractor responsible for testing and modifying existing equipment to make it operable.

EO-R-OIExisting equipment to be reinstalled by Owner. Contractor responsible for utility

rough-in requirements and backing requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT LIST A.As noted on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Prior to commencing work, coordinate work of equipment requirements with work of

related Sections to obtain proper installation of items. Contractor shall acquaint himself with work of other Sections whose work abuts, joins, or is affected by or related to items specified in the applicable Sections.



B.Carefully examine drawings and directions for proper installation of materials and

equipment to avoid substantial changes. C.Verify pipe connection sizes and locations shown on plans and any available roughing-in

diagrams with actual equipment to be installed. D.Commence when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Owner-Furnished Equipment: The general arrangement of this equipment is indicated

on the Drawings. Install in strict conformance with available manufacturer's directions. When this equipment is not available prior to the installation schedule, rough-in utility service at walls or floors as necessary and leave ready for future connections.

B.Cutting of Construction: Carefully layout work in advance. Cutting shall be done

carefully, damage to buildings, and piping, wiring or equipment as a result of cutting for installation shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trade involved, at no additional expense to the Owner.

C.Setting and Connection: Install and connect equipment plumb and make level in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Secure anchor and attach items and accessories. Make connections between equipment and work of other Sections in a neat manner, and install equipment so that work of other Sections will not be injured or damaged. Where applicable provide required filler and trim pieces to close spaces between equipment and work of other Sections.

D.Connect equipment to mechanical and electrical Work provided by Divisions 15 and 16. E.Touch up and restore any factory finishes partially damaged or defaced during delivery,

relocation, and installation to leave in condition acceptable to Architect. 1.Replace any item not found acceptable following touch-up and restoration at no increase

in Contract Sum. 3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING D.Cleaning and Adjusting: Carefully test and adjust equipment for proper operation.

Lubricate moving parts if required by the manufacturer's specifications. Prior to acceptance of the Project, clean medical equipment both inside and outside, and leave equipment free from defects, damage, and blemishes.

B.Remove debris from areas of Work. Leave equipment and work areas in condition

acceptable to Architect.



C.Leave equipment functioning properly. 3.04TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A.Prior to installation, thoroughly examine the equipment, materials, and components for

both visual defects and conformance with Specifications. B.After installation, the equipment shall be inspected and tested under operating

conditions. If inspections or tests show defects, such defects shall be correct-ed, defective material replaced and inspection and test repeated. Such correc-tions, replacement and retesting shall be made at no additional expense to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Projection Screens 27720.00 11132-1

SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide electrically operated projection screens complete with case, motors, and

controls as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 2.Division 16 - Electrical. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."11132.A"=Projection screen. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, adjacent materials, electrical connections, and details

of installation. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Complete screen unit shall be listed by UL and bear the re-examination markers of UL. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Projection Screen: Da-Lite "Tensioned Director Electrol", Stewart Filmscreen

Corp., or Bretford Manufacturing Inc. 1.Size: a.Auditorium: 1)A-1: 87"x 116"; 12" drop. 2)A-2: 70"x 70"; 40" drop. 3)A-3: 70"x 70"; 40" drop. b.Seminar Room: 1)S-1: 72"x 96"; 24" drop.


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Projection Screens 27720.00 11132-2

2)S-2: 60"x 60"; 24" drop. 3)S-3: 60"x 60"; 24" drop. c.Meeting Room: Size as shown on Drawings. 2.Surface: Flame-retardant and mildew-resistant fiberglass with glass bead. 3.Mounting: Extended mounting recessed above ceiling. 4.Operation: Electrically operated by three-positions (up/Down/Stop) switch, 115 volts, 60

Hz, 2.5 amps, UL listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's installation

instructions. B.Install securely attached to supporting members and test for proper operation. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Projector Lifts 27720.00 11138-1

SECTION 11138 PROJECTOR LIFTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide ceiling mounted video projector lift as shown on the Drawings and as

specified. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: miscellaneous supports. 2.Division 16 - Electrical. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."11138.A"=Projector lifts. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEM A.Project Lift: SVS, Inc. "Mimi 7EX" of the following description: 1.400-pound lift capacity. 2.Lowers from ceiling to 3-foot above the floor. 3.Provided with low voltage control with switch control capable of breaking both sides of

the AC line to motor. 4.Lift functions with adjustable limit and show positioning anywhere from the top limit to the

lower limit of the lift with accuracy of plus or minus 1/8-inch. 5.Low voltage control delay between direction changes of motor. 6.Protective circuit so only one direction can be activated at any time. 7.All steel construction except drum lock pawl of nylon. 8.UL approved gear motor with magnetic brake. 9.No. 40 steel chain drive to the lifting drum. 10.Output sprocket welded directly to the cable drum. 11.Cable drum equipped with drum lock. 12.Decorative cover with plenum shroud and required ceiling items; color as selected by

Architect.


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Projector Lifts 27720.00 11138-2

13.Lift shall meet CBC seismic restraint requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown. B.Secure projector lift to ceiling support free of rattle, binding, or distortion; seismically

braced. C.Adjust for proper operation. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Residential Appliances 27720.00 11452-1

SECTION 11452 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes providing residential appliances as shown on the Drawings and as

specified. B.Related Section: 1.Section 06410 - Custom Casework. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."11452.A"=Refrigerator/freezer. 2."11452.B"=Microwave. 3."11452.C"=Dishwasher. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts of equipment. 1.03WARRANTY A.Furnish written 1-year factory warranty for repair of any defect in appliances without cost

to Owner. B.Service: Provide any required servicing for period of 3 months after installation during

regular working hours at no cost to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A.General: 1.Finish Color for Appliances: To be selected from manufacturer's full range currently

available. B.Refrigerator: Sub-Zero Models 611 (Second Floor) and 632 (Third Floor), General

Electric Appliances, or Whirlpool. 1.Depth: 24 inches.


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Residential Appliances 27720.00 11452-2

2.Color: As selected by Architect. C.Microwave: General Electric Appliances Model JVM1660SB (over the Range) or

Whirlpool; stainless steel. D.Dishwasher: General Electric Appliances Model GSD5360FSS or Whirlpool; stainless

steel. 1.Size: 23-3/4-inch D x 35-inch H x 24-Inch W. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install appliances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install plumb, true, and accurately related to adjacent casework. C.Sequence of installation shall be coordinated with work of other Sections. D.Contractor shall make necessary adjustments, at no additional cost to Owner, to make

installed items operate in manner satisfactory to Owner. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG - PCF&P Blinds 27720.00 12491-1

SECTION 12491 BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide aluminum and wood blinds as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are defined

as follows: 1."12491.A"=Blinds. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Horizontal blinds, including hardware, accessories, mounting brackets, and fastenings,

shall be from one manufacturer. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions for

blinds. C.Shop Drawings: Show field-measured dimensions of openings scheduled to

receive blinds. D.Samples: Two 6-inch samples of slats indicating color. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store packaged products in original containers with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use. B.Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of products to prevent damage. Stack

products off of ground on level platform, fully protected from weather. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Scheduling and Sequencing: Schedule installation of items to occur after application of



exposed finishes wherever installation will not damage exposed finish surfaces and completion of finishes will not impede installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Aluminum: Levolor Corporation "Riviera DustGuard". B.Wood: Hunter Douglas "Country Woods Collection, Classic". 2.02 ALUMINUM BLINDS A.Slats: Magnesium aluminum alloy. 1.Thickness: Nominal 0.0085 inch. 2.Slat Width: 1-inch, nominal. 3.Design: Unperforated. B.Head Rail: 1.Material: Steel. 2.Shape: Manufacturer's standard "U" channel. 3.Minimum Thickness: 0.025 inch. 4.Cross braced for rigidity. 5.Equipped with top brace, end braces, top cradle, and accessories for installation. C.Bottom Rail: .031-inch thick tomized steel with color coordinated end and ladder caps. D.Tilter: 1.Manufacturer's standard enclosed lubricated mechanism with 180-degree tilt range,

designed to hold slats at set angle. 2.Worm-and-gear drive actuated by wand. a.Wand length shall be sized in accordance with sill height. E.Ladders: Distance between slate shall not exceed 15.7 slats per vertical foot. F.Finish: 1.Steel parts shall be galvanized, bonderized, and painted. 2.Finish: #34 Brushed Aluminum. 2.03WOOD BLINDS A.Slats: 831 Sugar Maple, stain finish. 1.Slat Width: 1-inch wide. B.Headrail and Bottomrail: Low profile, clear Maple.



C.Accessories: Braided ladder, lift cords, and tilt wand to match clear maple color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Windows to receive blinds as follows: 1.Aluminum Blinds, Interior-to-Exterior Windows: Provide aluminum blinds at 72 punched

windows at stainless steel window wall and at Conference Room 300. 2.Wood Blinds, Interior-to-Exterior Windows: Rooms 120A, 120B, 120C, 120, 114B,

114C, 218B, 218 (2 windows), 216, 214, 210, 314B, 314C, 314E, 314F, 310.

3.Aluminum Blinds, Interior-to-Interior Windows: At all offices except as noted in sub-paragraph 3.01A.4 below.

4.Wood Blinds, Interior-to-Interior Windows: Rooms 114D1, 120A1, 120B1, 120C1, 214A, 314A1, 314C1, and 314E1.

B.Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures. C.Assure adequate clearance to permit unencumbered operation. D.Position units plumb and true, and securely anchor in place with brackets, clips, and

fasteners. E.Install intermediate support brackets and extension brackets as needed to prevent

deflection in headrail. 3.02ADJUSTING A.Adjust clearances and overlaps to ensure free operation. B.Replace damaged items with new material. C.Repair surfaces damaged by improper installation. 3.03CLEANING A.Remove protective coverings and devices. B.Clean soiled blind surfaces and components in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations, and leave work site free of debris. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Shades 27720.00 12493-1

SECTION 12493 SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following shades and associated hardware as shown on the Drawings

and as specified: 1.Individual switching; manual activation; electric operation. Dual shadeband with

sunscreen and black-out material. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: blocking. 2.Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 3.Division 16 - Electrical. C.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are

defined as follows: 1."12493.A"=Window shade. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Show field-measured dimensions of openings scheduled to

receive shades. D.Samples: Three 12-inch square samples of each type of shade material. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.All products, including hardware, accessories, mounting brackets, and fastenings, shall

be from one manufacturer. B.Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating

previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by window shade manufacturer.

C.Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide shade material tested in accordance with

NFPA 701 - Vertical-Burn Test and rated "PASS", and ASTM E84 Flame Spread 17, Smoke Density Index 118.



1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver prefabricated shades to site in labeled protective packages, uniquely identified

for each intended location. Schedule delivery to prevent delays but minimize on-site storage.

B.Store materials in manner recommended by shade manufacturer, inside, under cover,

and in manner to keep shades dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes.

C.Maintain ambient temperature between 60 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit and a relative

humidity between 20 percent and 50 percent for a period starting 24 hours before installation of window shades and maintain until Final Acceptance.

1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where

possible, to ensure proper fitting of window shade system. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay required installation schedules.

1.06WARRANTY A.Provide manufacturer's 10-year warranty on materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.MechoShade Systems, Inc. "ElectroShade (electrically operated units)" or Skyco

Shading Corp. 1.Bracket: MechoShade "ElectroShade Double Bracket Type 13". 2.02MATERIALS A.Black-out Shades: "ThermoVeil 0700 Series". 1.Fabric: Blackout material, washable and colorfast laminated and embossed vinyl

coated fabric, .012-mils-thick blackout material and weighing .81 lbs. per square yard, with a minimum of 62 threads per square inch.

2.Color: As selected by Architect. B.Sunscreen Material: "ThermoVeil Sunscreen" as selected by Architect. C.Electric Operation:



1.Motor shall be tubular asynchronous and concealed inside an extruded aluminum tube with asymmetrical channels to which the shade and the mounting spline are affixed.

2.Internal limit switches shall be readily removable without having to remove the motor or the shade-tube assembly.

D.Control System: Manufacturer's standard motor system customized to connect to

audio-visual system. E.Pockets/Blackout Channels/SnapLoc Fascia: 1.Extruded aluminum pockets with exposed tile support and pocket closure with baked

enamel finish. 2.Accessibility by removing closure. No exposed screws or mounting means. Pocket

shall be sized for: a.Single shadeband. b.Overlapping shades (2 rolls of shadecloth). 3.Extruded aluminum SnapLoc fascia which continuously fits on the end and center

brackets as a 1-piece section over 2 or more shadebands. 2.03FABRICATION A.Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb,

unless specifically indicated otherwise. B.Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. 1.Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. 2.Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more

than 1/8 inch in either direction per 8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design.

C.Fabricate with chain locations as shown on Drawings. 2.04FACTORY FINISHES A.Aluminum Components: Clear anodized aluminum for field painting as specified in

Section 09900. B.Steel Components: Cadmium-plated, satin-finished, or bonderized prior to painting with

baked-enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01INSTALLATION A.Locate shades at exterior windows in Auditorium and Seminar Room. B.Install shades in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures. C.Assure adequate clearance to permit unencumbered operation. D.Position units plumb and true, and securely anchor in place with brackets, clips, and

fasteners. E.Connect motor controls to audio-visual system. 3.02ADJUSTING A.Adjust clearances to ensure free operation. B.Replace damaged items with new material. C.Repair surfaces damaged by improper installation. 3.03CLEANING A.Remove protective coverings and devices. B.Clean soiled shade surfaces and components in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations, and leave work site free of debris. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Seating 27720.00 12520-1

SECTION 12520 SEATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide the following fixed furniture seating as shown on the Drawings and as

specified: 1.Upholstered couch. 2.Tables. 3.Chairs. B.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are defined

as follows: 1."12520.A"=Couch. 2."12520.B"=Tables 3."12520.C"=Chairs. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedure: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Show materials, methods of construction, mounting connections,

and installation layout. C.Samples: Submit two samples, plus samples required by Contractor of the following: 1.Fabric from same dye lots to be purchased. D.Submit manufacturer's literature showing compliance with flammability requirement. E.Fabric manufacturer' literature on cleaning. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator, Installer Qualifications: Established firm with minimum 5 years

experience in fabrication and installation of seating. B.Regulatory Requirement: Upholstered units shall comply with flammability requirements

of California Bureau of Home Furnishings (CBHF) Technical Bulletin TB117, Resilient Cellular Materials, Section A&D, dated February 1975,

when tested in accordance with Federal Test Method Standard 191, Method 5903.2. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A.Arrange for timely shipment from fabricator to Contractor's storage area at earliest possible date to permit inspections to be made, any shortages remedied, and any necessary corrections completed without delay in installation schedules.

B.Do not deliver to site until building is closed in and painting, finishing, and overhead

work is completed in the areas to receive the work of this Section. C.Handle with care so as not to damage any surfaces or subject banquettes to stress. D.Protect against soil, dirt, and physical damage including damage to finish and joinery

due to temperature and humidity variations during transport, warehousing, and installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Upholstered Couch: As shown on Drawings. B.Tables: As shown on Drawings. C.Chairs: As shown on Drawings. D.Fasteners: As required for installation conditions. 1.Chairs: As specified in Seciton 05700. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces and spaces to receive units are satisfactory for their installation. B.Do not commence installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Remove units from crates or protective wrappings as near the site of installation as

possible. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Install units under direct supervision of manufacturer's representative.



B.Set units straight, level, and plumb. 1.Secure to substrate with adequate fasteners. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Protect against damage until Final Acceptance. B.Clean units immediately prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION


SMP/SHG-PCF&P Multiple Seating 27720.00 12600-1

SECTION 12600 MULTIPLE SEATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Provide floor-mounted chairs with inner upholstered seat and back with outer wood

panels, wood arms, and gravity self-rising seat, complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified.

B.Definitions: Notes appearing on the Drawings and referred to in this Section are defined

as follows: 1."12600.A"=Multiple seating. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Procedures: In accordance with Section 01330. B.Shop Drawings: Prepared from Architectural Drawings and from field dimensions,

showing the seating layout, seat numbering sequence, chair sizes, and aisle widths. Also show a section view with profile dimensions of the seating and back-to-back row dimensions.

C.Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts or

samples of materials showing the full range of standard colors, finishes, and patterns.

1.Fabric 2.Metal Finishes 3.Wood Finishes D.Certification: Statement signed by the theater seating manufacturer confirming that the

products submitted comply with the specified requirements. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator, Installer Qualifications: Established firm with minimum 5 years

experience in fabrication and installation of seating. B.Regulatory Requirement: Upholstered assembly shall comply with the existing seating

and flammability requirements of California Bureau of Home Furnishings (CBHF) Technical Bulletin TB117, Resilient Cellular Materials, Section A&D, dated February 1975, when tested in accordance with Federal Test Method Standard 191, Method 5903.2.



C.Communications Requirement: Seats shall be capable of mounting a Panduit MiniComm Catagory 6 cable and connector in the seating without the need for surface mount boxes. Raceway for cabling shall be provided throughout the length of the seating rows, at least 2-inch x 2-inch in interior dimensions.

D.Design and install seating with end standards aligning from first to last row and with

backs and seats varied in width to optimize sightliness. Comply with ADA rules and regulations.

1.04PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver seating in manufacturer's unopened cartons clearly labeled with manufacturer's

name and contents. B.Handle seating in manner to prevent damage. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Conditions: Do not install seating until space is enclosed and

weatherproof, wet work in space is complete and dry, installation of finishes including painting is complete, and ceilings are complete. Do not install seating until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are continuously maintained at final occupancy values.

1.06EXTRA MATERIALS A.Furnish from the same production run as the materials installed. Package materials

with protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. 1.Seat and back zippered covers to be furnished in a quantity equal to 5 percent of the

amount of chairs installed. 1.07WARRANTY A.Manufacturer shall provide a Lifetime Warranty to the original purchaser of the seating

as follows: 1.Manufacturer shall warrant it's products against failures and manufacturing defects for

the life of the product. 2.Manufacturer shall provide parts and labor to replace defective parts for 2 years after the

installation. Thereafter, the manufacturer will provide replacement parts for the life of the product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.01MANUFACTURER A.KI "Concerto" as follows: 1.Basic floor mounted chair with power and data. 2.Tablet arms. 2.02MATERIALS A.Padding: High resiliency polyurethane foam which conforms to the standards of the

California Bureau of Home Furnishings 117. The back shall be 1-3/4-inch thick. The seat shall be 3-inch thick.

B.Seating Fabric: KI "Pallas Fabric" Navy Blue. 1.Both seat and back shall be fully upholstered on all surfaces and closed at the

rear/bottom with a zipper fastener allowing easy on-site reupholstery. 2.Upholstery shall be first quality without creases, stretch lines, or wrinkles. C.Powdercoat and Plastic Finishes: Blue grey. 2.03FABRICATION, GENERAL A.Fabricate the theater seating in contoured form for maximum comfort using materials which are carefully selected to be free from defects, objectionable projections, or

irregularities. Smooth round corners and edges to present the least possible snagging and pinching hazards.

2.04MOUNTING A.Fabricate seating units for floor attachment, using standards which have been manufactured to conform to the slope of the floor while maintaining seat and back in the

same angular relationship to standards throughout. 2.05METAL STANDARDS A.Frame shall be 3/4-inch x 2-inch x #16 gage cold rolled welded steel tubing, and

5/16-inch x 3-inch hot rolled, steel strap, welded into one integral freestanding structure upon which the seat, back, and arms are assembled.

1.Pivot and Stop Pins: Machined from cold formed steel to tolerances of +0.000 - 0.003. 2.Floor Mount Plate: 5/16-inch thick hot rolled, pickled in oil steel plate with two

countersunk holes for 1/4-20 mounting screws. 2.06UPHOLSTERED CHAIRS A.General: 1.Fabricate auditorium seating with padding and fabric covering.



2.Equip each seat with gravity self-rising mechanism so that unoccupied seats return to an upright position perpendicular to the base line of floor of auditorium.

3.Spring, compensating mechanism will not be acceptable. 4.Chair profile with the seat in the upright position cannot exceed 18". B.Seat Construction: Solid seat bottom construction comprised of a curved plywood

cherry veneer outer panel fastened solidly and without voids to an inner structural plywood panel.

1.The outer panel shall be 3/4-inch thick, and the inner panel shall be 5/8" thick. 2.Both shall be electronically glued hardwood plywood and shall be fastened with bayonet

hanging brackets at the top and steel angle at the bottom, resulting in a rigid connection with no visible connections.

3.Outer panel shall be stained to match the Architect's sample. 4.Padding: 3-inch thick, glued to the inner panel. 5.Seat assembly shall be supported by two formed steel, 7 gage, mounting brackets. 6.Seat shall have a built-in counterweight to insure automatic self rising without the aid of

springs. Arch-spring seat construction will not be acceptable. C.Back Construction: 1.Solid back construction comprised of a curved structural plywood inner panel fastened

solidly to an outer Cherry veneer plywood panel. 2.Inner panel shall be 3/8-inch curved plywood and the outer panel shall be made of

3/4-inch thick hardwood plywood. 3.The two panels shall be fastened with two bayonet hanging brackets at the top and one

steel angle at the bottom, resulting in a rigid connection with no visible connections.

4.The outer panel shall be stained to match the Architect's sample. The padding material shall be 1-3/4-inch thick; glued to the inner panel, and shall conform to the standards of the California Bureau of Home Furnishings, Technical Bulletin 117.

5.The complete back assembly shall be supported by two, 13 gage formed steel brackets, which shall attach the unit to the frame.

D.Armrests: Plastic laminate finish to match blue grey; special stain on tablet arm

plywood core to match Cherry wood in Auditorium. E.Hinge: 1.Seat hinge shall be a weldment consisting of a formed 7 gage, hot rolled pickled in oil

steel component and shall be punched to receive a 0.56 i.d. x 0.75 o.d. x 0.5" long steel bushing.

2.Self-lubricating nylon sleeve shall be fitted between the seat hinge and the standard seat support pin. The hinge shall be machined to provide a positive stop location for the seat in both occupied and unoccupied positions. The hinge shall be fitted with a plastic cover to eliminate all pinch points and shall include a 1/4" thick rubber pad to dampen noise upon the seat return



to the vertical position. 2.07END PANEL A.Provide manufacturer's standard end panel at the end of the row. 1.Configuration of the panel shall follow the angle of the frame and back at the rear, and

shall be vertical at the front end. 2.Construction: 1/2-inch thick plywood with Cherry veneer on both sides stained to match

the outer wood seat, back, and arms. Edges of the panel shall be finished with 1/8-inch solid wood, glued to the sides and bottom of the panel.

2.08SOLID WOOD EDGES A.Seat and back panels shall have the top and sides edges finished with a 1/8-inch thick

solid wood strip, finished to match the rest of the wood components. 2.09AISLE LIGHT A.Provide aisle lights in accordance to the locations shown on Drawings. 1.Units shall be of low voltage type and the light tube shall be fitted in a routed area on the

underside of the armrest. 2.Chair frame shall be prepared to accept the power wire and the necessary access holes

and blank cover plates shall be provided. 3.Chair manufacturer shall provide the necessary transformers. 4.Wiring and electrical connections shall be at the job site. Refer to Division 16. 2.10NUMBER AND LETTER PLATES A.Provide manufacturer's standard shape brass number and letter plates. 1.Font Size and Type: As selected by Architect. 2.Locate number plates fitted in a recessed area at the top edge of the seat. 3.Attach row identification letter plate at the back of the arm. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for

construction tolerances as they affect anchors and fasteners, and location of junction boxes.

B.Do not install units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION



A.Comply with seating manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products.

B.Locate seating in locations indicated on Drawings, with required clearances. C.Install standards in locations conforming to seating layout, with each standard attached

to substrate by no less than two anchoring devices of size and type required to produce chairs free from instability under conditions of actual use.

D.Install chairs using manufacturer's recommended hardware and fasteners. E.Verify seats fold up and return down properly without binding. 3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Adjust as required to assure that the seats in each row are aligned when in the upright

position. B.Touch-up minor abrasions and imperfections in painted finishes with coating which

matches factory-applied finish. C.Replace any upholstery which has been damage in installation. D.Clean units immediately prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION